[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025014091A1 - Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor - Google Patents

Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025014091A1
WO2025014091A1 PCT/KR2024/007452 KR2024007452W WO2025014091A1 WO 2025014091 A1 WO2025014091 A1 WO 2025014091A1 KR 2024007452 W KR2024007452 W KR 2024007452W WO 2025014091 A1 WO2025014091 A1 WO 2025014091A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
relay
terminal
communication
information
candidate
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/KR2024/007452
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
백서영
이승민
박기원
황대성
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
LG Electronics Inc
Original Assignee
LG Electronics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by LG Electronics Inc filed Critical LG Electronics Inc
Publication of WO2025014091A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025014091A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/02Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing
    • H04W40/04Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing based on wireless node resources
    • H04W40/08Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing based on wireless node resources based on transmission power
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/02Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing
    • H04W40/20Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing based on geographic position or location
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/02Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing
    • H04W40/22Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing using selective relaying for reaching a BTS [Base Transceiver Station] or an access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/11Allocation or use of connection identifiers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/14Direct-mode setup
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00Network topologies
    • H04W84/02Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/04Large scale networks; Deep hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/06Airborne or Satellite Networks
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02Terminal devices
    • H04W88/04Terminal devices adapted for relaying to or from another terminal or user
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/16Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices
    • H04W92/18Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices between terminal devices

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method for selecting a relay terminal to perform relay communication among a plurality of relay terminals in a wireless communication system and to a device therefor.
  • a wireless communication system is a multiple access system that supports communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (e.g., bandwidth, transmission power, etc.).
  • multiple access systems include a CDMA (code division multiple access) system, an FDMA (frequency division multiple access) system, a TDMA (time division multiple access) system, an OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) system, an SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) system, and an MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system.
  • SL refers to a communication method that establishes a direct link between user equipment (UE) to directly exchange voice or data between terminals without going through a base station (BS).
  • UE user equipment
  • BS base station
  • SL is being considered as a solution to solve the burden on base stations due to rapidly increasing data traffic.
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything refers to a communication technology that exchanges information with other vehicles, pedestrians, and objects with built-in infrastructure through wired/wireless communication.
  • V2X can be divided into four types: V2V (vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I (vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N (vehicle-to-network), and V2P (vehicle-to-pedestrian).
  • V2X communication can be provided through the PC5 interface and/or the Uu interface.
  • Figure 1 is a diagram for explaining and comparing V2X communication based on RAT before NR and V2X communication based on NR.
  • V2X messages may include location information, dynamic information, attribute information, etc.
  • a terminal may transmit a CAM of a periodic message type and/or a DENM of an event triggered message type to another terminal.
  • CAM may include basic vehicle information such as vehicle dynamic status information such as direction and speed, vehicle static data such as dimensions, exterior lighting status, and route history.
  • the terminal may broadcast CAM, and the latency of the CAM may be less than 100ms.
  • the terminal may generate DENM and transmit it to other terminals.
  • all vehicles within the transmission range of the terminal may receive CAM and/or DENM.
  • DENM may have a higher priority than CAM.
  • V2X scenarios have been proposed in NR in relation to V2X communication.
  • various V2X scenarios may include vehicle platooning, advanced driving, extended sensors, and remote driving.
  • vehicles can dynamically form a group and move together. For example, in order to perform platoon operations based on vehicle platooning, vehicles belonging to the group can receive periodic data from the lead vehicle. For example, vehicles belonging to the group can use the periodic data to reduce or increase the gap between vehicles.
  • the vehicles can be semi-autonomous or fully automated.
  • each vehicle can adjust its trajectories or maneuvers based on data acquired from local sensors of nearby vehicles and/or nearby logical entities.
  • each vehicle can share driving intentions with nearby vehicles.
  • raw data or processed data, or live video data acquired through local sensors can be exchanged between vehicles, logical entities, pedestrian terminals, and/or V2X application servers.
  • the vehicle can perceive the environment better than it can perceive using its own sensors.
  • a remote driver or V2X application can operate or control the remote vehicle.
  • cloud computing-based driving can be used to operate or control the remote vehicle.
  • access to a cloud-based back-end service platform can be considered for remote driving.
  • the technical problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a method for performing relay communication more accurately and efficiently.
  • a method for a terminal to select a candidate relay terminal includes: a step of receiving configuration information related to relay communication; a step of receiving discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals; and a step of selecting a first or more number of candidate relay terminals for the relay communication from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the discovery messages and the configuration information, wherein the first number can be determined based on a height of the terminal and the configuration information.
  • the first number is characterized in that it is determined differently for each height range based on the setting information.
  • the discovery message may be characterized by including information about the flight path.
  • the candidate relay terminal is characterized as being a relay terminal having a flight path within a predetermined error range from the flight path of the terminal among the plurality of relay terminals.
  • the candidate relay terminal is characterized in that it is a relay terminal located within a selection allowable height range set by the setting information among the plurality of relay terminals.
  • the selection of the candidate relay terminal is characterized in that it is performed based on the height of the terminal falling within a specific height range included in the setting information.
  • the method further comprises a step of reporting information about the candidate relay terminals of the first number or more to the base station.
  • the terminal is characterized in that it forms a second or more number of indirect links for the relay communication based on the selected candidate relay terminals.
  • the second number is characterized in that it is determined based on the setting information and the height of the terminal.
  • the terminal is characterized as being an Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) remote terminal.
  • UAV Unmanned Aerial Vehicle
  • a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having recorded thereon instructions for performing the method for selecting a candidate relay terminal described above may be provided.
  • a terminal may be provided that performs the method for selecting a candidate relay terminal described above.
  • a processing device may be provided for controlling a terminal performing the method for selecting a candidate relay terminal described above.
  • a method for a base station to receive candidate relay information from a terminal in a wireless communication system includes the steps of: transmitting configuration information related to relay communication to the terminal; receiving the candidate relay information for a first or more number of candidate relay terminals selected from among the plurality of relay terminals; and selecting at least one relay terminal to perform relay communication from among the first or more number of candidate relay terminals, and transmitting information about the at least one selected terminal to the terminal, wherein the first number can be determined based on a height of the terminal and the configuration information.
  • a base station performing a method of receiving candidate relay information from a terminal as described above may be provided.
  • relay communication can be performed more accurately and efficiently in a wireless communication system.
  • Figure 1 is a diagram for explaining and comparing V2X communication based on RAT before NR and V2X communication based on NR.
  • Figure 2 shows the structure of the LTE system.
  • Figure 3 shows the structure of the NR system.
  • Figure 4 shows the structure of a radio frame of NR.
  • Figure 5 shows the slot structure of an NR frame.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a communication structure that can be provided in a 6G system according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an electromagnetic spectrum according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication.
  • Figure 9 shows a terminal performing V2X or SL communication.
  • Figure 10 shows resource units for V2X or SL communication.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates an example of a BWP according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a procedure for a terminal to perform V2X or SL communication according to a resource allocation mode according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 13 illustrates a procedure for path switching from a direct path to an indirect path.
  • Figure 14 schematically illustrates how to switch from a direct route to an indirect route.
  • FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams for explaining a procedure for U2U relay selection (UE-to-UE Relay Selection) without relay discovery.
  • Figure 17 schematically illustrates a flat protocol stack for L2 U2U relay.
  • Figures 18 to 22 are drawings for explaining the U2X system.
  • Figure 23 is a drawing for explaining how a terminal selects a relay terminal.
  • Figure 24 is a diagram for explaining a method for a base station to receive candidate relay information from a terminal.
  • Figure 25 illustrates a communication system applied to the present invention.
  • Figure 26 illustrates a wireless device that can be applied to the present invention.
  • Fig. 27 shows another example of a wireless device applied to the present invention.
  • the wireless device can be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example/service.
  • Figure 28 illustrates a vehicle or autonomous vehicle to which the present invention is applied.
  • a wireless communication system is a multiple access system that supports communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (e.g., bandwidth, transmission power, etc.).
  • multiple access systems include a CDMA (code division multiple access) system, an FDMA (frequency division multiple access) system, a TDMA (time division multiple access) system, an OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) system, an SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) system, and an MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system.
  • Sidelink refers to a communication method that establishes a direct link between user equipment (UE) to directly exchange voice or data between terminals without going through a base station (BS).
  • UE user equipment
  • BS base station
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything refers to a communication technology that exchanges information with other vehicles, pedestrians, and objects with built-in infrastructure through wired/wireless communication.
  • V2X can be divided into four types: V2V (vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I (vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N (vehicle-to-network), and V2P (vehicle-to-pedestrian).
  • V2X communication can be provided through the PC5 interface and/or the Uu interface.
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • FDMA frequency division multiple access
  • TDMA time division multiple access
  • OFDMA orthogonal frequency division multiple access
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • CDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as UTRA (universal terrestrial radio access) or CDMA2000.
  • TDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as GSM (global system for mobile communications)/GPRS (general packet radio service)/EDGE (enhanced data rates for GSM evolution).
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • EDGE enhanced data rates for GSM evolution
  • OFDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as IEEE (institute of electrical and electronics engineers) 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA (evolved UTRA).
  • IEEE 802.16m is an evolution of IEEE 802.16e, providing backward compatibility with systems based on IEEE 802.16e.
  • UTRA is part of UMTS (universal mobile telecommunications system).
  • 3GPP (3rd generation partnership project) LTE (long term evolution) is a part of E-UMTS (evolved UMTS) that uses E-UTRA (evolved-UMTS terrestrial radio access), employing OFDMA in the downlink and SC-FDMA in the uplink.
  • LTE-A (advanced) is an evolution of 3GPP LTE.
  • 5G NR is a new clean-slate type mobile communication system that is the successor technology to LTE-A and has the characteristics of high performance, low latency, and high availability. 5G NR can utilize all available spectrum resources, from low frequency bands below 1 GHz to intermediate frequency bands between 1 GHz and 10 GHz, and high frequency (millimeter wave) bands above 24 GHz.
  • FIG. 2 shows the structure of an applicable LTE system. This may be called an Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), or a Long Term Evolution (LTE)/LTE-A system.
  • E-UTRAN Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A Long Term Evolution
  • the E-UTRAN includes a base station (20; BS) that provides a control plane and a user plane to a terminal (10).
  • the terminal (10) may be fixed or mobile, and may be called by other terms such as a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a subscriber station (SS), a mobile terminal (MT), a wireless device, etc.
  • the base station (20) refers to a fixed station that communicates with the terminal (10), and may be called by other terms such as an evolved-NodeB (eNB), a base transceiver system (BTS), an access point, etc.
  • eNB evolved-NodeB
  • BTS base transceiver system
  • access point etc.
  • Base stations (20) can be connected to each other through the X2 interface.
  • the base station (20) is connected to an EPC (Evolved Packet Core, 30) through the S1 interface, more specifically, to an MME (Mobility Management Entity) through the S1-MME and to an S-GW (Serving Gateway) through the S1-U.
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core, 30
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • S-GW Serving Gateway
  • EPC (30) consists of MME, S-GW, and P-GW (Packet Data Network-Gateway).
  • MME has terminal connection information or terminal capability information, and this information is mainly used for terminal mobility management.
  • S-GW is a gateway with E-UTRAN as an end point
  • P-GW is a gateway with PDN as an end point.
  • the layers of the Radio Interface Protocol between the terminal and the network can be divided into L1 (the first layer), L2 (the second layer), and L3 (the third layer) based on the three lower layers of the Open System Interconnection (OSI) standard model, which is widely known in communication systems.
  • OSI Open System Interconnection
  • the physical layer belonging to the first layer provides an information transfer service using a physical channel
  • the RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer located in the third layer controls radio resources between the terminal and the network.
  • the RRC layer exchanges RRC messages between the terminal and the base station.
  • Figure 3 shows the structure of the NR system.
  • the NG-RAN may include a gNB and/or an eNB that provides user plane and control plane protocol termination to the UE.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a case where only a gNB is included.
  • the gNB and the eNB are connected to each other via an Xn interface.
  • the gNB and the eNB are connected to a 5th generation core network (5G Core Network: 5GC) via an NG interface. More specifically, they are connected to an access and mobility management function (AMF) via an NG-C interface, and to a user plane function (UPF) via an NG-U interface.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • UPF user plane function
  • Figure 4 shows the structure of a radio frame of NR.
  • a radio frame can be used in uplink and downlink transmission in NR.
  • a radio frame has a length of 10 ms and can be defined as two 5 ms half-frames (Half-Frames, HF).
  • a half-frame can include five 1 ms subframes (Subframes, SF).
  • a subframe can be divided into one or more slots, and the number of slots in a subframe can be determined according to the subcarrier spacing (SCS).
  • SCS subcarrier spacing
  • Each slot can include 12 or 14 OFDM (A) symbols according to the cyclic prefix (CP).
  • each slot can include 14 symbols.
  • each slot can include 12 symbols.
  • the symbols can include OFDM symbols (or CP-OFDM symbols), SC-FDMA (Single Carrier - FDMA) symbols (or DFT-s-OFDM (Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM) symbols).
  • Table 1 illustrates the number of symbols per slot ((N slot symb ), the number of slots per frame ((N frame,u slot )) and the number of slots per subframe ((N subframe,u slot ) ) depending on the SCS setting (u) when normal CP is used.
  • Table 2 illustrates the number of symbols per slot, the number of slots per frame, and the number of slots per subframe according to SCS when extended CP is used.
  • OFDM(A) numerology e.g., SCS, CP length, etc.
  • OFDM(A) numerology e.g., SCS, CP length, etc.
  • the (absolute time) section of a time resource e.g., subframe, slot, or TTI
  • TU Time Unit
  • multiple numerologies or SCS can be supported to support various 5G services. For example, when the SCS is 15 kHz, wide area in traditional cellular bands can be supported, and when the SCS is 30 kHz/60 kHz, dense-urban, lower latency and wider carrier bandwidth can be supported. When the SCS is 60 kHz or higher, a bandwidth greater than 24.25 GHz can be supported to overcome phase noise.
  • the NR frequency band can be defined by two types of frequency ranges.
  • the two types of frequency ranges can be FR1 and FR2.
  • the numerical value of the frequency range can be changed, and for example, the two types of frequency ranges can be as shown in Table 3 below.
  • FR1 can mean "sub 6GHz range”
  • FR2 can mean “above 6GHz range” and can be called millimeter wave (mmW).
  • mmW millimeter wave
  • FR1 can include a band of 410 MHz to 7125 MHz as shown in Table 4 below. That is, FR1 can include a frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher.
  • the frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher included in FR1 can include an unlicensed band.
  • the unlicensed band can be used for various purposes, for example, it can be used for communication for vehicles (e.g., autonomous driving).
  • Figure 5 shows the slot structure of an NR frame.
  • a slot includes multiple symbols in the time domain.
  • one slot may include 14 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot may include 12 symbols.
  • one slot may include 7 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot may include 6 symbols.
  • a carrier includes a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency domain.
  • An RB Resource Block
  • An RB Resource Block
  • a BWP Bandwidth Part
  • P Physical Resource Block
  • a carrier can include at most N (for example, 5) BWPs.
  • Data communication can be performed through activated BWPs.
  • Each element can be referred to as a Resource Element (RE) in the resource grid, and one complex symbol can be mapped.
  • RE Resource Element
  • the wireless interface between terminals or between terminals and a network may be composed of an L1 layer, an L2 layer, and an L3 layer.
  • the L1 layer may mean a physical layer.
  • the L2 layer may mean at least one of a MAC layer, an RLC layer, a PDCP layer, and an SDAP layer.
  • the L3 layer may mean an RRC layer.
  • FIG. 6 illustrates a communication structure that can be provided in a 6G system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 6 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • New network characteristics in 6G could include:
  • AI can be applied at each stage of the communication process (or at each stage of signal processing, as described below).
  • High-precision localization (or location-based services) through communications is one of the functions of 6G wireless communication systems. Therefore, radar systems will be integrated with 6G networks.
  • AI Artificial Intelligence: Introducing AI into communications can simplify and improve real-time data transmission. AI can use a lot of analytics to determine how complex target tasks are performed. In other words, AI can increase efficiency and reduce processing delays. Time-consuming tasks such as handover, network selection, and resource scheduling can be performed instantly using AI. AI can also play a significant role in M2M, machine-to-human, and human-to-machine communications. AI can also be a rapid communication in Brain Computer Interface (BCI). AI-based communication systems can be supported by metamaterials, intelligent structures, intelligent networks, intelligent devices, intelligent cognitive radios, self-sustaining wireless networks, and machine learning.
  • BCI Brain Computer Interface
  • THz waves also known as sub-millimeter waves, generally refer to the frequency band between 0.1 THz and 10 THz with corresponding wavelengths ranging from 0.03 mm to 3 mm.
  • the 100 GHz–300 GHz band range (Sub THz band) is considered to be the main part of the THz band for cellular communications. Adding the Sub THz band to the mmWave band will increase the capacity of 6G cellular communications.
  • 300 GHz–3 THz is in the far infrared (IR) frequency band.
  • the 300 GHz–3 THz band is part of the optical band but is at the boundary of the optical band, just behind the RF band. Therefore, this 300 GHz–3 THz band shows similarities with RF.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an electromagnetic spectrum according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 7 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • Key characteristics of THz communications include (i) widely available bandwidth to support very high data rates, and (ii) high path loss at high frequencies (highly directional antennas are indispensable).
  • the narrow beam width generated by the highly directional antenna reduces interference.
  • the small wavelength of THz signals allows a much larger number of antenna elements to be integrated into devices and BSs operating in this band. This enables the use of advanced adaptive array techniques to overcome range limitations.
  • FSO backhaul network Free space optical transmission backhaul network
  • UAVs or drones will be a crucial element in 6G wireless communications.
  • high-speed data wireless connectivity can be provided using UAV technology.
  • the base station (BS) entity can be installed on the UAV to provide cellular connectivity.
  • UAVs may have certain features not found in fixed BS infrastructure such as easy deployment, robust line-of-sight links, and freedom of movement with controlled mobility.
  • BS base station
  • UAVs may have certain features not found in fixed BS infrastructure such as easy deployment, robust line-of-sight links, and freedom of movement with controlled mobility.
  • UAVs can easily handle such situations.
  • UAVs will be a new paradigm in wireless communications. This technology facilitates three basic requirements of wireless networks namely eMBB, URLLC, and mMTC.
  • UAVs can also support several purposes such as enhancing network connectivity, fire detection, disaster emergency services, security and surveillance, pollution monitoring, parking monitoring, and
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • V2I vehicle to infrastructure
  • Fig. 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication. Specifically, Fig. 8 (a) shows a user plane protocol stack of NR, and Fig. 8 (b) shows a control plane protocol stack of NR.
  • SL synchronization signal Sidelink Synchronization Signal, SLSS
  • SLSS Segment Synchronization Signal
  • SLSS is an SL-specific sequence and may include a Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal (PSSS) and a Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal (SSSS).
  • PSSS Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal
  • SSSS Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal
  • the PSSS may be referred to as a Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal (S-PSS)
  • S-SSS Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • S-SSS Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • length-127 M-sequences may be used for the S-PSS
  • length-127 Gold sequences may be used for the S-SSS.
  • a terminal may detect an initial signal (signal detection) and acquire synchronization using the S-PSS.
  • the terminal may acquire detailed synchronization and detect a synchronization signal ID using the S-PSS and the S-SSS.
  • PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • the basic information may be information related to SLSS, duplex mode (DM), TDD UL/DL (Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) configuration, resource pool related information, type of application related to SLSS, subframe offset, broadcast information, etc.
  • the payload size of PSBCH may be 56 bits including a 24-bit CRC.
  • S-PSS, S-SSS and PSBCH may be included in a block format supporting periodic transmission (e.g., SL SS (Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH block, hereinafter referred to as S-SSB (Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block)).
  • the S-SSB may have the same numerology (i.e., SCS and CP length) as the PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) in a carrier, and a transmission bandwidth may be within a (pre-)configured SL BWP (Sidelink BWP).
  • the bandwidth of the S-SSB may be 11 RB (Resource Block).
  • the PSBCH may span 11 RBs.
  • the frequency location of the S-SSB may be (pre-)configured. Therefore, the terminal does not need to perform hypothesis detection in frequency to discover the S-SSB in the carrier.
  • the transmitting terminal may transmit one or more S-SSBs to a receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period according to the SCS.
  • the number of S-SSBs that the transmitting terminal transmits to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period may be pre-configured or configured for the transmitting terminal.
  • the S-SSB transmission period may be 160 ms.
  • an S-SSB transmission period of 160 ms may be supported for all SCSs.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit one, two, or four S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the transmitting terminal can transmit 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.
  • the structure of the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal to the receiving terminal may be different depending on the CP type.
  • the CP type may be Normal CP (NCP) or Extended CP (ECP).
  • NCP Normal CP
  • ECP Extended CP
  • the number of symbols to which the PSBCH is mapped in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal may be 9 or 8.
  • the number of symbols to which the PSBCH is mapped in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal may be 7 or 6.
  • the PSBCH may be mapped to the first symbol in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal.
  • the receiving terminal receiving the S-SSB may perform an AGC (Automatic Gain Control) operation in the first symbol section of the S-SSB.
  • AGC Automatic Gain Control
  • Figure 9 shows a terminal performing V2X or SL communication.
  • terminal in V2X or SL communication may mainly mean a user's terminal.
  • a network device such as a base station transmits and receives a signal according to a communication method between terminals
  • the base station may also be considered a type of terminal.
  • terminal 1 may be a first device (100)
  • terminal 2 may be a second device (200).
  • terminal 1 can select a resource unit corresponding to a specific resource within a resource pool, which means a set of a series of resources. Then, terminal 1 can transmit an SL signal using the resource unit.
  • terminal 2 which is a receiving terminal, can be configured with a resource pool in which terminal 1 can transmit a signal, and can detect a signal of terminal 1 within the resource pool.
  • terminal 1 if terminal 1 is within the connection range of the base station, the base station can inform terminal 1 of the resource pool. On the other hand, if terminal 1 is outside the connection range of the base station, another terminal can inform terminal 1 of the resource pool, or terminal 1 can use a pre-configured resource pool.
  • a resource pool can be composed of multiple resource units, and each terminal can select one or multiple resource units to use for its SL signal transmission.
  • Figure 10 shows resource units for V2X or SL communication.
  • the entire frequency resources of the resource pool can be divided into NF units, and the entire time resources of the resource pool can be divided into NT units. Accordingly, a total of NF * NT resource units can be defined within the resource pool.
  • Fig. 13 shows an example in which the resource pool repeats with a period of NT subframes.
  • one resource unit (e.g., Unit #0) may appear repeatedly periodically. Or, in order to obtain a diversity effect in the time or frequency dimension, the index of the physical resource unit to which one logical resource unit is mapped may change in a pre-determined pattern over time.
  • a resource pool may mean a set of resource units that a terminal that wishes to transmit an SL signal can use for transmission.
  • Resource pools can be subdivided into several types. For example, depending on the content of the SL signal transmitted from each resource pool, resource pools can be divided as follows.
  • SA Scheduling Assignment
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • MIMO Multiple Input Multiple Output
  • TA Timing Advance
  • SA may also be transmitted multiplexed with SL data on the same resource unit, and in this case, the SA resource pool may mean a resource pool in which SA is multiplexed with SL data and transmitted. SA may also be called an SL control channel.
  • SL data channel Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH
  • PSSCH Physical Sidelink Shared Channel
  • SL data channel may be a resource pool used by a transmitting terminal to transmit user data. If SA is multiplexed and transmitted together with SL data on the same resource unit, only SL data channels excluding SA information may be transmitted in the resource pool for the SL data channel. In other words, REs (Resource Elements) used to transmit SA information on individual resource units within the SA resource pool may still be used to transmit SL data in the resource pool of the SL data channel.
  • a transmitting terminal may transmit PSSCH by mapping it to consecutive PRBs.
  • the discovery channel may be a resource pool for transmitting terminals to transmit information such as their IDs. Through this, the transmitting terminals can enable adjacent terminals to discover themselves.
  • different resource pools may be used depending on the transmission/reception properties of the SL signal. For example, even when it is the same SL data channel or discovery message, it may be again divided into different resource pools depending on the transmission timing determination method of the SL signal (for example, whether it is transmitted at the time of reception of a synchronization reference signal or whether it is transmitted by applying a certain timing advance at the time of reception), the resource allocation method (for example, whether the base station designates transmission resources of individual signals to individual transmitting terminals or whether individual transmitting terminals select individual signal transmission resources on their own within the resource pool), the signal format (for example, the number of symbols that each SL signal occupies in one subframe or the number of subframes used for transmission of one SL signal), the signal strength from the base station, the transmission power strength of the SL terminal, etc.
  • the transmission timing determination method of the SL signal for example, whether it is transmitted at the time of reception of a synchronization reference signal or whether it is transmitted by applying a certain timing advance at the time of reception
  • FIG. 11 illustrates an example of a BWP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 11 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure. In the embodiment of FIG. 11, it is assumed that there are three BWPs.
  • a common resource block may be a carrier resource block numbered from one end of a carrier band to the other end.
  • a PRB may be a numbered resource block within each BWP.
  • Point A may indicate a common reference point for a resource block grid.
  • the BWP can be set by a point A, an offset from point A (NstartBWP) and a bandwidth (NsizeBWP).
  • point A can be an outer reference point of PRBs of a carrier where subcarrier 0 of all nucleos (e.g., all nucleosides supported by the network on that carrier) is aligned.
  • the offset can be the PRB spacing between the lowest subcarrier in a given nucleometry and point A.
  • the bandwidth can be the number of PRBs in a given nucleometry.
  • SLSS Sidelink Synchronization Signal
  • S-PSS Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal
  • S-SSS Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • length-127 M-sequences may be used for S-PSS
  • length-127 Gold sequences may be used for S-SSS.
  • a terminal may detect an initial signal (signal detection) and obtain synchronization using S-PSS.
  • the terminal can obtain detailed synchronization using S-PSS and S-SSS and detect a synchronization signal ID.
  • PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • PSBCH Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel
  • the basic information may be information related to SLSS, duplex mode (DM), TDD UL/DL (Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) configuration, resource pool related information, type of application related to SLSS, subframe offset, broadcast information, etc.
  • the payload size of PSBCH may be 56 bits including a 24-bit CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).
  • S-PSS, S-SSS and PSBCH may be included in a block format supporting periodic transmission (e.g., SL SS (Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH block, hereinafter referred to as S-SSB (Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block)).
  • the S-SSB may have the same numerology (i.e., SCS and CP length) as the PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) in a carrier, and a transmission bandwidth may be within a (pre-)configured SL BWP (Sidelink BWP).
  • the bandwidth of the S-SSB may be 11 RB (Resource Block).
  • the PSBCH may span 11 RBs.
  • the frequency location of the S-SSB may be (pre-)configured. Therefore, the terminal does not need to perform hypothesis detection in frequency to discover the S-SSB in the carrier.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates a procedure for a terminal to perform V2X or SL communication according to a resource allocation mode according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment of FIG. 12 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the base station can schedule SL resources to be used by the terminal for SL transmission.
  • the base station can transmit information related to SL resources and/or information related to UL resources to the first terminal.
  • the UL resources can include PUCCH resources and/or PUSCH resources.
  • the UL resources can be resources for reporting SL HARQ feedback to the base station.
  • the first terminal may receive information related to a DG (dynamic grant) resource and/or information related to a CG (configured grant) resource from the base station.
  • the CG resource may include a CG type 1 resource or a CG type 2 resource.
  • the DG resource may be a resource that the base station configures/allocates to the first terminal via DCI (downlink control information).
  • the CG resource may be a (periodic) resource that the base station configures/allocates to the first terminal via DCI and/or an RRC message.
  • the base station may transmit an RRC message including information related to the CG resource to the first terminal.
  • the base station may transmit an RRC message including information related to the CG resource to the first terminal, and the base station may transmit DCI related to activation or release of the CG resource to the first terminal.
  • the first terminal may transmit a PSCCH (e.g., Sidelink Control Information (SCI) or 1st-stage SCI) to the second terminal based on the resource scheduling.
  • a PSCCH e.g., Sidelink Control Information (SCI) or 1st-stage SCI
  • the first terminal may transmit a PSSCH (e.g., 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, data, etc.) related to the PSCCH to the second terminal.
  • the first terminal may receive a PSFCH related to the PSCCH/PSSCH from the second terminal.
  • HARQ feedback information e.g., NACK information or ACK information
  • the first terminal may transmit/report HARQ feedback information to the base station via a PUCCH or a PUSCH.
  • the HARQ feedback information reported to the base station may be information generated by the first terminal based on the HARQ feedback information received from the second terminal.
  • the HARQ feedback information reported to the base station may be information generated by the first terminal based on a rule set in advance.
  • the DCI may be DCI for scheduling of SL.
  • a terminal in resource allocation mode 2, can determine an SL transmission resource within an SL resource set by a base station/network or a preset SL resource.
  • the set SL resource or the preset SL resource may be a resource pool.
  • the terminal can autonomously select or schedule resources for SL transmission.
  • the terminal can perform SL communication by selecting a resource by itself within the set resource pool.
  • the terminal can select a resource by itself within a selection window by performing sensing and resource (re)selection procedures.
  • the sensing can be performed on a subchannel basis.
  • a first terminal that has selected a resource by itself within a resource pool can transmit a PSCCH (e.g., SCI (Sidelink Control Information) or 1st-stage SCI) to a second terminal using the resource.
  • a PSCCH e.g., SCI (Sidelink Control Information) or 1st-stage SCI
  • the first terminal can transmit a PSSCH (e.g., 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, data, etc.) related to the PSCCH to the second terminal.
  • the first terminal can receive a PSFCH related to the PSCCH/PSSCH from the second terminal.
  • the first terminal may transmit an SCI to the second terminal on the PSCCH.
  • the first terminal may transmit two consecutive SCIs (e.g., 2-stage SCIs) to the second terminal on the PSCCH and/or the PSSCH.
  • the second terminal may decode the two consecutive SCIs (e.g., 2-stage SCIs) to receive the PSSCH from the first terminal.
  • the SCI transmitted on the PSCCH may be referred to as a 1st SCI, a 1st SCI, a 1st-stage SCI, or a 1st-stage SCI format
  • the SCI transmitted on the PSSCH may be referred to as a 2nd SCI, a 2nd SCI, a 2nd-stage SCI, or a 2nd-stage SCI format.
  • the first terminal can receive the PSFCH.
  • the first terminal and the second terminal can determine the PSFCH resource, and the second terminal can transmit the HARQ feedback to the first terminal using the PSFCH resource.
  • the first terminal may transmit SL HARQ feedback to the base station through PUCCH and/or PUSCH.
  • Figure 13 illustrates a procedure for path switching from a direct path to an indirect path.
  • the procedure illustrated in Fig. 13 is based on the connection management and path switching procedure from direct to indirect path described in the TR document (3GPP TR 38.836) related to Rel-17 NR SL.
  • the remote UE needs to establish its own PDU session/DRB with the network before user plane data transmission.
  • the PC5-RRC aspect PC5 unicast link establishment procedure of Rel-16 NR V2X can be reused to establish a secure unicast link for layer 2 UE-to-Network relaying (L2 U2N relay) between the remote UE and the relay UE before the remote UE establishes a Uu RRC connection with the network via the relay UE.
  • L2 U2N relay layer 2 UE-to-Network relaying
  • the PC5 L2 configuration for transmission between the remote UE and the U2N relay UE can be based on the RLC/MAC configuration defined in the standard.
  • the establishment of Uu SRB1/SRB2 and DRB of the remote UE follows the legacy Uu configuration procedure for L2 U2N relay.
  • the high-level connection establishment procedure illustrated in Fig. 13 applies to L2 UE-to-Network Relay.
  • step S1300 the remote UE and the relay UE can perform a discovery procedure and establish a PC5-RRC connection in step S1301 based on the existing Rel-16 procedure.
  • the remote UE can transmit the first RRC message (i.e., RRCSetupRequest) to establish connection with the gNB via the Relay UE using the default L2 configuration of PC5.
  • the gNB responds to the remote UE with an RRCSetup message (S1303).
  • the RRCSetup delivery to the remote UE uses the default configuration of PC5. If the relay UE is not started in RRC_CONNECTED, it needs to perform its own connection establishment upon receiving the message for the default L2 configuration of PC5.
  • step S1304 the gNB and the relay UE perform a relay channel setup procedure via Uu.
  • the relay/remote UE sets up an RLC channel to relay SRB1 to the remote UE via PC5. This step prepares a relay channel for SRB1.
  • a remote UE SRB1 message (e.g., an RRCSetupComplete message) is transmitted to the gNB through the relay UE using the SRB1 relay channel over PC5. And the remote UE is RRC connected over Uu.
  • steps S1306 and S1307 the remote UE and the gNB establish security according to legacy procedures and the security message is delivered through the Relay UE.
  • the gNB sends RRCReconfiguration to the remote UE through the relay UE to set up relay SRB2/DRB.
  • the remote UE sends RRCReconfigurationComplete to the gNB through the relay UE in response.
  • step S1310 the gNB sets up an additional RLC channel between the gNB and the relay UE for traffic relay.
  • the relay/remote UE sets up an additional RLC channel between the remote UE and the relay UE for traffic relay.
  • RRC reconfiguration and RRC disconnection procedures can reuse legacy RRC procedures with message content/configuration design left in the WI phase.
  • RRC connection re-establishment and RRC connection resumption procedures can reuse existing RRC procedures as a baseline by considering the connection establishment procedure of the above L2 U2N relay to handle relay-specific parts along with message content/composition design. Message content/composition can be defined later.
  • Figure 14 schematically illustrates how to switch from a direct route to an indirect route.
  • a direct remote UE can be switched to an indirect relay UE for service continuity of L2 U2N relay based on the procedure illustrated in Fig. 14.
  • the remote UE may report one or more candidate relay UEs after measuring/discovering the candidate relay UEs.
  • the remote UE may filter appropriate relay UEs that meet upper layer criteria when reporting.
  • the report of at least one candidate relay may include ID and SL RSRP information of the relay UE, where PC5 measurement related details may be determined later.
  • step S1402 the gNB decides to switch to the target relay UE and the target (re)configuration is optionally transmitted to the relay UE (S1403).
  • the RRC reconfiguration message to the remote UE may include the ID of the target relay UE, the target Uu, and the PC5 configuration.
  • step S1405 if the connection is not yet established, the remote UE establishes a PC5 connection with the target relay UE.
  • step S1406 the remote UE feeds back RRCReconfigurationComplete to the gNB through the target path using the target configuration provided in RRCReconfiguration.
  • step S1407 the data path is switched.
  • FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams for explaining a procedure for U2U relay selection (UE-to-UE Relay Selection) without relay discovery.
  • the source UE may first try to find the target UE by transmitting a Direct Communication Request or Solicitation message containing target UE information. If the source UE cannot reach the target UE directly, it will try to discover a UE-to-UE relay to reach the target UE which may also trigger the relay to discover the target UE.
  • the source UE may integrate the discovery of the target UE and/or the discovery/selection of a U2U relay based on the following two alternatives:
  • U2U relay discovery/selection can be integrated into the unicast link setup procedure (see clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287).
  • a new field may be added to the Direct Communication Request or Solicitation message to indicate whether a relay is available for communication.
  • the new field may be defined as Relay_indication.
  • the request message may include Relay_indication for whether a U2U relay is available. Meanwhile, for Release 17, it may be assumed that the value of Relay_indication is restricted to a single hop.
  • the U2U relay can decide whether to forward the request message (i.e., modify the message and broadcast it nearby). For example, the U2U relay can decide whether to forward the request message by considering the Application ID, authorization policy (e.g., Relay for a specific ProSe service), current traffic load of the Relay, radio status between the Source UE and the Relay UE, etc. if there is a Relay Service Code.
  • the Application ID e.g., Relay for a specific ProSe service
  • current traffic load of the Relay e.g., Relay for a specific ProSe service
  • radio status between the Source UE and the Relay UE e.g., radio status between the Source UE and the Relay UE, etc. if there is a Relay Service Code.
  • multiple U2U relays may be used to reach the target UE (case 1), or the target UE may directly receive the request message from the source UE (case 2).
  • the target UE may choose whether to respond to either the first or the second case.
  • the target UE may choose whether to respond to either the first or the second case based on signal strength, local policy (e.g., traffic load of the UE-UE relay), relay service code (if there is a relay service code), and/or operator policy (e.g., always preferring direct communication or using only some specific UE-UE relays).
  • the source UE may receive responses to the request message from multiple U2U relays, or may receive responses to the request message directly from the target UE.
  • the source UE may select a communication path (direct path or indirect path) based on signal strength or operator policy (e.g., always preferring direct communication or using only some specific UE-UE relays).
  • UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into the unicast link establishment procedure (Alternative 1)
  • Fig 14 illustrates the procedure of the proposed method. 0.
  • UEs are authorized to use the service provided by the UE-to-UE relays.
  • UE-to-UE relays are authorized to provide service of relaying traffic among UEs.
  • the authorization and the parameter provisioning can use solutions for KI#8, eg Sol#36.
  • the authorization can be done when UEs/relays are registered to the network.
  • Security related parameters may be provisioned so that a UE and a relay can verify the authorization with each other if needed. 1.
  • UE-1 wants to establish unicast communication with UE-2 and the communication can be either through direct link with UE-2 or via a UE-to-UE relay. Then UE-1 broadcasts Direct Communication Request with relay_indication enabled. The message will be received by relay-1, relay-2. The message may also be received by UE-2 if it is in the proximity of UE-1.
  • UE-1 includes source UE info, target UE info, Application ID, as well as Relay Service Code if there is any. If UE-1 does not want relay to be involved in the communication, then it will made relay_indication disabled.
  • the data type of relay_indication can be determined in Stage 3. Details of Direct Communication Request/Accept messages will be determined in stage 3. 2.
  • Relay-1 and relay-2 decide to participate in the procedure.
  • a relay broadcasts the Direct Communication Request message, it includes source UE info, target UE info and Relay UE info (eg Relay UE ID) in the message and use Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID.
  • the Relay maintains association between the source UE information (eg source UE L2 ID) and the new Direct Communication Request.
  • UE-2 receives the Direct Communication Requests from relay-1 and relay-2.
  • UE-2 may also receive Direct Communication Request message directly from the UE-1 if the UE-2 is in the communication range of UE-1.
  • UE-2 chooses relay-1 and replies with Direct Communication Accept message.
  • UE-2 may choose to setup a direct communication link by sending the Direct Communication Accept message directly to UE-1.
  • a UE-to-UE relay retrieves the source UE information stored in step 2 and sends the Direct Communication Accept message to the source UE with its Relay UE info added in the message.
  • UE-1 and UE-2 have respectively setup the PC5 links with the chosen UE-to-UE relay.
  • the security establishment between the UE1 and Relay-1, and between Relay-1 and UE-2 are performed before the Relay-1 and UE-2 send Direct Communication Accept message. Details of the authentication/security establishment procedure are determined by SA WG3.
  • the security establishment procedure can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the source (or target) UE and the relay which can be used for relaying the traffic. 5.
  • UE-1 receives the Direct Communication Accept message from relay-1.
  • UE-1 chooses path according to eg policies (eg always choose direct path if it is possible), signal strength, etc.
  • UE-1 receives Direct Communication Accept / Response message request accept directly from UE-2, it may choose to setup a direct PC5 L2 link with UE-2 as described in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5], then step 6 is skipped. 6a.
  • UE-1 and UE-2 finish setting up the communication link via the chosen UE-to-UE relay.
  • the link setup information may vary depending on the type of relay, eg L2 or L3 relaying. Then UE-1 and UE-2 can communicate via the relay. Regarding IP address allocation for the source/remote UE, the addresses can be either assigned by the relay or by the UE itself (eg link-local IP address) as defined in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5]. 6b.
  • the source and target UE can setup an end-to-end PC5 link via the relay.
  • UE-1 sends a unicast E2E Direct Communication Request message to UE-2 via the Relay-1
  • UE-2 responds with a unicast E2E Direct Communication Accept message to UE-1 via the Relay-1.
  • Relay-1 transfers the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer.
  • Note 3 How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase.
  • NOTE 4 In order to make a relay or path selection, the source UE can setup a timer after sending out the Direct Communication Request for collecting the corresponding response messages before making a decision. Similarly, the target UE can also setup a timer after receiving the first copy of the Direct Communication Request / message for collecting multiple copies of the message from different paths before making a decision.
  • UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into Model B direct discovery procedure (Alternative 2) Depicted in Fig 15 is the procedure for UE-UE Relay discovery Model B, and the discovery/selection procedure is separated from hop by hop and end-to-end link establishment.
  • UE-1 broadcasts discovery solicitation message carrying UE-1 info, target UE info (UE-2), Application ID, Relay Service Code if any, the UE-1 can also indicate relay_indication enabled.
  • the candidate Relay UE-R broadcasts discovery solicitation carrying UE-1 info, UE-R info, Target UE info.
  • the Relay UE-R uses Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID.
  • the target UE-2 responds the discovery message.
  • UE-2 receives discovery solicitation message in step 1, then UE-2 responds discovery response in step 3b with UE-1 info, UE-2 info. If not and UE-2 receives discovery solicitation in step 2, then UE-2 responds discovery response message in step 3a with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info. 4. On reception of discovery response in step 3a, UE-R sends discovery response with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info. If more than one candidate Relay UEs responding discovery response message, UE-1 can select one Relay UE based on eg implementation or link qualification. 5. The source and target UE may need to setup PC5 links with the relay before communicating with each other.
  • Step 5a can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-1 and UE-R which can be used for relaying.
  • Step 5b can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-2 and UE-R which can be used for relaying.
  • 6a Same as step 6a described in clause 6.8.2.1. 6b.
  • the E2E unicast Direct Communication Request message is sent from UE1 to the selected Relay via the per-hop link (established in steps 5a) and the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3 ) as the destination.
  • the UE-to-UE Relay transfers the E2E messages based on the identity information of peer UE in the Adaptation Layer.
  • the initiator (UE1) knows the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3) after a discovery procedure. UE3 responds with E2E unicast Direct Communication Accept message in the same way.
  • UE1 For the Layer 2 UE-to-UE Relay case, whether step5b is performed before step 6b or triggered during step 6b will be decided at normative phase.
  • UE 2 How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase. 6.8.3 Impacts on services, entities and interfaces UE impacts to support new Relay related functions.
  • Figure 17(a) schematically illustrates a flat protocol stack for L2 U2U relay.
  • Fig. 17(a) illustrates a user plane protocol stack for an L2 U2U relay
  • Fig. 17(b) illustrates a control plane protocol stack for an L2 U2U relay.
  • Table 7 below provides a description related to Fig. 17 regarding the Architecture and Protocol Stack of a Layer-2 Relay.
  • L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture the protocol stacks are similar to L2 UE-to-Network Relay other than the fact that the termination points are two Remote UEs.
  • the protocol stacks for the user plane and control plane of L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture are described in Figure 5.5.1-1 and Figure 5.5.1-2.
  • An adaptation layer is supported over the second PC5 link (ie the PC5 link between Relay UE and Destination UE) for L2 UE-to-UE Relay.
  • the adaptation layer is put over RLC sublayer for both CP and UP over the second PC5 link.
  • the sidelink SDAP/PDCP and RRC are terminated between two Remote UEs, while RLC, MAC and PHY are terminated in each PC5 link.
  • first hop of L2 UE-to-UE Relay - The N:1 mapping is supported by first hop PC5 adaptation layer between Remote UE SL Radio Bearers and first hop PC5 RLC channels for relaying.
  • the adaptation layer over first PC5 hop between Source Remote UE and Relay UE supports to identify traffic destined to different Destination Remote UEs.
  • the second hop PC5 adaptation layer can be used to support bearer mapping between the ingress RLC channels over first PC5 hop and egress RLC channels over second PC5 hop at Relay UE.
  • - PC5 Adaptation layer supports the N:1 bearer mapping between multiple ingress PC5 RLC channels over first PC5 hop and one egress PC5 RLC channel over second PC5 hop and supports the Remote UE identification function.
  • L2 UE-to-UE Relay - The identity information of Remote UE end-to-end Radio Bearer is included in the adaptation layer in first and second PC5 hop.
  • the identity information of Source Remote UE and/or the identity information of Destination Remote UE are candidate information to be included in the adaptation layer, which are to be decided in WI phase.
  • UAV Unmanned Aerial Vehicle
  • U2X Unmanned Aerial Vehicle
  • Figures 18 to 22 are drawings for explaining the U2X system.
  • U2X can support BRID and Direct DAA by leveraging the V2X mechanism defined in TS 23.287.
  • V2X mechanism defined in TS 23.287.
  • LTE PC5 and NR PC5 defined in TS 23.285 are supported and RAT selection can be performed based on U2XP.
  • BRID Broadcasting UAV identification
  • DAA can use Broadcast communication mode to advertise UAV information.
  • Broadcast over PC5 or Unicast over PC5 can be used between two or more UAVs for DAA de-collision.
  • Unicast over Uu over U2X AS may not be supported in the above-described U2X solution.
  • Groupcast mode for NR based PC5 may not be supported in the above-described U2X solution.
  • connectionless Groupcast communication can be used for DAA. Meanwhile, application layer managed Groupcast may not be considered in this release due to lack of clear requirement.
  • U2X can be supported in a U2X Application Server that interfaces with the operator network via NEF, as is the case with V2X Application Servers.
  • U2XP U2X policy
  • the configuration parameters can be preset in ME (Mobile Equipment), set in UICC (universal IC card), pre-set in ME and set in UICC, provided/updated by U2X application server via PCF (policy control function) and/or V1 reference point, or provided/updated to UE by PCF.
  • UE needs to consider the U2X policies in priority order: provided/updated by PCF, provided/updated by U2X application server via V1 reference point, configured in UICC, and pre-configured in ME.
  • De-conflicting policy can be a policy indicating communication mode for de-confliction (unicast or broadcast), communication frequency for de-confliction, etc.
  • the Tx profile or NR Tx profile can be determined based on the U2XP mapping of the U2X service type.
  • UAVs with UICC and UAVs without UICC can be supported.
  • UAVs without UICC can perform U2X communication only if they are approved as “Not provided in E-UTRA” and “Not provided in NR”.
  • U2X communication parameters of the U2X application server or PCF can be transmitted via the UAV-C UE.
  • the radio parameters for PC5 RAT can be set such as geographical area, altitude restriction and validity timer. Such additional information/parameters may be required to control PC5 usage policy-wise based on the specific location of the UAV.
  • PC5-based communications for BRID and DAA requires successful UUAA authentication/authorization as defined in TS 23.256 and authorization via U2XP.
  • the FAA does not require specific authorization for the use of PC5 for BRID or DAA.
  • the use of PC5-based communications for BRID and DAA can only be authorized via U2XP.
  • U2X services can be identified by one of the ITS Application Identifier (ITS-AID), the Provider Service Identifier (PSID), or the Application Identifier (AID), depending on values specifically defined for airborne applications.
  • ITS-AID ITS Application Identifier
  • PSID Provider Service Identifier
  • AID Application Identifier
  • a non-roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communication via PC5 can be configured as illustrated in FIG. 18.
  • the non-roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communication via PC5 can be applied with the reference point of TS 23.287, and may have the following differences.
  • this reference point may/may not be specified in the release of a given scenario.
  • N1 In addition to the relevant functions defined in TS 23.501 for N1, it can also be used to convey U2X policies and parameters (including service authorization) from AMF to UE for U2X services, and PC5 functions for U2X capabilities and U2X information from UE to AMF.
  • U2X policies and parameters including service authorization
  • PC5 functions for U2X capabilities and U2X information from UE to AMF.
  • N2 In addition to the relevant functions defined in TS 23.501 for N2, it can also be used to convey U2X policies and parameters (including service authorization) from AMF to NG-RAN for U2X services.
  • UAV UEs leveraging Uu connectivity can use U2X for BRID and DAA and can be configured over U2X1 for transmissions outside the scope of 3GPP.
  • UAV UEs without leveraging Uu capabilities can be part of the 3GPP ecosystem as they use U2X1 for configuration by U2X application server and implement PC5 connectivity as specified by 3GPP.
  • FIGS. 19 and 20 A roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communications over PC5 can be configured as illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20. Specifically, FIG. 19 illustrates a roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communications over PC5 in a local breakout scenario, and FIG. 20 illustrates a roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communications over PC5 in a home routing scenario.
  • a 5G system architecture between Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMNs) for U2X communications over PC5 reference points could be as follows.
  • PC5 parameters need to be set in a consistent manner between UEs within a specific area.
  • inter-PLMN PC5 may be similar to that defined in the non-roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communication over PC5 described with reference to Fig. 18.
  • AF-based service parameter provisioning for U2X communication can be defined as follows.
  • a 5G system may provide NEF services to enable communication between a PLMN's NF and a U2X application server.
  • NEF services to enable communication between a PLMN's NF and a U2X application server.
  • a high level view of AF-based service parameter provisioning for U2X communication may be illustrated as illustrated in Fig. 21.
  • the service parameters may also be pre-configured in the UAV using methods outside the scope of 3GPP (e.g., when not utilizing Uu functionality).
  • the message content for BRID can be defined according to regional regulations for BRID (e.g. message sets of ASTM F3411.19 or ASD-STAN prEN 4709-002 P1) and optionally according to regional means in compliance documents.
  • Message content for DAA is defined by local regulations for DAA and may go beyond the scope of the given scenarios described above.
  • TS 23.287 The procedures and mechanisms of TS 23.287 can be applied to U2X scenarios. Specifically, the procedure for broadcasting over PC5 for DAA collision resolution can be performed as shown in Fig. 22. Meanwhile, the procedure for broadcasting over PC5 for DAA collision resolution can be assumed that the UAV is provisioned with a U2X policy including a DAA collision resolution policy (e.g., unicast or broadcast communication for collision resolution, communication frequency).
  • a DAA collision resolution policy e.g., unicast or broadcast communication for collision resolution, communication frequency
  • the procedure for broadcasting through PC5 for DAA collision resolution according to Fig. 22 can be performed as follows.
  • UAV1 may receive a broadcast message from UAV2, which may include application layer DAA payload (e.g., CAA level UAV ID, USS address of UAV2, speed, heading, position, etc.).
  • application layer DAA payload e.g., CAA level UAV ID, USS address of UAV2, speed, heading, position, etc.
  • UVM Unmanned aerial system Traffic Management
  • USS Service Supplier address
  • UAV1 can deliver the DAA payload to the upper layer.
  • the application layer can detect collisions by comparing its own trajectory and position with the broadcast message received from UAV2. When the application layer of UAV1 detects a collision, collision avoidance/collision resolution procedures can be initiated with UAV2.
  • UAV1 can notify its USS (UTM Service Supplier) about the detected collision, including the ID of peer UAV 2.
  • USS UMS Service Supplier
  • UAV1 can select a communication mode (broadcast or unicast) for DAA de-collision based on inputs received from the application layer and DAA policy. If the broadcast de-collision method is selected, the following messages can be exchanged between UAVs.
  • UAV1 broadcasts a message (e.g., PC5-S message) (e.g., de-collision request message), which is part of the U2X functionality and may include DAA functionality indicating whether the UAV can participate in communication for protocol, DAA de-collision policy (broadcast based, de-collision message frequency), collision detection warning, ID of other UAVs detected in collision different from that of the corresponding CAA level UAV ID, and certain parameters (e.g., de-collision information) (e.g., trajectory correction information to avoid collision).
  • PC5-S message e.g., de-collision request message
  • deconfliction request message may include DAA capability, which is part of U2X capability and indicates whether the UAV is able to engage in communication for deconflicting protocol, DAA deconflicting policy (broadcast based, deconflicting message frequency), collision detection alert, its CAA-level UAV IDs and the one(s) from other detected conflicting UAV(s), and deconflicting specific parameters (e.g. trajectory correction information to avoid collision))
  • UAV2 may broadcast a message (e.g., PC5-S message) to provide the agreed upon DAA conflict resolution policy, updated trajectory, and other information (e.g., message conflict resolution status response, conflict resolution warning, CAA-level UAV ID of participating UAV from receiving UAV). Subsequent broadcast messages may be exchanged between UAVs until traffic conflict resolution (e.g., mutual position/trajectory monitoring) is reached, depending on the agreed upon message frequency.
  • message conflict resolution status response e.g., conflict resolution warning, CAA-level UAV ID of participating UAV from receiving UAV.
  • traffic conflict resolution e.g., mutual position/trajectory monitoring
  • UE In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the UE may support the following functions: - Report the U2X Capability (including DAA Capability) and PC5 Capability for U2X to 5GC over N1 reference point. - Indicate U2X Policy Provisioning Request in UE Policy Container for UE triggered U2X Policy provisioning. - Receive the U2X parameters from 5GC over N1 reference point. - Procedures for U2X communication over PC5 reference point. - Configuration of parameters for U2X communication. These parameters can be pre-configured in the UE, or, if in coverage, provisioned or updated by signaling over the N1 reference point from the PCF in the HPLMN or over U2X1 reference point from the U2X Application Server. 2.
  • the AMF In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the AMF performs the following functions: - Obtain from UDM the subscription information related to U2X and store them as part of the UE context data. - Select a PCF supporting U2X Policy/Parameter provisioning and report the PC5 Capability for U2X to the selected PCF. - Obtain from PCF the PC5 QoS information related to U2X and store it as part of the UE context data. - Provision the NG-RAN with indication about the UE authorization status about U2X communication over PC5 reference point. - Provision the NG-RAN with PC5 QoS parameters related to U2X communication.
  • - PCF In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the PCF includes the functions described in 23.287 to provision the UE and AMF with necessary parameters in order to use U2X communication.
  • - UDM Subscription management for U2X communication over PC5 reference point.
  • the UE subscription data types are extended according to the following table 6.
  • U2X Application Server implements a subset of the V2X AS functionality specified in TS 23.287: - includes AF functionality, and may support at least the following capabilities: - For U2X service parameters provisioning, the U2X AS provides the 5GC and the UAV UE (possibly via the UAVC) with parameters for U2X communications over PC5 and Uu reference points.
  • UDR In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the UDR stores U2X service parameters.
  • NRF In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the NRF performs PCF discovery by considering U2X capability.
  • - NEF for U2X AS, the NEF supports U2X service parameters.
  • U2X Subscription data NR U2X Services Authorization Indicates whether the UE is authorized to use the NR sidelink for U2X services as UAV UE, UAV-C UE, or Authority UE.
  • LTE U2X Services Authorization Indicates whether the UE is authorized to use the LTE sidelink for U2X services as UAV UE, UAV-C UE, or Authority UE.
  • Measurement Reporting Use LTE principle as a baseline, introduce similar event H1 (aerial UE height become higher than threshold) and H2 (aerial UE height become lower than threshold. FFS if further NR enhancements are needed. FFS study scaling of RRM parameters (eg which parameters and what is the purpose/benefit of the scaling and how) -- FFS how to limit excessive measurements and measurement reporting. -- FFS if user consent is needed for location reporting in CONNECTED -- FFS study the vertical movement and associated mobility for UAV UEs - Rel-18 NR supports reporting of UAV UE's height, location and velocity. It is for further study what accuracy and reporting mechanisms are required and if further enhancements are needed. - As in LTE, flight path plan reporting will be introduced.
  • Location list of waypoints (3D location information) and timestamp is adopted as the basic content of flight path report.
  • - Introduce similar functionality to LTE (numberofTriggeringCells).
  • a waypoint is a planned location for the UE along the flight path and is described via the existing parameter type LocationCoordinates defined in TS 37.355.
  • - A timestamp provides the UTC time associated with estimated time of arrival to a waypoint as baseline. FFS on granularity.
  • a UE indicates whether flight plan information is available within the RRCReconfigurationComplete, RRCReestablishmentComplete, RRCResumeComplete, or RRCSetupComplete message.
  • Flight path reporting uses at the UE Information request/response procedure as baseline.
  • - UE indicates to the network a new flight path is available in the UE (whether it is initial or update). Then, reuse the normal request/response procedure of flight path report.
  • UAI message can also be used to indicate the UE has flight path availability.
  • FFS whether and what triggering conditions are specified for flight update.
  • FFS The maximum number of waypoints within flight path plan is left FFS.
  • the content of the measurement report is configurable by the network (ie it can contain UAV UEs height, location information and/or RSRP/RSRQ measurement results).
  • FFS whether UAV UE's height is mandatorily reported and which parameter/IE is used for height reporting is supported in NR Rel-18 UAV. The combination of existing events will be used.
  • - Height-dependent parameter scaling is not supported as a part of Rel-18 NR - Do not extend the Number of triggering cells mechanism to apply to the inter-RAT scenario, ie event B1 and B2 triggering.
  • the Number of triggering cells mechanism is applicable to FR1 and FR2 (up to network configuration).
  • the UE shall not ignore or bypass the Number of triggering cells mechanism, once configured.
  • Report on leave is not triggered by a cell that was not previously included in the measurement report for the number of triggering cell.
  • MR configuration parameters at least the following will have ability to be configured with height-dependent more-than-one configurations/values, each for a specific height region: Event A4 threshold and numberoftriggeringcells. Details on how to specify is FFS (ie maybe it can be by combination of events).
  • FFS ie maybe it can be by combination of events.
  • UE applies the new value once it moves to new height (or height range) similar to the case of RRC reconfiguration. Need Codes, field descriptions, etc. as in legacy specifications apply.
  • a height-specific value is not explicitly configured for certain height, whether to keep using the value that was used or consider the parameter as released (ie parameter/value not applicable at this height) should be looked into case by case, and can be clarified by need code, field description, or procedural text as needed. FFS details.
  • a UAV remote UE may be required to select a UAV relay UE based on criteria different from those used by a general remote UE to select a relay UE.
  • the relay UE selected by the UAV remote UE may be a UAV UE or another UE.
  • a UE selected by the UAV remote UE for relay communication is described as a UAV relay UE or relay UE.
  • a UAV UE may (periodically) report its flight path to a base station (and/or a Core Network; CN) (as specified for UAV UE).
  • the flight path value may be a navigation value of the UAV, and may include values related to the expected path along which the UAV UE will reach the destination.
  • the base station can compare (in terms of direction, speed, height, position, etc.) the flight path of the candidate relay UE with the flight path of the UAV remote UE. In this case, the base station can select a relay UE having a similar flight path to the flight path of the UAV remote UE, and establish a (SL) connection between the UAV relay UE and the selected relay UE. To this end, the candidate relay UE needs to report the L2 source ID used when transmitting the discovery message to the base station (here, all relay UEs may be assumed to be in RRC CONNECTED state).
  • the UAV remote UE may report/select only candidate relay UEs having similar flight paths. For example, the UAV remote UE may select and report to the base station a candidate relay UE having a flight path that is within a predetermined offset in terms of direction, speed, height, position, etc. from its own flight path. To this end, the candidate relay UE may transmit a discovery message including its own flight path. However, since a security issue may arise when all flight paths are shared, the candidate relay UE may share only a part of its flight paths via the discovery message.
  • the candidate relay UE may be configured to share only a few way points from its current location via the discovery message, or may be configured to share only a flight path within a predetermined time unit (e.g., a flight path within a few seconds/minutes) via the discovery message.
  • a flight path within a predetermined time unit (e.g., a flight path within a few seconds/minutes) via the discovery message.
  • the UAV remote UE can compare its own flight path value with the value of the flight path included in the discovery message, select at least one relay UE whose flight path value is within a preset offset as a candidate relay UE as a result of the comparison, and report the selected candidate relay UE to the base station.
  • the UAV remote UE may be configured to have a different number of candidate relay UEs to report/select depending on its height (and/or height range). For example, as the altitude of the UAV remote UE increases, the signal strength from the gNB may decrease and interference caused by signals from other gNBs may increase. In this case, the UAV remote UE may need to connect to one or more relay UEs (or multiple relay UEs) when it is above a certain altitude. Therefore, the UAV remote UE needs to have a different number of relay UEs to report/select depending on its height/altitude.
  • the gNB may be configured with a height (and/or height range) of selectable relay UEs by the UAV remote UE.
  • the (serving) gNB of the UAV remote UE may configure a height range to be reported as a candidate relay UE.
  • the UAV remote UE may select only relay UEs existing within the corresponding height range as candidate relay UEs and report them to the (serving) gNB. This is because the gNB can easily determine a height range of candidate relay UEs that are deemed suitable to operate as a (serving) relay UE from the height of the current remote UE. This allows the coverage extension effect via the relay UE to be maximized.
  • whether the UAV remote UE operates as a remote UE and/or whether the UAV relay UE operates as a relay UE may be configured differently depending on the height range.
  • the UAV remote UE may be allowed to operate as a remote UE when it is located within a (configured) specific height range.
  • the UAV remote UE may be allowed to operate as a remote UE when it is outside the specific height range.
  • the UAV relay UE may also be allowed to operate as a relay UE when it is located within a (configured) specific height range, or may be allowed to operate as a relay UE when it is outside the specific height range.
  • the UAV remote UE may select a relay UE only within the cluster.
  • the discovery message transmitted by the candidate relay UE may further include an ID that may indicate the cluster.
  • the UAV remote UE belonging to the same cluster may select only candidate relay UEs having the same cluster ID, or the selection/reporting operation of the relay UE may be restricted/limited so that the relay UE reports the selected candidate relay UE to the base station.
  • the UAV remote UE may be limited to selecting a candidate relay UE in which the signal strength (SD-RSRP/SL-RSRP) between itself and the relay UE is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold strength. And/or, the UAV remote UE may select only relay UEs existing in a specific area as candidate relay UEs. For example, the UAV remote UE may report/select only relay UEs belonging to a specific radius (/3D space) based on its position value as candidate relay UEs.
  • a specific radius 3D space
  • a specific (3D location) area from which candidate relay UEs can be selected may be set for the UAV remote UE, and the UAV remote UE may select candidate relay UEs only from among relay UEs belonging to the set specific area. This may be to allow low-power operation of the remote UE through relay communication to be performed only in the specific area by separately setting/designating a specific area in which the relay UE exists.
  • the UAV remote UE may report at least one candidate relay UE to its serving base station.
  • the base station may select one of the reported at least one candidate relay UE, and configure the remote UE to establish an SL connection/relay connection with the selected one.
  • the UAV remote UE may establish an SL connection/relay with one relay UE that satisfies a predetermined criterion among the at least one candidate relay UE, and establish a connection (i.e., an indirect link) with the base station through the one relay UE to transmit and receive messages with the base station.
  • the proposed invention can ensure that the UAV remote UE performs relay communication more effectively by defining criteria for selecting a relay UE by a UAV remote UE that takes into account the characteristics of the UAV that are different from those of existing remote UEs on the ground.
  • the relay UE in the above-described proposed invention can be expanded to include gNB, IAB-node, etc.
  • Figure 23 is a drawing for explaining how a terminal selects a relay terminal.
  • the terminal may receive relay setting information for performing relay communication through a relay terminal from a base station (S231).
  • the terminal and the relay terminal may be a UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) terminal, which is a non-terrestrial terminal, as described in “Candidate Relay UE Selection Method for UAV Remote UE”. That is, the terminal may be a terminal moving at a certain altitude or higher, unlike a ground terminal, and the relay setting information may include settings for selection criteria that are different from a selection method of an existing relay terminal.
  • UAV Unmanned Aerial Vehicle
  • the terminal may receive discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals (S233).
  • the discovery message may include at least one of identification information of the relay terminal, cluster information to which the relay terminal belongs, a flight path of the relay terminal, altitude/height information of the relay terminal, and location information of the relay terminal.
  • the terminal may determine whether to receive the discovery message for relay communication based on the configuration information.
  • the relay configuration information may further include information on an allowance condition under which the remote terminal is permitted to perform an operation.
  • the allowance condition may be information on a specific height range.
  • the terminal may perform an operation of receiving the discovery message/signal for the relay communication when its own height is located within the specific height range.
  • the relay configuration information further includes information on a specific height range to which the relay communication is restricted, the terminal may perform an operation of receiving the discovery message/signal for the relay communication only when it is not located within the specific height range.
  • the relay configuration information may further include information on a specific height range within which the operation of the relay terminal is permitted.
  • the terminal may operate as a relay terminal only when located within the specific height range.
  • the terminal may transmit the discovery message only when located within the specific height range.
  • the relay configuration information may further include information on a specific height range within which the operation of the relay terminal is restricted. In this case, a terminal that is not located within the specific height range may perform an operation of transmitting a discovery signal/message for the relay communication.
  • the terminal can select a candidate relay terminal from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the plurality of discovery messages received from the plurality of relay terminals and the relay configuration information (S235).
  • the terminal may select the candidate relay terminals based on criteria different from the relay selection criteria of the existing ground terminals. For example, the terminal may determine the number of candidate relay terminals to be selected from the plurality of relay terminals based on its own height and the relay configuration information.
  • the relay configuration information may include information for setting the number of candidate relay terminals that the terminal needs to select for relay communication by height or height range. In this case, the terminal may select the candidate relay terminals at least a first number set for the height/height range corresponding to its own height based on the relay configuration information.
  • the configuration information may be set to select K (integer) candidate relay terminals for the first height or the first height range, and to select N (integer) candidate relay terminals for the second height or the second height range.
  • the terminal may select K or more candidate relay terminals from the plurality of relay terminals (i.e., selection/reporting of at least K candidate relay terminals is required). That is, the terminal determines the number of candidate relay terminals to be selected based on its own height/altitude and the setting information, and can select candidate relay terminals equal to the number of candidate relay terminals determined.
  • the K may be a larger value than the N. This is because, as the height of the terminal increases, the communication environment with the base station relatively deteriorates more, and therefore, it is necessary to form a link for relay communication with more relay terminals.
  • the relay setting information may set the number of candidate relay terminals to be selected differently for each height/height range.
  • the relay configuration information may further include condition information on a selection condition of the relay terminal.
  • the relay configuration information may include a selection allowable height range from which the terminal may select the candidate relay terminal. In this case, the terminal may select only a relay terminal located within the selection allowable height range among the plurality of relay terminals as a candidate relay terminal based on the discovery message.
  • the relay configuration information may include a selection allowable height range determined based on height information reported by the terminal. That is, the base station may determine a height range of a relay terminal suitable for relay communication based on the height of the terminal, and provide relay configuration information including the height range to the terminal.
  • the terminal may select a candidate relay terminal from among the plurality of relay terminals by considering information about the flight path included in the discovery message.
  • the relay configuration information may include preset offset information related to the flight path, and the terminal may select a relay terminal having a flight path (direction, speed, height, position, etc.) within its own flight path and the preset offset range as the candidate relay terminal from among the plurality of relay terminals.
  • the flight path included in the discovery message may be a flight path within a preset time unit by considering security issues.
  • the terminal may select a candidate relay terminal from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the cluster information included in the discovery message. For example, the terminal may select only a relay terminal within the same cluster as the cluster to which it belongs from among the plurality of relay terminals as the candidate relay terminal.
  • the selection of the above-described candidate relay terminal may be a selection operation based on the assumption that a discovery message is received above a certain threshold intensity.
  • the terminal may report candidate relay terminal information for the selected candidate relay terminal to the base station.
  • the terminal may report candidate relay terminal information for a first number of candidate relay terminals according to the relay configuration information among the plurality of relay terminals to the base station. That is, the number of candidate relay terminals to be reported by the terminal may also be determined as the first number according to the number of heights or height ranges included in the relay configuration information.
  • the terminal may receive selection information for a second number of candidate relay terminals selected by the base station from the first number of candidate relay terminals. The terminal may perform configuration for forming an indirect link with each of the second number of candidate relay terminals.
  • the terminal may form a second number of indirect links (i.e., links connected to the base station through SL connections with relay terminals) with each of the second number of relay terminals.
  • the second number may correspond to or be smaller than the first number.
  • the second number may also be determined to a different value depending on the height of the terminal. For example, the second number may be determined to a relatively higher value as the height of the terminal is higher.
  • Figure 24 is a diagram for explaining a method for a base station to receive candidate relay information from a terminal.
  • the base station can transmit relay configuration information related to relay communication to the terminal (S241).
  • the relay configuration information can include configuration information related to a criterion for selecting a relay terminal by a UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) terminal, which is a non-terrestrial terminal, as described with reference to the "Candidate Relay UE Selection Method for UAV Remote UE" and FIG. 23.
  • the relay configuration information can set a criterion different from the criterion for selecting a relay terminal by an existing terrestrial remote terminal for relay communication as described above.
  • the relay configuration information can set a different number of candidate relay terminals to be selected/reported as the candidate relay information according to the height/height range of the terminal.
  • the base station can receive candidate relay information for a first number or more of candidate relay terminals selected from among the plurality of relay terminals (S243).
  • the first number can be determined based on the height of the terminal and the relay configuration information. For example, the first number can be determined to be a larger value as the height of the terminal increases.
  • the base station may select at least one relay terminal to perform relay communication from among the first number or more candidate relay terminals, and transmit information about the selected at least one terminal to the terminal (S245).
  • the base station may comprehensively consider the flight path, height, location, etc. of each of the first number or more candidate relay terminals included in the candidate relay information, and select at least one relay terminal to perform relay communication from among the first number or more candidate relay terminals.
  • the number of the at least one relay terminal may vary depending on the height of the terminal.
  • the base station may select one relay terminal as the relay terminal for the relay communication, and if the height of the terminal is higher than a specific threshold height, the base station may select two relay terminals as the relay terminals for the relay communication. This is because the communication environment with the base station may become worse as the height of the terminal is higher, and therefore, the base station may set up a relay connection to the terminal through two or more relay terminals for smoother communication with the terminal.
  • the proposed invention can provide a selection/reporting opportunity for a relay terminal suitable for the characteristics of a UAV by presenting selection/reporting criteria for a relay terminal related to a UAV.
  • the proposed invention can ensure stable communication with a base station through relay communication even in a communication environment where the signal strength of the base station decreases and interference increases due to an increase in the height of the terminal by increasing the number of candidate relay terminals requiring reporting/selection as the height of the terminal increases.
  • the proposed invention can effectively support low-power communication using relay communication even at high altitudes/heights by setting up relay communication considering the characteristics of the UAV.
  • the target remote UE's ID In order for an intermediate relay UE to know that the final destination of a message transmitted from a source remote UE in a multi-hop U2U relay operation is the target remote UE, the target remote UE's ID must be included in the message. In addition, in order for the target remote UE to know where the message was generated and transmitted when the target remote UE receives the message, the source remote UE's ID must be included in the message. That is, in multi-hop transmission, the message transmitted by the source remote UE must include the source remote UE ID and the target remote UE ID.
  • the included ID can be the L2 ID. However, if the L2 ID is used as it is, a total of 48 bits of header are required for each MAC PDU transmission, which may cause an overhead problem. To solve this problem, a local ID smaller than the L2 ID can be used to identify the source remote UE and the target remote UE.
  • the local ID may be a value that the source remote UE (/target remote UE) assigns as a local ID a value that can identify the L2 IDs of the source remote UE and the target remote UE, and assigns a unique value to the intermediate relay UE.
  • the source remote UE may perform (initial) SL configuration (e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink / RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink) to the relay UE for the 1st-hop
  • the source remote UE may configure a local ID that can identify the source remote UE and a local ID that can identify the target remote UE.
  • the corresponding values may be included in the RRCReconfigurationSidelink message.
  • this value is a value to indicate a mapping relationship between the L2 IDs of the source/target remote UE and the local ID that identifies the source/target remote UE
  • the L2 IDs of the source/target remote UE and the corresponding local ID may need to be notified together.
  • the relay UE receiving this transmits the corresponding value as it is to the relay UE of the next hop so that the relay UE of the next hop or the local ID value that identifies the source remote UE and the target remote UE can be known.
  • the corresponding local ID value can be a value that is used unchanged when passing through each relay UE from the source remote UE to the target remote UE.
  • the target remote UE can also perform local ID allocation.
  • the corresponding value can be included and transmitted in the RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink message.
  • the corresponding value can mean the source remote UE (L2) ID, the target remote UE (L2) ID, and/or the local ID value mapped to the source/target pair.
  • Local ID can be configured by the UE (/source remote UE/relay UE) for SL connection establishment to the relay UE (or) target remote UE (/connected link) to which it is connected.
  • the values configured by the source remote UE/relay UE of each hop can be different in HbH (hop-by-hop).)
  • an (initial) SL configuration message (e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink) that the source remote UE configures to the 1st-hop relay UE may be configured with (a) value for identifying a message to be transmitted from the source remote UE to the target remote UE.
  • the message (/SL configuration message) may include an L2 ID of the source remote UE, an L2 ID of the target remote UE, and a local ID for indicating a pair of these.
  • the relay UE receiving the message may similarly configure (a) value (/local ID) for identifying a message to be transmitted from the source remote UE to the target remote UE, to the next relay UE heading to the target remote UE, and the value may be different (or the same) as the previous hop (e.g., the local ID value that the source remote UE configured to the 1st-hop relay UE). That is, the value may be determined by the relay UE configuring the next hop.
  • the L2 ID value of the source remote UE, the L2 ID value of the target remote UE, and a local ID value representing a pair of them may be included so that the assigned relay UE can allocate a local ID of the next hop.
  • the value may be a value included only in the initial SL configuration message (e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink).
  • the assigned relay UE can assign the same ⁇ source remote UE, target remote UE ⁇ pair to the relay UE of the next hop with the same/different local ID (B) value.
  • a and B can be the same value.
  • the 2nd-hop relay UE that receives this can know from which source remote UE the message is transmitted to which target remote UE by receiving the local ID (B) (through the initial SL connection establishment process), and can transmit the message to the target remote UE by including its own assigned local ID (C) in the local ID field of the adaptation layer.
  • the target remote UE can identify which source remote UE initially transmitted the message through the header value of the adaptation layer of the message.
  • the initial SL connection establishment message (/RRCReconfigurationSidelink, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink) may be transmitted without an adaptation layer header (since no local ID is allocated yet), or with a special value (0000 /11111) indicating a non-used value in the Local ID field of the adaptation layer header.
  • a special value (0000 /11111) indicating a non-used value in the Local ID field of the adaptation layer header.
  • an implicit convention may be established that each relay UE/source remote UE excludes the special value (00000 / 1111) from the Local ID value it allocates.
  • a case may be considered where the relay UE sets a local ID and notifies the previous hop of the corresponding value.
  • a method may be used where the relay UE allocates a local ID to be used for itself and the previous hop and notifies the relay UE/source remote UE of the previous hop of the same local ID.
  • the local ID values allocated by each relay UE may be the same/different values for the same source remote UE (L2) ID, target remote UE (L2) ID pair. If the relay UE allocates a local ID to the relay UE/source remote UE of the previous hop, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink or a separate PC5-RRC message may be used. In addition, if the relay UE allocates a local ID to the previous hop, it may be necessary to notify local ID information for the source remote UE (L2) ID, the target remote UE (L2) ID, and their pair values together.
  • the adaptation layer can include the local ID value when transmitting data and signaling information to the corresponding hop.
  • the relay UE and the target remote UE that receive this know which source remote UE (L2) ID and target remote UE (L2) ID the local ID is mapped to, and thus can determine where the message is headed and from which remote UE the message is sent.
  • relay UE (A), relay UE (B) allocate the same local ID for different source remote UE (L2) IDs, target remote UE (L2) IDs to one same next hop relay UE (relay UE (C)
  • the relay UE receiving it can filter the local ID using the L2 ID of the relay UE that allocates it.
  • the relay UE (C) stores the local IDs for the source remote UE, the target remote UE and their pair, it may also store the L2 ID of the relay UE (/source remote UE) that allocates it. Even if different relay UEs allocate the same local ID, it is possible to identify the local IDs for different source/target remote UE pairs using the L2 ID of the relay UE (/source remote UE) that allocates it.
  • Figure 25 illustrates a communication system applied to the present invention.
  • a communication system (1) applied to the present invention includes a wireless device, a base station, and a network.
  • the wireless device means a device that performs communication using a wireless access technology (e.g., 5G NR (New RAT), LTE (Long Term Evolution)) and may be referred to as a communication/wireless/5G device.
  • the wireless device may include a robot (100a), a vehicle (100b-1, 100b-2), an XR (eXtended Reality) device (100c), a hand-held device (100d), a home appliance (100e), an IoT (Internet of Thing) device (100f), and an AI device/server (400).
  • the vehicle may include a vehicle equipped with a wireless communication function, an autonomous vehicle, a vehicle capable of performing vehicle-to-vehicle communication, etc.
  • the vehicle may include a UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) (e.g., a drone).
  • XR devices include AR (Augmented Reality)/VR (Virtual Reality)/MR (Mixed Reality) devices and can be implemented in the form of HMD (Head-Mounted Device), HUD (Head-Up Display) installed in a vehicle, television, smartphone, computer, wearable device, home appliance, digital signage, vehicle, robot, etc.
  • HMD Head-Mounted Device
  • HUD Head-Up Display
  • Portable devices can include smartphone, smart pad, wearable device (e.g., smart watch, smart glass), computer (e.g., laptop, etc.).
  • Home appliances can include TV, refrigerator, washing machine, etc.
  • IoT devices can include sensors, smart meters, etc.
  • base stations and networks can also be implemented as wireless devices, and a specific wireless device (200a) can act as a base station/network node to other wireless devices.
  • Wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to a network (300) via a base station (200). Artificial Intelligence (AI) technology can be applied to the wireless devices (100a to 100f), and the wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to an AI server (400) via the network (300).
  • the network (300) can be configured using a 3G network, a 4G (e.g., LTE) network, a 5G (e.g., NR) network, etc.
  • the wireless devices (100a to 100f) can communicate with each other via the base station (200)/network (300), but can also communicate directly (e.g., sidelink communication) without going through the base station/network.
  • vehicles can communicate directly (e.g. V2V (Vehicle to Vehicle)/V2X (Vehicle to everything) communication).
  • IoT devices e.g., sensors
  • IoT devices can communicate directly with other IoT devices (e.g., sensors) or other wireless devices (100a to 100f).
  • Wireless communication/connection can be established between wireless devices (100a to 100f)/base stations (200), and base stations (200)/base stations (200).
  • the wireless communication/connection can be achieved through various wireless access technologies (e.g., 5G NR) such as uplink/downlink communication (150a), sidelink communication (150b) (or, D2D communication), and communication between base stations (150c) (e.g., relay, IAB (Integrated Access Backhaul).
  • 5G NR wireless access technologies
  • a wireless device and a base station/wireless device, and a base station and a base station can transmit/receive wireless signals to/from each other.
  • the wireless communication/connection can transmit/receive signals through various physical channels.
  • various configuration information setting processes for transmitting/receiving wireless signals various signal processing processes (e.g., channel encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, resource mapping/demapping, etc.), and resource allocation processes can be performed based on various proposals of the present invention.
  • Figure 26 illustrates a wireless device that can be applied to the present invention.
  • the first wireless device (100) and the second wireless device (200) can transmit and receive wireless signals through various wireless access technologies (e.g., LTE, NR).
  • ⁇ the first wireless device (100), the second wireless device (200) ⁇ can correspond to ⁇ the wireless device (100x), the base station (200) ⁇ and/or ⁇ the wireless device (100x), the wireless device (100x) ⁇ of FIG. 25.
  • a first wireless device (100) includes one or more processors (102) and one or more memories (104), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (106) and/or one or more antennas (108).
  • the processor (102) controls the memory (104) and/or the transceiver (106), and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • the processor (102) may process information in the memory (104) to generate first information/signal, and then transmit a wireless signal including the first information/signal via the transceiver (106).
  • the processor (102) may receive a wireless signal including second information/signal via the transceiver (106), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the second information/signal in the memory (104).
  • the memory (104) may be connected to the processor (102) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (102). For example, the memory (104) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (102), or may store software codes including instructions for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • the processor (102) and the memory (104) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chipset designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR).
  • the transceiver (106) may be connected to the processor (102) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (108).
  • the transceiver (106) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver.
  • the transceiver (106) may be used interchangeably with an RF (Radio Frequency) unit.
  • a wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chipset.
  • the first wireless device or terminal (100) may include a processor (102) and a memory (104) connected to a transceiver (106).
  • the memory (104) may include at least one program capable of performing operations related to the embodiments described in FIGS. 23, 24 and “Candidate Relay UE Selection Method for UAV Remote UE.”
  • the processor (102) controls the transceiver (106) to receive configuration information related to relay communication, receive discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals, and select a first or more number of candidate relay terminals for the relay communication from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the discovery messages and the configuration information.
  • the first number can be determined based on the height of the terminal and the configuration information.
  • a processing device including a processor (102) and a memory (104) may be configured.
  • at least one processor and at least one memory connected to the at least one processor and storing instructions, wherein the instructions, based on being executed by the at least one processor, cause the terminal to: receive configuration information related to relay communication, receive discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals, and select a first or more number of candidate relay terminals for the relay communication from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the discovery messages and the configuration information.
  • the first number may be determined based on a height of the terminal and the configuration information.
  • the second wireless device (200) includes one or more processors (202), one or more memories (204), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (206) and/or one or more antennas (208).
  • the processor (202) may be configured to control the memories (204) and/or the transceivers (206), and implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. For example, the processor (202) may process information in the memory (204) to generate third information/signals, and then transmit a wireless signal including the third information/signals via the transceivers (206). Additionally, the processor (202) may receive a wireless signal including fourth information/signals via the transceivers (206), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the fourth information/signals in the memory (204).
  • the memory (204) may be connected to the processor (202) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (202). For example, the memory (204) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (202), or may store software codes including commands for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • the processor (202) and the memory (204) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR).
  • the transceiver (206) may be connected to the processor (202) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (208).
  • the transceiver (206) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver.
  • the transceiver (206) may be used interchangeably with an RF unit.
  • a wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.
  • the second wireless device or base station (200) may include a processor (202) and a memory (204) coupled to a transceiver or RF transceiver (206).
  • the memory (204) may include at least one program capable of performing operations related to the embodiments described in FIGS. 23, 24 and “Candidate Relay UE Selection Method for UAV Remote UE.”
  • the processor (202) controls the transceiver (206) to transmit configuration information related to relay communication, receive candidate relay information for a first or more number of candidate relay terminals selected from among the plurality of relay terminals, select at least one relay terminal to perform relay communication from among the first or more number of candidate relay terminals, and transmit information about the at least one selected terminal to the terminal.
  • the first number can be determined based on the height of the terminal and the configuration information.
  • one or more protocol layers may be implemented by one or more processors (102, 202).
  • processors (102, 202) may implement one or more layers (e.g., functional layers such as PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP).
  • processors (102, 202) may generate one or more Protocol Data Units (PDUs) and/or one or more Service Data Units (SDUs) according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • PDUs Protocol Data Units
  • SDUs Service Data Units
  • One or more processors (102, 202) may generate messages, control information, data, or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document.
  • One or more processors (102, 202) can generate signals (e.g., baseband signals) including PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the functions, procedures, suggestions and/or methodologies disclosed herein and provide the signals to one or more transceivers (106, 206).
  • One or more processors (102, 202) can receive signals (e.g., baseband signals) from one or more transceivers (106, 206) and obtain PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein.
  • signals e.g., baseband signals
  • the one or more processors (102, 202) may be referred to as a controller, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, or a microcomputer.
  • the one or more processors (102, 202) may be implemented by hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof.
  • ASICs Application Specific Integrated Circuits
  • DSPs Digital Signal Processors
  • DSPDs Digital Signal Processing Devices
  • PLDs Programmable Logic Devices
  • FPGAs Field Programmable Gate Arrays
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software, and the firmware or software may be implemented to include modules, procedures, functions, etc.
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software configured to perform one or more of the following: included in one or more processors (102, 202), or stored in one or more memories (104, 204) and driven by one or more of the processors (102, 202).
  • the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software in the form of codes, instructions and/or sets of instructions.
  • One or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and may store various forms of data, signals, messages, information, programs, codes, instructions and/or commands.
  • the one or more memories (104, 204) may be comprised of ROM, RAM, EPROM, flash memory, hard drives, registers, cache memory, computer readable storage media and/or combinations thereof.
  • the one or more memories (104, 204) may be located internally and/or externally to the one or more processors (102, 202). Additionally, the one or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to the one or more processors (102, 202) via various technologies, such as wired or wireless connections.
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) can transmit user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the methods and/or flowcharts of this document, to one or more other devices.
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) can receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or flowcharts of this document, from one or more other devices.
  • one or more transceivers (106, 206) can be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and can transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • one or more processors (102, 202) can control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to transmit user data, control information, or wireless signals to one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more processors (102, 202) may control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to receive user data, control information, or wireless signals from one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be coupled to one or more antennas (108, 208), and one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be configured to transmit and receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, and the like, as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein, via one or more antennas (108, 208).
  • one or more antennas may be multiple physical antennas, or multiple logical antennas (e.g., antenna ports).
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from RF band signals to baseband signals in order to process the received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. using one or more processors (102, 202).
  • One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert processed user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from baseband signals to RF band signals using one or more processors (102, 202).
  • one or more transceivers (106, 206) may include an (analog) oscillator and/or filter.
  • Fig. 27 shows another example of a wireless device applied to the present invention.
  • the wireless device can be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example/service (see Fig. 25).
  • the wireless device (100, 200) corresponds to the wireless device (100, 200) of FIG. 26 and may be composed of various elements, components, units/units, and/or modules.
  • the wireless device (100, 200) may include a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a memory unit (130), and an additional element (140).
  • the communication unit may include a communication circuit (112) and a transceiver(s) (114).
  • the communication circuit (112) may include one or more processors (102, 202) and/or one or more memories (104, 204) of FIG. 27.
  • the transceiver(s) (114) may include one or more transceivers (106, 206) and/or one or more antennas (108, 208) of FIG. 26.
  • the control unit (120) is electrically connected to the communication unit (110), the memory unit (130), and the additional elements (140) and controls overall operations of the wireless device.
  • the control unit (120) may control electrical/mechanical operations of the wireless device based on programs/codes/commands/information stored in the memory unit (130).
  • control unit (120) may transmit information stored in the memory unit (130) to an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface through the communication unit (110), or may store information received from an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface in the memory unit (130).
  • an external device e.g., another communication device
  • the control unit (120) may transmit information stored in the memory unit (130) to an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface through the communication unit (110), or may store information received from an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface in the memory unit (130).
  • the additional element (140) may be configured in various ways depending on the type of the wireless device.
  • the additional element (140) may include at least one of a power unit/battery, an input/output unit (I/O unit), a driving unit, and a computing unit.
  • the wireless device may be implemented in the form of a robot (FIG. 25, 100a), a vehicle (FIG. 25, 100b-1, 100b-2), an XR device (FIG. 25, 100c), a portable device (FIG. 25, 100d), a home appliance (FIG. 25, 100e), an IoT device (FIG.
  • Wireless devices may be mobile or stationary, depending on the use/service.
  • various elements, components, units/parts, and/or modules within the wireless device (100, 200) may be entirely interconnected via a wired interface, or at least some may be wirelessly connected via a communication unit (110).
  • the control unit (120) and the communication unit (110) may be wired, and the control unit (120) and the first unit (e.g., 130, 140) may be wirelessly connected via the communication unit (110).
  • each element, component, unit/part, and/or module within the wireless device (100, 200) may further include one or more elements.
  • the control unit (120) may be composed of one or more processor sets.
  • control unit (120) may be composed of a set of a communication control processor, an application processor, an electronic control unit (ECU), a graphic processing processor, a memory control processor, etc.
  • memory unit (130) may be composed of RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM (Dynamic RAM), ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, volatile memory, non-volatile memory, and/or a combination thereof.
  • Fig. 28 illustrates a vehicle or autonomous vehicle applied to the present invention.
  • the vehicle or autonomous vehicle may be implemented as a mobile robot, a car, a train, a manned/unmanned aerial vehicle (AV), a ship, etc.
  • AV manned/unmanned aerial vehicle
  • a vehicle or autonomous vehicle may include an antenna unit (108), a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a driving unit (140a), a power supply unit (140b), a sensor unit (140c), and an autonomous driving unit (140d).
  • the antenna unit (108) may be configured as a part of the communication unit (110).
  • Blocks 110/130/140a to 140d correspond to blocks 110/130/140 of FIG. 27, respectively.
  • the communication unit (110) can transmit and receive signals (e.g., data, control signals, etc.) with external devices such as other vehicles, base stations (e.g., base stations, road side units, etc.), servers, etc.
  • the control unit (120) can control elements of the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) to perform various operations.
  • the control unit (120) can include an ECU (Electronic Control Unit).
  • the drive unit (140a) can drive the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) on the ground.
  • the drive unit (140a) can include an engine, a motor, a power train, wheels, brakes, a steering device, etc.
  • the power supply unit (140b) supplies power to the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) and can include a wired/wireless charging circuit, a battery, etc.
  • the sensor unit (140c) can obtain vehicle status, surrounding environment information, user information, etc.
  • the sensor unit (140c) may include an IMU (inertial measurement unit) sensor, a collision sensor, a wheel sensor, a speed sensor, an incline sensor, a weight detection sensor, a heading sensor, a position module, a vehicle forward/backward sensor, a battery sensor, a fuel sensor, a tire sensor, a steering sensor, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a pedal position sensor, etc.
  • IMU intial measurement unit
  • the autonomous driving unit (140d) may implement a technology for maintaining a driving lane, a technology for automatically controlling speed such as adaptive cruise control, a technology for automatically driving along a set path, a technology for automatically setting a path and driving when a destination is set, etc.
  • the communication unit (110) can receive map data, traffic information data, etc. from an external server.
  • the autonomous driving unit (140d) can generate an autonomous driving route and a driving plan based on the acquired data.
  • the control unit (120) can control the driving unit (140a) so that the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) moves along the autonomous driving route according to the driving plan (e.g., speed/direction control).
  • the communication unit (110) can irregularly/periodically acquire the latest traffic information data from an external server and can acquire surrounding traffic information data from surrounding vehicles.
  • the sensor unit (140c) can acquire vehicle status and surrounding environment information during autonomous driving.
  • the autonomous driving unit (140d) can update the autonomous driving route and driving plan based on the newly acquired data/information.
  • the communication unit (110) can transmit information on the vehicle location, autonomous driving route, driving plan, etc. to an external server.
  • External servers can predict traffic information data in advance using AI technology, etc. based on information collected from vehicles or autonomous vehicles, and provide the predicted traffic information data to vehicles or autonomous vehicles.
  • the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification may include LTE, NR, and 6G, as well as Narrowband Internet of Things for low-power communication.
  • NB-IoT technology may be an example of LPWAN (Low Power Wide Area Network) technology, and may be implemented with standards such as LTE Cat NB1 and/or LTE Cat NB2, and is not limited to the above-described names.
  • the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification may perform communication based on LTE-M technology.
  • LTE-M technology may be an example of LPWAN technology, and may be called by various names such as eMTC (enhanced Machine Type Communication).
  • the LTE-M technology can be implemented by at least one of various standards such as 1) LTE CAT 0, 2) LTE Cat M1, 3) LTE Cat M2, 4) LTE non-BL (non-Bandwidth Limited), 5) LTE-MTC, 6) LTE Machine Type Communication, and/or 7) LTE M, and is not limited to the above-described names.
  • the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification can include at least one of ZigBee, Bluetooth, and Low Power Wide Area Network (LPWAN) considering low-power communication, and is not limited to the above-described names.
  • ZigBee technology can create PAN (personal area networks) related to small/low-power digital communication based on various standards such as IEEE 802.15.4, and can be called by various names.
  • the embodiments of the present invention have been mainly described with a focus on the signal transmission/reception relationship between a terminal and a base station.
  • This transmission/reception relationship is equally/similarly extended to signal transmission/reception between a terminal and a relay or a base station and a relay.
  • a specific operation described as being performed by a base station in this document may, in some cases, be performed by its upper node. That is, it is obvious that various operations performed for communication with a terminal in a network composed of a plurality of network nodes including a base station may be performed by the base station or other network nodes other than the base station.
  • the base station may be replaced with terms such as a fixed station, a Node B, an eNode B (eNB), an access point, etc.
  • the terminal may be replaced with terms such as a UE (User Equipment), an MS (Mobile Station), an MSS (Mobile Subscriber Station), etc.
  • Embodiments according to the present invention can be implemented by various means, for example, hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof.
  • an embodiment of the present invention can be implemented by one or more ASICs (application specific integrated circuits), DSPs (digital signal processors), DSPDs (digital signal processing devices), PLDs (programmable logic devices), FPGAs (field programmable gate arrays), processors, controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, etc.
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • DSPDs digital signal processing devices
  • PLDs programmable logic devices
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • processors controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, etc.
  • one embodiment of the present invention may be implemented in the form of a module, procedure, function, etc. that performs the functions or operations described above.
  • the software code may be stored in a memory unit and may be driven by a processor.
  • the memory unit may be located inside or outside the processor and may exchange data with the processor by various means already known.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Astronomy & Astrophysics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed, according to various embodiments, are a method by which a terminal selects a candidate relay terminal in a wireless communication system, and an apparatus therefor. Disclosed are a method and an apparatus therefor, the method comprising the steps of: receiving configuration information related to relay communication; receiving discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals; and selecting a first number or more of candidate relay terminals for the relay communication from among the plurality of relay terminals on the basis of the discovery messages and the configuration information.

Description

무선 통신 시스템에서 릴레이 통신을 수행하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치Method for performing relay communication in a wireless communication system and device therefor

무선 통신 시스템에서 단말이 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 릴레이 통신을 수행할 릴레이 단말을 선택하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치에 대한 것이다.The present invention relates to a method for selecting a relay terminal to perform relay communication among a plurality of relay terminals in a wireless communication system and to a device therefor.

무선 통신 시스템은 가용한 시스템 자원(예를 들어, 대역폭, 전송 전력 등)을 공유하여 다중 사용자와의 통신을 지원하는 다중 접속(multiple access) 시스템이다. 다중 접속 시스템의 예로는 CDMA(code division multiple access) 시스템, FDMA(frequency division multiple access) 시스템, TDMA(time division multiple access) 시스템, OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access) 시스템, SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access) 시스템, MC-FDMA(multi carrier frequency division multiple access) 시스템 등이 있다.A wireless communication system is a multiple access system that supports communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (e.g., bandwidth, transmission power, etc.). Examples of multiple access systems include a CDMA (code division multiple access) system, an FDMA (frequency division multiple access) system, a TDMA (time division multiple access) system, an OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) system, an SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) system, and an MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system.

사이드링크(sidelink, SL)란 단말(User Equipment, UE)들 간에 직접적인 링크를 설정하여, 기지국(Base Station, BS)을 거치지 않고, 단말 간에 음성 또는 데이터 등을 직접 주고 받는 통신 방식을 말한다. SL는 급속도로 증가하는 데이터 트래픽에 따른 기지국의 부담을 해결할 수 있는 하나의 방안으로서 고려되고 있다.Sidelink (SL) refers to a communication method that establishes a direct link between user equipment (UE) to directly exchange voice or data between terminals without going through a base station (BS). SL is being considered as a solution to solve the burden on base stations due to rapidly increasing data traffic.

V2X(vehicle-to-everything)는 유/무선 통신을 통해 다른 차량, 보행자, 인프라가 구축된 사물 등과 정보를 교환하는 통신 기술을 의미한다. V2X는 V2V(vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I(vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N(vehicle-to- network) 및 V2P(vehicle-to-pedestrian)와 같은 4 가지 유형으로 구분될 수 있다. V2X 통신은 PC5 인터페이스 및/또는 Uu 인터페이스를 통해 제공될 수 있다.V2X (vehicle-to-everything) refers to a communication technology that exchanges information with other vehicles, pedestrians, and objects with built-in infrastructure through wired/wireless communication. V2X can be divided into four types: V2V (vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I (vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N (vehicle-to-network), and V2P (vehicle-to-pedestrian). V2X communication can be provided through the PC5 interface and/or the Uu interface.

한편, 더욱 많은 통신 기기들이 더욱 큰 통신 용량을 요구하게 됨에 따라, 기존의 무선 액세스 기술(Radio Access Technology, RAT)에 비해 향상된 모바일 광대역 (mobile broadband) 통신에 대한 필요성이 대두되고 있다. 이에 따라, 신뢰도(reliability) 및 지연(latency)에 민감한 서비스 또는 단말을 고려한 통신 시스템이 논의되고 있는데, 개선된 이동 광대역 통신, 매시브 MTC(Machine Type Communication), URLLC(Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication) 등을 고려한 차세대 무선 접속 기술을 새로운 RAT(new radio access technology) 또는 NR(new radio)이라 칭할 수 있다. NR에서도 V2X(vehicle-to-everything) 통신이 지원될 수 있다.Meanwhile, as more and more communication devices require greater communication capacity, there is a growing need for improved mobile broadband communication over existing Radio Access Technology (RAT). Accordingly, communication systems that consider services or terminals sensitive to reliability and latency are being discussed, and the next-generation radio access technology that considers improved mobile broadband communication, massive MTC (Machine Type Communication), URLLC (Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication), etc. can be called new RAT (new radio access technology) or NR (new radio). V2X (vehicle-to-everything) communication can also be supported in NR.

도 1은 NR 이전의 RAT에 기반한 V2X 통신과 NR에 기반한 V2X 통신을 비교하여 설명하기 위한 도면이다Figure 1 is a diagram for explaining and comparing V2X communication based on RAT before NR and V2X communication based on NR.

V2X 통신과 관련하여, NR 이전의 RAT에서는 BSM(Basic Safety Message), CAM(Cooperative Awareness Message), DENM(Decentralized Environmental Notification Message)과 같은 V2X 메시지를 기반으로, 안전 서비스(safety service)를 제공하는 방안이 주로 논의되었다. V2X 메시지는, 위치 정보, 동적 정보, 속성 정보 등을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 주기적인 메시지(periodic message) 타입의 CAM, 및/또는 이벤트 트리거 메시지(event triggered message) 타입의 DENM을 다른 단말에게 전송할 수 있다.In relation to V2X communication, in RATs prior to NR, methods for providing safety services based on V2X messages such as Basic Safety Message (BSM), Cooperative Awareness Message (CAM), and Decentralized Environmental Notification Message (DENM) have been mainly discussed. V2X messages may include location information, dynamic information, attribute information, etc. For example, a terminal may transmit a CAM of a periodic message type and/or a DENM of an event triggered message type to another terminal.

예를 들어, CAM은 방향 및 속도와 같은 차량의 동적 상태 정보, 치수와 같은 차량 정적 데이터, 외부 조명 상태, 경로 내역 등 기본 차량 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 CAM을 방송할 수 있으며, CAM의 지연(latency)은 100ms보다 작을 수 있다. 예를 들어, 차량의 고장, 사고 등의 돌발적인 상황이 발행하는 경우, 단말은 DENM을 생성하여 다른 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말의 전송 범위 내에 있는 모든 차량은 CAM 및/또는 DENM을 수신할 수 있다. 이 경우, DENM은 CAM 보다 높은 우선 순위를 가질 수 있다.For example, CAM may include basic vehicle information such as vehicle dynamic status information such as direction and speed, vehicle static data such as dimensions, exterior lighting status, and route history. For example, the terminal may broadcast CAM, and the latency of the CAM may be less than 100ms. For example, when an emergency situation such as vehicle breakdown or accident occurs, the terminal may generate DENM and transmit it to other terminals. For example, all vehicles within the transmission range of the terminal may receive CAM and/or DENM. In this case, DENM may have a higher priority than CAM.

이후, V2X 통신과 관련하여, 다양한 V2X 시나리오들이 NR에서 제시되고 있다. 예를 들어, 다양한 V2X 시나리오들은, 차량 플라투닝(vehicle platooning), 향상된 드라이빙(advanced driving), 확장된 센서들(extended sensors), 리모트 드라이빙(remote driving) 등을 포함할 수 있다. Since then, various V2X scenarios have been proposed in NR in relation to V2X communication. For example, various V2X scenarios may include vehicle platooning, advanced driving, extended sensors, and remote driving.

예를 들어, 차량 플라투닝을 기반으로, 차량들은 동적으로 그룹을 형성하여 함께 이동할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 차량 플라투닝에 기반한 플라툰 동작들(platoon operations)을 수행하기 위해, 상기 그룹에 속하는 차량들은 선두 차량으로부터 주기적인 데이터를 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 그룹에 속하는 차량들은 주기적인 데이터를 이용하여, 차량들 사이의 간격을 줄이거나 넓힐 수 있다. For example, based on vehicle platooning, vehicles can dynamically form a group and move together. For example, in order to perform platoon operations based on vehicle platooning, vehicles belonging to the group can receive periodic data from the lead vehicle. For example, vehicles belonging to the group can use the periodic data to reduce or increase the gap between vehicles.

예를 들어, 향상된 드라이빙을 기반으로, 차량은 반자동화 또는 완전 자동화될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 각 차량은 근접 차량 및/또는 근접 로지컬 엔티티(logical entity)의 로컬 센서(local sensor)에서 획득된 데이터를 기반으로, 궤도(trajectories) 또는 기동(maneuvers)을 조정할 수 있다. 또한, 예를 들어, 각 차량은 근접한 차량들과 드라이빙 인텐션(driving intention)을 상호 공유할 수 있다. For example, based on improved driving, the vehicles can be semi-autonomous or fully automated. For example, each vehicle can adjust its trajectories or maneuvers based on data acquired from local sensors of nearby vehicles and/or nearby logical entities. Additionally, for example, each vehicle can share driving intentions with nearby vehicles.

예를 들어, 확장 센서들을 기반으로, 로컬 센서들을 통해 획득된 로 데이터(raw data) 또는 처리된 데이터(processed data), 또는 라이브 비디오 데이터(live video data)는 차량, 로지컬 엔티티, 보행자들의 단말 및/또는 V2X 응용 서버 간에 상호 교환될 수 있다. 따라서, 예를 들어, 차량은 자체 센서를 이용하여 감지할 수 있는 환경 보다 향상된 환경을 인식할 수 있다. For example, based on the extended sensors, raw data or processed data, or live video data acquired through local sensors can be exchanged between vehicles, logical entities, pedestrian terminals, and/or V2X application servers. Thus, for example, the vehicle can perceive the environment better than it can perceive using its own sensors.

예를 들어, 리모트 드라이빙을 기반으로, 운전을 하지 못하는 사람 또는 위험한 환경에 위치한 리모트 차량을 위해, 리모트 드라이버 또는 V2X 애플리케이션은 상기 리모트 차량을 동작 또는 제어할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 대중 교통과 같이 경로를 예측할 수 있는 경우, 클라우드 컴퓨팅 기반의 드라이빙이 상기 리모트 차량의 동작 또는 제어에 이용될 수 있다. 또한, 예를 들어, 클라우드 기반의 백엔드 서비스 플랫폼(cloud-based back-end service platform)에 대한 액세스가 리모트 드라이빙을 위해 고려될 수 있다.For example, based on remote driving, for a person who cannot drive or a remote vehicle located in a dangerous environment, a remote driver or V2X application can operate or control the remote vehicle. For example, in the case of predictable paths such as public transportation, cloud computing-based driving can be used to operate or control the remote vehicle. In addition, for example, access to a cloud-based back-end service platform can be considered for remote driving.

한편, 차량 플라투닝, 향상된 드라이빙, 확장된 센서들, 리모트 드라이빙 등 다양한 V2X 시나리오들에 대한 서비스 요구사항(service requirements)들을 구체화하는 방안이 NR에 기반한 V2X 통신에서 논의되고 있다.Meanwhile, a method to specify service requirements for various V2X scenarios, such as vehicle platooning, enhanced driving, expanded sensors, and remote driving, is being discussed in NR-based V2X communications.

본 발명이 이루고자 하는 기술적 과제는 보다 정확하고 효율적으로 릴레이 통신을 수행하는 방법을 제공하는데 있다.The technical problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a method for performing relay communication more accurately and efficiently.

기술적 과제들은 이상에서 언급한 기술적 과제들로 제한되지 않으며, 언급하지 않은 또 다른 기술적 과제들은 아래의 기재로부터 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 명확하게 이해될 수 있을 것이다.The technical challenges are not limited to the technical challenges mentioned above, and other technical challenges not mentioned will be clearly understood by those skilled in the art to which the present invention belongs from the description below.

일 측면에 따른 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말이 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택하는 방법은 릴레이 통신과 관련된 설정 정보를 수신하는 단계; 복수의 릴레이 단말들로부터 디스커버리 메시지들을 수신하는 단계; 및 상기 디스커버리 메시지들 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 후보 릴레이 단말을 제1 개수 이상 선택하는 단계를 포함하고, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정될 수 있다.In a wireless communication system according to one aspect, a method for a terminal to select a candidate relay terminal includes: a step of receiving configuration information related to relay communication; a step of receiving discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals; and a step of selecting a first or more number of candidate relay terminals for the relay communication from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the discovery messages and the configuration information, wherein the first number can be determined based on a height of the terminal and the configuration information.

또는, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 높이 범위 별로 상이하게 결정되는 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the first number is characterized in that it is determined differently for each height range based on the setting information.

또는, 상기 디스커버리 메시지는 비행 경로에 대한 정보를 포함하는 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the discovery message may be characterized by including information about the flight path.

또는, 상기 후보 릴레이 단말은 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 단말의 비행 경로와 소정의 오차 범위 내의 비행 경로를 갖는 릴레이 단말인 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the candidate relay terminal is characterized as being a relay terminal having a flight path within a predetermined error range from the flight path of the terminal among the plurality of relay terminals.

또는, 상기 후보 릴레이 단말은 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 설정 정보에 의해 설정된 선택 허용 높이 범위 내에 위치하는 릴레이 단말인 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the candidate relay terminal is characterized in that it is a relay terminal located within a selection allowable height range set by the setting information among the plurality of relay terminals.

또는, 상기 후보 릴레이 단말의 선택은 상기 단말의 높이가 상기 설정 정보에 포함된 특정 높이 범위에 속하는 것에 기초하여 수행되는 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the selection of the candidate relay terminal is characterized in that it is performed based on the height of the terminal falling within a specific height range included in the setting information.

또는, 상기 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들에 대한 정보를 기지국에 보고하는 단계;를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the method further comprises a step of reporting information about the candidate relay terminals of the first number or more to the base station.

또는, 상기 단말은 상기 선택된 후보 릴레이 단말에 기반하여 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 간접 링크를 제2 개수 이상 형성하는 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the terminal is characterized in that it forms a second or more number of indirect links for the relay communication based on the selected candidate relay terminals.

또는, 상기 제2 개수는 상기 설정 정보 및 상기 단말의 높이에 기초하여 결정되는 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the second number is characterized in that it is determined based on the setting information and the height of the terminal.

또는, 상기 단말은 UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) 리모트 (Remote) 단말인 것을 특징으로 한다.Alternatively, the terminal is characterized as being an Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) remote terminal.

다른 일 측면에 따라서 상술된 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택하기 위한 방법을 수행하기 위한 명령어들을 기록한 비일시적 컴퓨터 판독가능 저장 매체가 제공될 수 있다.According to another aspect, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium having recorded thereon instructions for performing the method for selecting a candidate relay terminal described above may be provided.

또 다른 일 측면에 따라서 상술된 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택하기 위한 방법을 수행하는 단말이 제공될 수 있다.According to another aspect, a terminal may be provided that performs the method for selecting a candidate relay terminal described above.

또 다른 일 측면에 따라서 상술된 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택하기 위한 방법을 수행하는 단말을 제어하기 위한 프로세싱 장치가 제공될 수 있다.According to another aspect, a processing device may be provided for controlling a terminal performing the method for selecting a candidate relay terminal described above.

또 다른 측면에 따르면, 무선 통신 시스템에서 기지국이 단말로부터 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신하는 방법은, 상기 단말에게 릴레이 통신과 관련된 설정 정보를 전송하는 단계; 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 선택된 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들에 대한 상기 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신하는 단계; 및 상기 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들 중에서 릴레이 통신을 수행할 적어도 하나의 릴레이 단말을 선택하고, 상기 선택된 적어도 하나의 단말에 대한 정보를 상기 단말에게 전송하는 단계를 포함하고, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정될 수 있다.According to another aspect, a method for a base station to receive candidate relay information from a terminal in a wireless communication system includes the steps of: transmitting configuration information related to relay communication to the terminal; receiving the candidate relay information for a first or more number of candidate relay terminals selected from among the plurality of relay terminals; and selecting at least one relay terminal to perform relay communication from among the first or more number of candidate relay terminals, and transmitting information about the at least one selected terminal to the terminal, wherein the first number can be determined based on a height of the terminal and the configuration information.

또 다른 일 측면에 따라서 상술된 단말로부터 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신하는 방법을 수행하는 기지국이 제공될 수 있다.According to another aspect, a base station performing a method of receiving candidate relay information from a terminal as described above may be provided.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면 무선 통신 시스템에서 릴레이 통신을 보다 정확하고 효율적으로 수행될 수 있다.According to one embodiment of the present invention, relay communication can be performed more accurately and efficiently in a wireless communication system.

다양한 실시예에서 얻을 수 있는 효과는 이상에서 언급한 효과들로 제한되지 않으며, 언급하지 않은 또 다른 효과들은 아래의 기재로부터 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 명확하게 이해될 수 있을 것이다.The effects that can be obtained in various embodiments are not limited to the effects mentioned above, and other effects not mentioned will be clearly understood by those skilled in the art to which the present invention pertains from the description below.

본 명세서에 첨부되는 도면은 본 발명에 대한 이해를 제공하기 위한 것으로서 본 발명의 다양한 실시형태들을 나타내고 명세서의 기재와 함께 본 발명의 원리를 설명하기 위한 것이다. The drawings appended hereto are included to provide an understanding of the present invention and to illustrate various embodiments of the present invention and, together with the description of the specification, serve to explain the principles of the present invention.

도 1은 NR 이전의 RAT에 기반한 V2X 통신과 NR에 기반한 V2X 통신을 비교하여 설명하기 위한 도면이다Figure 1 is a diagram for explaining and comparing V2X communication based on RAT before NR and V2X communication based on NR.

도 2은 LTE 시스템의 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 2 shows the structure of the LTE system.

도 3은 NR 시스템의 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 3 shows the structure of the NR system.

도 4은 NR의 무선 프레임의 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 4 shows the structure of a radio frame of NR.

도 5은 NR 프레임의 슬롯 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 5 shows the slot structure of an NR frame.

도 6은 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, 6G 시스템에서 제공 가능한 통신 구조를 나타낸다.FIG. 6 illustrates a communication structure that can be provided in a 6G system according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.

도 7는 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, 전자기 스펙트럼을 나타낸다.FIG. 7 illustrates an electromagnetic spectrum according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.

도 8는 SL 통신을 위한 무선 프로토콜 구조(radio protocol architecture)를 나타낸다.Figure 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication.

도 9는 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 수행하는 단말을 나타낸다.Figure 9 shows a terminal performing V2X or SL communication.

도 10는 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 위한 자원 단위를 나타낸다.Figure 10 shows resource units for V2X or SL communication.

도 11은 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, BWP의 일 예를 나타낸다. FIG. 11 illustrates an example of a BWP according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.

도 12는 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따라, 단말이 자원 할당 모드에 따라 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 수행하는 절차를 나타낸다. FIG. 12 illustrates a procedure for a terminal to perform V2X or SL communication according to a resource allocation mode according to one embodiment of the present disclosure.

도 13은 직접 (direct) 경로에서 간접 (indirect) 경로로 경로 스위칭 (path switching)하는 절차를 도시한다.Figure 13 illustrates a procedure for path switching from a direct path to an indirect path.

도 14는 직접 경로에서 간접 경로로 전환하는 방법을 간략하게 도시한다.Figure 14 schematically illustrates how to switch from a direct route to an indirect route.

도 15 및 도 16은 릴레이 디스커버리 없이 U2U 릴레이 선택 (UE-to-UE Relay Selection)하는 절차를 설명하기 위한 도면이다.FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams for explaining a procedure for U2U relay selection (UE-to-UE Relay Selection) without relay discovery.

도 17은 L2 U2U 릴레이를 위한 평면 프로토콜 스택을 간략하게 도시한다.Figure 17 schematically illustrates a flat protocol stack for L2 U2U relay.

도 18 내지 도 22은 U2X 시스템을 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figures 18 to 22 are drawings for explaining the U2X system.

도 23은 단말이 릴레이 단말을 선택하는 방법을 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figure 23 is a drawing for explaining how a terminal selects a relay terminal.

도 24은 기지국이 단말로부터 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신하는 방법을 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figure 24 is a diagram for explaining a method for a base station to receive candidate relay information from a terminal.

도 25은 본 발명에 적용되는 통신 시스템을 예시한다.Figure 25 illustrates a communication system applied to the present invention.

도 26은 본 발명에 적용될 수 있는 무선 기기를 예시한다.Figure 26 illustrates a wireless device that can be applied to the present invention.

도 27은 본 발명에 적용되는 무선 기기의 다른 예를 나타낸다. 무선 기기는 사용-예/서비스에 따라 다양한 형태로 구현될 수 있다Fig. 27 shows another example of a wireless device applied to the present invention. The wireless device can be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example/service.

도 28는 본 발명에 적용되는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량을 예시한다.Figure 28 illustrates a vehicle or autonomous vehicle to which the present invention is applied.

무선 통신 시스템은 가용한 시스템 자원(예를 들어, 대역폭, 전송 파워 등)을 공유하여 다중 사용자와의 통신을 지원하는 다중 접속(multiple access) 시스템이다. 다중 접속 시스템의 예로는 CDMA(code division multiple access) 시스템, FDMA(frequency division multiple access) 시스템, TDMA(time division multiple access) 시스템, OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access) 시스템, SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access) 시스템, MC-FDMA(multi carrier frequency division multiple access) 시스템 등이 있다.A wireless communication system is a multiple access system that supports communication with multiple users by sharing available system resources (e.g., bandwidth, transmission power, etc.). Examples of multiple access systems include a CDMA (code division multiple access) system, an FDMA (frequency division multiple access) system, a TDMA (time division multiple access) system, an OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access) system, an SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access) system, and an MC-FDMA (multi carrier frequency division multiple access) system.

사이드링크(sidelink)란 단말(User Equipment, UE)들 간에 직접적인 링크를 설정하여, 기지국(Base Station, BS)을 거치지 않고, 단말 간에 음성 또는 데이터 등을 직접 주고 받는 통신 방식을 말한다. 사이드링크는 급속도로 증가하는 데이터 트래픽에 따른 기지국의 부담을 해결할 수 있는 하나의 방안으로서 고려되고 있다.Sidelink refers to a communication method that establishes a direct link between user equipment (UE) to directly exchange voice or data between terminals without going through a base station (BS). Sidelink is being considered as a solution to solve the burden on base stations due to rapidly increasing data traffic.

V2X(vehicle-to-everything)는 유/무선 통신을 통해 다른 차량, 보행자, 인프라가 구축된 사물 등과 정보를 교환하는 통신 기술을 의미한다. V2X는 V2V(vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I(vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N(vehicle-to- network) 및 V2P(vehicle-to-pedestrian)와 같은 4 가지 유형으로 구분될 수 있다. V2X 통신은 PC5 인터페이스 및/또는 Uu 인터페이스를 통해 제공될 수 있다.V2X (vehicle-to-everything) refers to a communication technology that exchanges information with other vehicles, pedestrians, and objects with built-in infrastructure through wired/wireless communication. V2X can be divided into four types: V2V (vehicle-to-vehicle), V2I (vehicle-to-infrastructure), V2N (vehicle-to-network), and V2P (vehicle-to-pedestrian). V2X communication can be provided through the PC5 interface and/or the Uu interface.

한편, 더욱 많은 통신 기기들이 더욱 큰 통신 용량을 요구하게 됨에 따라, 기존의 무선 액세스 기술(Radio Access Technology, RAT)에 비해 향상된 모바일 광대역 (mobile broadband) 통신에 대한 필요성이 대두되고 있다. 이에 따라, 신뢰도(reliability) 및 지연(latency)에 민감한 서비스 또는 단말을 고려한 통신 시스템이 논의되고 있는데, 개선된 이동 광대역 통신, 매시브 MTC, URLLC(Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication) 등을 고려한 차세대 무선 접속 기술을 새로운 RAT(new radio access technology) 또는 NR(new radio)이라 칭할 수 있다. NR에서도 V2X(vehicle-to-everything) 통신이 지원될 수 있다.Meanwhile, as more and more communication devices require greater communication capacity, there is a growing need for improved mobile broadband communication over existing Radio Access Technology (RAT). Accordingly, communication systems that consider services or terminals sensitive to reliability and latency are being discussed, and the next-generation radio access technology that considers improved mobile broadband communication, massive MTC, and URLLC (Ultra-Reliable and Low Latency Communication) can be called new RAT (new radio access technology) or NR (new radio). V2X (vehicle-to-everything) communication can also be supported in NR.

이하의 기술은 CDMA(code division multiple access), FDMA(frequency division multiple access), TDMA(time division multiple access), OFDMA(orthogonal frequency division multiple access), SC-FDMA(single carrier frequency division multiple access) 등과 같은 다양한 무선 통신 시스템에 사용될 수 있다. CDMA는 UTRA(universal terrestrial radio access)나 CDMA2000과 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. TDMA는 GSM(global system for mobile communications)/GPRS(general packet radio service)/EDGE(enhanced data rates for GSM evolution)와 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. OFDMA는 IEEE(institute of electrical and electronics engineers) 802.11(Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16(WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA(evolved UTRA) 등과 같은 무선 기술로 구현될 수 있다. IEEE 802.16m은 IEEE 802.16e의 진화로, IEEE 802.16e에 기반한 시스템과의 하위 호환성(backward compatibility)를 제공한다. UTRA는 UMTS(universal mobile telecommunications system)의 일부이다. 3GPP(3rd generation partnership project) LTE(long term evolution)은 E-UTRA(evolved-UMTS terrestrial radio access)를 사용하는 E-UMTS(evolved UMTS)의 일부로써, 하향링크에서 OFDMA를 채용하고 상향링크에서 SC-FDMA를 채용한다. LTE-A(advanced)는 3GPP LTE의 진화이다. The following technology can be used in various wireless communication systems, such as CDMA (code division multiple access), FDMA (frequency division multiple access), TDMA (time division multiple access), OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiple access), and SC-FDMA (single carrier frequency division multiple access). CDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as UTRA (universal terrestrial radio access) or CDMA2000. TDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as GSM (global system for mobile communications)/GPRS (general packet radio service)/EDGE (enhanced data rates for GSM evolution). OFDMA can be implemented with wireless technologies such as IEEE (institute of electrical and electronics engineers) 802.11 (Wi-Fi), IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX), IEEE 802-20, E-UTRA (evolved UTRA). IEEE 802.16m is an evolution of IEEE 802.16e, providing backward compatibility with systems based on IEEE 802.16e. UTRA is part of UMTS (universal mobile telecommunications system). 3GPP (3rd generation partnership project) LTE (long term evolution) is a part of E-UMTS (evolved UMTS) that uses E-UTRA (evolved-UMTS terrestrial radio access), employing OFDMA in the downlink and SC-FDMA in the uplink. LTE-A (advanced) is an evolution of 3GPP LTE.

5G NR은 LTE-A의 후속 기술로서, 고성능, 저지연, 고가용성 등의 특성을 가지는 새로운 Clean-slate 형태의 이동 통신 시스템이다. 5G NR은 1GHz 미만의 저주파 대역에서부터 1GHz~10GHz의 중간 주파 대역, 24GHz 이상의 고주파(밀리미터파) 대역 등 사용 가능한 모든 스펙트럼 자원을 활용할 수 있다.5G NR is a new clean-slate type mobile communication system that is the successor technology to LTE-A and has the characteristics of high performance, low latency, and high availability. 5G NR can utilize all available spectrum resources, from low frequency bands below 1 GHz to intermediate frequency bands between 1 GHz and 10 GHz, and high frequency (millimeter wave) bands above 24 GHz.

설명을 명확하게 하기 위해, LTE-A 또는 5G NR을 위주로 기술하지만 실시예(들)의 기술적 사상이 이에 제한되는 것은 아니다.For clarity of explanation, the description will focus on LTE-A or 5G NR, but the technical idea of the embodiment(s) is not limited thereto.

도 2은 적용될 수 있는 LTE 시스템의 구조를 나타낸다. 이는 E-UTRAN(Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network), 또는 LTE(Long Term Evolution)/LTE-A 시스템이라고 불릴 수 있다.Figure 2 shows the structure of an applicable LTE system. This may be called an Evolved-UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), or a Long Term Evolution (LTE)/LTE-A system.

도 2을 참조하면, E-UTRAN은 단말(10)에게 제어 평면(control plane)과 사용자 평면(user plane)을 제공하는 기지국(20; Base Station, BS)을 포함한다. 단말(10)은 고정되거나 이동성을 가질 수 있으며, MS(Mobile Station), UT(User Terminal), SS(Subscriber Station), MT(Mobile Terminal), 무선기기(Wireless Device) 등 다른 용어로 불릴 수 있다. 기지국(20)은 단말(10)과 통신하는 고정된 지점(fixed station)을 말하며, eNB(evolved-NodeB), BTS(Base Transceiver System), 액세스 포인트(Access Point) 등 다른 용어로 불릴 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 2, the E-UTRAN includes a base station (20; BS) that provides a control plane and a user plane to a terminal (10). The terminal (10) may be fixed or mobile, and may be called by other terms such as a mobile station (MS), a user terminal (UT), a subscriber station (SS), a mobile terminal (MT), a wireless device, etc. The base station (20) refers to a fixed station that communicates with the terminal (10), and may be called by other terms such as an evolved-NodeB (eNB), a base transceiver system (BTS), an access point, etc.

기지국(20)들은 X2 인터페이스를 통하여 서로 연결될 수 있다. 기지국(20)은 S1 인터페이스를 통해 EPC(Evolved Packet Core, 30), 보다 상세하게는 S1-MME를 통해 MME(Mobility Management Entity)와 S1-U를 통해 S-GW(Serving Gateway)와 연결된다. Base stations (20) can be connected to each other through the X2 interface. The base station (20) is connected to an EPC (Evolved Packet Core, 30) through the S1 interface, more specifically, to an MME (Mobility Management Entity) through the S1-MME and to an S-GW (Serving Gateway) through the S1-U.

EPC(30)는 MME, S-GW 및 P-GW(Packet Data Network-Gateway)로 구성된다. MME는 단말의 접속 정보나 단말의 능력에 관한 정보를 가지고 있으며, 이러한 정보는 단말의 이동성 관리에 주로 사용된다. S-GW는 E-UTRAN을 종단점으로 갖는 게이트웨이이며, P-GW는 PDN을 종단점으로 갖는 게이트웨이이다.EPC (30) consists of MME, S-GW, and P-GW (Packet Data Network-Gateway). MME has terminal connection information or terminal capability information, and this information is mainly used for terminal mobility management. S-GW is a gateway with E-UTRAN as an end point, and P-GW is a gateway with PDN as an end point.

단말과 네트워크 사이의 무선인터페이스 프로토콜(Radio Interface Protocol)의 계층들은 통신시스템에서 널리 알려진 개방형 시스템간 상호접속(Open System Interconnection, OSI) 기준 모델의 하위 3개 계층을 바탕으로 L1 (제 1 계층), L2 (제 2 계층), L3(제 3 계층)로 구분될 수 있다. 이 중에서 제 1 계층에 속하는 물리 계층은 물리 채널(Physical Channel)을 이용한 정보전송서비스(Information Transfer Service)를 제공하며, 제 3 계층에 위치하는 RRC(Radio Resource Control) 계층은 단말과 네트워크 간에 무선 자원을 제어하는 역할을 수행한다. 이를 위해 RRC 계층은 단말과 기지국간 RRC 메시지를 교환한다.The layers of the Radio Interface Protocol between the terminal and the network can be divided into L1 (the first layer), L2 (the second layer), and L3 (the third layer) based on the three lower layers of the Open System Interconnection (OSI) standard model, which is widely known in communication systems. Among these, the physical layer belonging to the first layer provides an information transfer service using a physical channel, and the RRC (Radio Resource Control) layer located in the third layer controls radio resources between the terminal and the network. To this end, the RRC layer exchanges RRC messages between the terminal and the base station.

도 3은 NR 시스템의 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 3 shows the structure of the NR system.

도 3을 참조하면, NG-RAN은 단말에게 사용자 평면 및 제어 평면 프로토콜 종단(termination)을 제공하는 gNB 및/또는 eNB를 포함할 수 있다. 도 7에서는 gNB만을 포함하는 경우를 예시한다. gNB 및 eNB는 상호 간에 Xn 인터페이스로 연결되어 있다. gNB 및 eNB는 5세대 코어 네트워크(5G Core Network: 5GC)와 NG 인터페이스를 통해 연결되어 있다. 보다 구체적으로, AMF(access and mobility management function)과는 NG-C 인터페이스를 통해 연결되고, UPF(user plane function)과는 NG-U 인터페이스를 통해 연결된다. Referring to FIG. 3, the NG-RAN may include a gNB and/or an eNB that provides user plane and control plane protocol termination to the UE. FIG. 7 illustrates a case where only a gNB is included. The gNB and the eNB are connected to each other via an Xn interface. The gNB and the eNB are connected to a 5th generation core network (5G Core Network: 5GC) via an NG interface. More specifically, they are connected to an access and mobility management function (AMF) via an NG-C interface, and to a user plane function (UPF) via an NG-U interface.

도 4은 NR의 무선 프레임의 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 4 shows the structure of a radio frame of NR.

도 4을 참조하면, NR에서 상향링크 및 하향링크 전송에서 무선 프레임을 사용할 수 있다. 무선 프레임은 10ms의 길이를 가지며, 2개의 5ms 하프-프레임(Half-Frame, HF)으로 정의될 수 있다. 하프-프레임은 5개의 1ms 서브프레임(Subframe, SF)을 포함할 수 있다. 서브프레임은 하나 이상의 슬롯으로 분할될 수 있으며, 서브프레임 내 슬롯 개수는 부반송파 간격(Subcarrier Spacing, SCS)에 따라 결정될 수 있다. 각 슬롯은 CP(cyclic prefix)에 따라 12개 또는 14개의 OFDM(A) 심볼을 포함할 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 4, a radio frame can be used in uplink and downlink transmission in NR. A radio frame has a length of 10 ms and can be defined as two 5 ms half-frames (Half-Frames, HF). A half-frame can include five 1 ms subframes (Subframes, SF). A subframe can be divided into one or more slots, and the number of slots in a subframe can be determined according to the subcarrier spacing (SCS). Each slot can include 12 or 14 OFDM (A) symbols according to the cyclic prefix (CP).

노멀 CP(normal CP)가 사용되는 경우, 각 슬롯은 14개의 심볼을 포함할 수 있다. 확장 CP가 사용되는 경우, 각 슬롯은 12개의 심볼을 포함할 수 있다. 여기서, 심볼은 OFDM 심볼 (또는, CP-OFDM 심볼), SC-FDMA(Single Carrier - FDMA) 심볼 (또는, DFT-s-OFDM(Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM) 심볼)을 포함할 수 있다.When normal CP is used, each slot can include 14 symbols. When extended CP is used, each slot can include 12 symbols. Here, the symbols can include OFDM symbols (or CP-OFDM symbols), SC-FDMA (Single Carrier - FDMA) symbols (or DFT-s-OFDM (Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM) symbols).

다음 표 1은 노멀 CP가 사용되는 경우, SCS 설정(u)에 따라 슬롯 별 심볼의 개수((Nslot symb), 프레임 별 슬롯의 개수((Nframe,u slot)와 서브프레임 별 슬롯의 개수((Nsubframe,u slot)를 예시한다.Table 1 below illustrates the number of symbols per slot ((N slot symb ), the number of slots per frame ((N frame,u slot )) and the number of slots per subframe ((N subframe,u slot ) ) depending on the SCS setting (u) when normal CP is used.

SCS (15*2u)SCS (15*2 u ) Nslot symb N slot symb Nframe,u slot N frame,u slot Nsubframe,u slot N subframe,u slot 15KHz (u=0)15KHz (u=0) 1414 1010 11 30KHz (u=1)30KHz (u=1) 1414 2020 22 60KHz (u=2)60KHz (u=2) 1414 4040 44 120KHz (u=3)120KHz (u=3) 1414 8080 88 240KHz (u=4)240KHz (u=4) 1414 160160 1616

표 2는 확장 CP가 사용되는 경우, SCS에 따라 슬롯 별 심볼의 개수, 프레임 별 슬롯의 개수와 서브프레임 별 슬롯의 개수를 예시한다.Table 2 illustrates the number of symbols per slot, the number of slots per frame, and the number of slots per subframe according to SCS when extended CP is used.

SCS (15*2u)SCS (15*2 u ) Nslot symb N slot symb Nframe,u slot N frame,u slot Nsubframe,u slot N subframe,u slot 60KHz (u=2)60KHz (u=2) 1212 4040 44

NR 시스템에서는 하나의 단말에게 병합되는 복수의 셀들 간에 OFDM(A) 뉴머놀로지(numerology)(예, SCS, CP 길이 등)가 상이하게 설정될 수 있다. 이에 따라, 동일한 개수의 심볼로 구성된 시간 자원(예, 서브프레임, 슬롯 또는 TTI)(편의상, TU(Time Unit)로 통칭)의 (절대 시간) 구간이 병합된 셀들 간에 상이하게 설정될 수 있다. In an NR system, OFDM(A) numerology (e.g., SCS, CP length, etc.) may be set differently between multiple cells that are merged into one terminal. Accordingly, the (absolute time) section of a time resource (e.g., subframe, slot, or TTI) (conveniently referred to as TU (Time Unit)) consisting of the same number of symbols may be set differently between the merged cells.

NR에서, 다양한 5G 서비스들을 지원하기 위한 다수의 뉴머놀로지(numerology) 또는 SCS가 지원될 수 있다. 예를 들어, SCS가 15kHz인 경우, 전통적인 셀룰러 밴드들에서의 넓은 영역(wide area)이 지원될 수 있고, SCS가 30kHz/60kHz인 경우, 밀집한-도시(dense-urban), 더 낮은 지연(lower latency) 및 더 넓은 캐리어 대역폭(wider carrier bandwidth)이 지원될 수 있다. SCS가 60kHz 또는 그보다 높은 경우, 위상 잡음(phase noise)을 극복하기 위해 24.25GHz보다 큰 대역폭이 지원될 수 있다.In NR, multiple numerologies or SCS can be supported to support various 5G services. For example, when the SCS is 15 kHz, wide area in traditional cellular bands can be supported, and when the SCS is 30 kHz/60 kHz, dense-urban, lower latency and wider carrier bandwidth can be supported. When the SCS is 60 kHz or higher, a bandwidth greater than 24.25 GHz can be supported to overcome phase noise.

NR 주파수 밴드(frequency band)는 두 가지 타입의 주파수 범위(frequency range)로 정의될 수 있다. 상기 두 가지 타입의 주파수 범위는 FR1 및 FR2일 수 있다. 주파수 범위의 수치는 변경될 수 있으며, 예를 들어, 상기 두 가지 타입의 주파수 범위는 하기 표 3과 같을 수 있다. NR 시스템에서 사용되는 주파수 범위 중 FR1은 "sub 6GHz range"를 의미할 수 있고, FR2는 "above 6GHz range"를 의미할 수 있고 밀리미터 웨이브(millimeter wave, mmW)로 불릴 수 있다.The NR frequency band can be defined by two types of frequency ranges. The two types of frequency ranges can be FR1 and FR2. The numerical value of the frequency range can be changed, and for example, the two types of frequency ranges can be as shown in Table 3 below. Among the frequency ranges used in the NR system, FR1 can mean "sub 6GHz range", and FR2 can mean "above 6GHz range" and can be called millimeter wave (mmW).

Frequency Range designationFrequency Range designation Corresponding frequency rangeCorresponding frequency range Subcarrier Spacing (SCS)Subcarrier Spacing (SCS) FR1FR1 450MHz - 6000MHz450MHz - 6000MHz 15, 30, 60kHz15, 30, 60kHz FR2FR2 24250MHz - 52600MHz24250MHz - 52600MHz 60, 120, 240kHz60, 120, 240kHz

상술한 바와 같이, NR 시스템의 주파수 범위의 수치는 변경될 수 있다. 예를 들어, FR1은 하기 표 4와 같이 410MHz 내지 7125MHz의 대역을 포함할 수 있다. 즉, FR1은 6GHz (또는 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz 등) 이상의 주파수 대역을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, FR1 내에서 포함되는 6GHz (또는 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz 등) 이상의 주파수 대역은 비면허 대역(unlicensed band)을 포함할 수 있다. 비면허 대역은 다양한 용도로 사용될 수 있고, 예를 들어 차량을 위한 통신(예를 들어, 자율주행)을 위해 사용될 수 있다.As described above, the numerical value of the frequency range of the NR system can be changed. For example, FR1 can include a band of 410 MHz to 7125 MHz as shown in Table 4 below. That is, FR1 can include a frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher. For example, the frequency band of 6 GHz (or 5850, 5900, 5925 MHz, etc.) or higher included in FR1 can include an unlicensed band. The unlicensed band can be used for various purposes, for example, it can be used for communication for vehicles (e.g., autonomous driving).

Frequency Range designationFrequency Range designation Corresponding frequency rangeCorresponding frequency range Subcarrier Spacing (SCS)Subcarrier Spacing (SCS) FR1FR1 410MHz - 7125MHz410MHz - 7125MHz 15, 30, 60kHz15, 30, 60kHz FR2FR2 24250MHz - 52600MHz24250MHz - 52600MHz 60, 120, 240kHz60, 120, 240kHz

도 5은 NR 프레임의 슬롯 구조를 나타낸다.Figure 5 shows the slot structure of an NR frame.

도 5을 참조하면, 슬롯은 시간 영역에서 복수의 심볼들을 포함한다. 예를 들어, 노멀 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 14개의 심볼을 포함하나, 확장 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 12개의 심볼을 포함할 수 있다. 또는 노멀 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 7개의 심볼을 포함하나, 확장 CP의 경우 하나의 슬롯이 6개의 심볼을 포함할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 5, a slot includes multiple symbols in the time domain. For example, in the case of a normal CP, one slot may include 14 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot may include 12 symbols. Or, in the case of a normal CP, one slot may include 7 symbols, but in the case of an extended CP, one slot may include 6 symbols.

반송파는 주파수 영역에서 복수의 부반송파들을 포함한다. RB(Resource Block)는 주파수 영역에서 복수(예를 들어, 12)의 연속한 부반송파로 정의될 수 있다. BWP(Bandwidth Part)는 주파수 영역에서 복수의 연속한 (P)RB((Physical) Resource Block)로 정의될 수 있으며, 하나의 뉴머놀로지(numerology)(예, SCS, CP 길이 등)에 대응될 수 있다. 반송파는 최대 N개(예를 들어, 5개)의 BWP를 포함할 수 있다. 데이터 통신은 활성화된 BWP를 통해서 수행될 수 있다. 각각의 요소는 자원 그리드에서 자원요소(Resource Element, RE)로 지칭될 수 있고, 하나의 복소 심볼이 맵핑될 수 있다.A carrier includes a plurality of subcarriers in the frequency domain. An RB (Resource Block) can be defined as a plurality (for example, 12) of consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain. A BWP (Bandwidth Part) can be defined as a plurality of consecutive (P)RBs ((Physical) Resource Blocks) in the frequency domain and can correspond to one numerology (for example, SCS, CP length, etc.). A carrier can include at most N (for example, 5) BWPs. Data communication can be performed through activated BWPs. Each element can be referred to as a Resource Element (RE) in the resource grid, and one complex symbol can be mapped.

한편, 단말과 단말 간 무선 인터페이스 또는 단말과 네트워크 간 무선 인터페이스는 L1 계층, L2 계층 및 L3 계층으로 구성될 수 있다. 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예에서, L1 계층은 물리(physical) 계층을 의미할 수 있다. 또한, 예를 들어, L2 계층은 MAC 계층, RLC 계층, PDCP 계층 및 SDAP 계층 중 적어도 하나를 의미할 수 있다. 또한, 예를 들어, L3 계층은 RRC 계층을 의미할 수 있다.Meanwhile, the wireless interface between terminals or between terminals and a network may be composed of an L1 layer, an L2 layer, and an L3 layer. In various embodiments of the present disclosure, the L1 layer may mean a physical layer. In addition, for example, the L2 layer may mean at least one of a MAC layer, an RLC layer, a PDCP layer, and an SDAP layer. In addition, for example, the L3 layer may mean an RRC layer.

도 6은 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, 6G 시스템에서 제공 가능한 통신 구조를 나타낸다. 도 6의 실시 예는 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예와 결합될 수 있다.FIG. 6 illustrates a communication structure that can be provided in a 6G system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The embodiment of FIG. 6 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

6G에서 새로운 네트워크 특성들은 다음과 같을 수 있다.New network characteristics in 6G could include:

- 위성 통합 네트워크(satellites integrated network)- Satellite integrated network

- 연결된 인텔리전스(connected intelligence): 이전 세대의 무선 통신 시스템과 달리 6G는 혁신적이며, "연결된 사물"에서 "연결된 지능"으로 무선 진화가 업데이트될 것이다. AI는 통신 절차의 각 단계(또는 후술할 신호 처리의 각 절차)에서 적용될 수 있다.- Connected intelligence: Unlike previous generations of wireless communication systems, 6G is revolutionary and will update the wireless evolution from “connected things” to “connected intelligence.” AI can be applied at each stage of the communication process (or at each stage of signal processing, as described below).

- 무선 정보 및 에너지 전달의 완벽한 통합(seamless integration wireless information and energy transfer)- Seamless integration of wireless information and energy transfer

- 유비쿼터스 슈퍼 3D 연결(ubiquitous super 3D connectivity): 드론 및 매우 낮은 지구 궤도 위성의 네트워크 및 핵심 네트워크 기능에 접속은 6G 유비쿼터스에서 슈퍼 3D 연결을 만들 것이다.- Ubiquitous super 3D connectivity: Access to networks and core network functions of drones and very low Earth orbit satellites will create ubiquitous super 3D connectivity in 6G.

위와 같은 6G의 새로운 네트워크 특성들에서 몇 가지 일반적인 요구 사항은 다음과 같을 수 있다.Some general requirements from the new network characteristics of 6G as mentioned above can be as follows:

- 스몰 셀 네트워크(small cell networks)- small cell networks

- 초 고밀도 이기종 네트워크(ultra-dense heterogeneous network)- Ultra-dense heterogeneous network

- 대용량 백홀(high-capacity backhaul)- High-capacity backhaul

- 모바일 기술과 통합된 레이더 기술: 통신을 통한 고정밀 지역화 (또는 위치 기반 서비스)는 6G 무선통신 시스템의 기능 중 하나이다. 따라서, 레이더 시스템은 6G 네트워크와 통합될 것이다.- Radar technology integrated with mobile technology: High-precision localization (or location-based services) through communications is one of the functions of 6G wireless communication systems. Therefore, radar systems will be integrated with 6G networks.

- 소프트화 및 가상화(softwarization and virtualization)- Softwarization and virtualization

이하, 6G 시스템의 핵심 구현 기술에 대하여 설명한다.Below, the core implementation technologies of the 6G system are described.

- 인공 지능(artificial intelligence): 통신에 AI를 도입하면 실시간 데이터 전송이 간소화되고 향상될 수 있다. AI는 수많은 분석을 사용하여 복잡한 대상 작업이 수행되는 방식을 결정할 수 있다. 즉, AI는 효율성을 높이고 처리 지연을 줄일 수 있다. 핸드 오버, 네트워크 선택, 자원 스케쥴링과 같은 시간 소모적인 작업은 AI를 사용함으로써 즉시 수행될 수 있다. AI는 M2M, 기계-대-인간 및 인간-대-기계 통신에서도 중요한 역할을 할 수 있다. 또한, AI는 BCI(Brain Computer Interface)에서 신속한 통신이 될 수 있다. AI 기반 통신 시스템은 메타 물질, 지능형 구조, 지능형 네트워크, 지능형 장치, 지능형 인지 라디오(radio), 자체 유지 무선 네트워크 및 머신 러닝에 의해 지원될 수 있다.- Artificial Intelligence: Introducing AI into communications can simplify and improve real-time data transmission. AI can use a lot of analytics to determine how complex target tasks are performed. In other words, AI can increase efficiency and reduce processing delays. Time-consuming tasks such as handover, network selection, and resource scheduling can be performed instantly using AI. AI can also play a significant role in M2M, machine-to-human, and human-to-machine communications. AI can also be a rapid communication in Brain Computer Interface (BCI). AI-based communication systems can be supported by metamaterials, intelligent structures, intelligent networks, intelligent devices, intelligent cognitive radios, self-sustaining wireless networks, and machine learning.

- THz 통신(terahertz communication): 데이터 전송률은 대역폭을 늘려 높일 수 있다. 이것은 넓은 대역폭으로 sub-THz 통신을 사용하고, 진보된 대규모 MIMO 기술을 적용하여 수행될 수 있다. 밀리미터 이하의 방사선으로도 알려진 THz파는 일반적으로 0.03mm-3mm 범위의 해당 파장을 가진 0.1THz와 10THz 사이의 주파수 대역을 나타낸다. 100GHz-300GHz 대역 범위(Sub THz 대역)는 셀룰러 통신을 위한 THz 대역의 주요 부분으로 간주된다. Sub-THz 대역을 mmWave 대역에 추가하면 6G 셀룰러 통신 용량은 늘어난다. 정의된 THz 대역 중 300GHz-3THz는 원적외선 (IR) 주파수 대역에 있다. 300GHz-3THz 대역은 광 대역의 일부이지만 광 대역의 경계에 있으며, RF 대역 바로 뒤에 있다. 따라서, 이 300 GHz-3 THz 대역은 RF와 유사성을 나타낸다. - THz communication (terahertz communication): The data rate can be increased by increasing the bandwidth. This can be done by using sub-THz communication with wide bandwidth and applying advanced massive MIMO technology. THz waves, also known as sub-millimeter waves, generally refer to the frequency band between 0.1 THz and 10 THz with corresponding wavelengths ranging from 0.03 mm to 3 mm. The 100 GHz–300 GHz band range (Sub THz band) is considered to be the main part of the THz band for cellular communications. Adding the Sub THz band to the mmWave band will increase the capacity of 6G cellular communications. Of the defined THz bands, 300 GHz–3 THz is in the far infrared (IR) frequency band. The 300 GHz–3 THz band is part of the optical band but is at the boundary of the optical band, just behind the RF band. Therefore, this 300 GHz–3 THz band shows similarities with RF.

도 7는 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, 전자기 스펙트럼을 나타낸다. 도 7의 실시 예는 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예와 결합될 수 있다. THz 통신의 주요 특성은 (i) 매우 높은 데이터 전송률을 지원하기 위해 광범위하게 사용 가능한 대역폭, (ii) 고주파에서 발생하는 높은 경로 손실 (고 지향성 안테나는 필수 불가결)을 포함한다. 높은 지향성 안테나에서 생성된 좁은 빔 폭은 간섭을 줄인다. THz 신호의 작은 파장은 훨씬 더 많은 수의 안테나 소자가 이 대역에서 동작하는 장치 및 BS에 통합될 수 있게 한다. 이를 통해 범위 제한을 극복할 수 있는 고급 적응형 배열 기술을 사용할 수 있다.FIG. 7 illustrates an electromagnetic spectrum according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The embodiment of FIG. 7 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure. Key characteristics of THz communications include (i) widely available bandwidth to support very high data rates, and (ii) high path loss at high frequencies (highly directional antennas are indispensable). The narrow beam width generated by the highly directional antenna reduces interference. The small wavelength of THz signals allows a much larger number of antenna elements to be integrated into devices and BSs operating in this band. This enables the use of advanced adaptive array techniques to overcome range limitations.

- 대규모 MIMO 기술(large-scale MIMO)- Large-scale MIMO technology

- 홀로그램 빔 포밍(hologram beamforming, HBF)- Hologram beamforming (HBF)

- 광 무선 기술(optical wireless technology)- Optical wireless technology

- 자유공간 광전송 백홀 네트워크(FSO backhaul network)- Free space optical transmission backhaul network (FSO backhaul network)

- 양자 통신(quantum communication)- Quantum communication

- 셀-프리 통신(cell-free communication)- Cell-free communication

- 무선 정보 및 에너지 전송 통합(integration of wireless information and power transmission)- Integration of wireless information and power transmission

- 센싱과 커뮤니케이션의 통합(integration of wireless communication and sensing)- Integration of wireless communication and sensing

- 액세스 백홀 네트워크의 통합(integrated access and backhaul network)- Integrated access and backhaul network

- 빅 데이터 분석(big data analysis)- Big data analysis

- 재구성 가능한 지능형 메타표면(reconfigurable intelligent surface)- Reconfigurable intelligent surface

- 메타버스(metaverse)- Metaverse

- 블록 체인(block-chain)- Block-chain

- 무인 항공기(unmanned aerial vehicle, UAV): UAV 또는 드론은 6G 무선 통신에서 중요한 요소가 될 것이다. 대부분의 경우, UAV 기술을 사용하여 고속 데이터 무선 연결이 제공될 수 있다. BS(base station) 엔티티는 셀룰러 연결을 제공하기 위해 UAV에 설치될 수 있다. UAV는 쉬운 배치, 강력한 가시선 링크 및 이동성이 제어되는 자유도와 같은 고정 BS 인프라에서 볼 수 없는 특정 기능을 가지고 있을 수 있다. 천재 지변 등의 긴급 상황 동안, 지상 통신 인프라의 배치는 경제적으로 실현 가능하지 않으며, 때로는 휘발성 환경에서 서비스를 제공할 수 없다. UAV는 이러한 상황을 쉽게 처리할 수 있다. UAV는 무선 통신 분야의 새로운 패러다임이 될 것이다. 이 기술은 eMBB, URLLC 및 mMTC 인 무선 네트워크의 세 가지 기본 요구 사항을 용이하게 한다. UAV는 또한, 네트워크 연결성 향상, 화재 감지, 재난 응급 서비스, 보안 및 감시, 오염 모니터링, 주차 모니터링, 사고 모니터링 등과 같은 여러 가지 목적을 지원할 수 있다. 따라서, UAV 기술은 6G 통신에 가장 중요한 기술 중 하나로 인식되고 있다.- Unmanned aerial vehicles (UAV): UAVs or drones will be a crucial element in 6G wireless communications. In most cases, high-speed data wireless connectivity can be provided using UAV technology. The base station (BS) entity can be installed on the UAV to provide cellular connectivity. UAVs may have certain features not found in fixed BS infrastructure such as easy deployment, robust line-of-sight links, and freedom of movement with controlled mobility. During emergency situations such as natural disasters, deployment of terrestrial communication infrastructure is not economically feasible and sometimes cannot provide services in volatile environments. UAVs can easily handle such situations. UAVs will be a new paradigm in wireless communications. This technology facilitates three basic requirements of wireless networks namely eMBB, URLLC, and mMTC. UAVs can also support several purposes such as enhancing network connectivity, fire detection, disaster emergency services, security and surveillance, pollution monitoring, parking monitoring, and accident monitoring. Therefore, UAV technology is recognized as one of the most important technologies for 6G communications.

- 자율주행(autonomous driving, self-driving): 자율 주행 인프라 구축의 핵심 요소인 V2X(vehicle to everything)는 차량과 차량 간 무선 통신(vehicle to vehicle, V2V), 차량과 인프라 간 무선 통신(vehicle to infrastructure, V2I) 등 자동차가 자율 주행을 하기 위해 도로에 있는 다양한 요소와 소통하고 공유하는 기술일 수 있다. 자율 주행의 성능을 극대화하고 높은 안전성을 확보하기 위해서는 빠른 전송속도와 저지연 기술이 반드시 필요하다. 더하여, 앞으로 자율주행은 운전자에게 경고나 안내 메시지를 전달하는 수준을 넘어 적극적으로 차량 운행에 개입하고 위험 상황에서 직접 차량을 제어해야 할 수 있다. 이를 위해서, 송수신해야 할 정보의 양이 방대해질 수 있으므로, 6G에서는 5G보다 빠른 전송 속도와 저지연으로 자율주행을 극대화할 수 있을 것으로 예상된다.- Autonomous driving (self-driving): V2X (vehicle to everything), a key element of building autonomous driving infrastructure, can be a technology that allows cars to communicate and share with various elements on the road for autonomous driving, such as vehicle to vehicle (V2V) wireless communication and vehicle to infrastructure (V2I) wireless communication. In order to maximize the performance of autonomous driving and ensure high safety, fast transmission speed and low-latency technology are essential. In addition, in the future, autonomous driving may need to go beyond the level of delivering warnings or guidance messages to drivers and actively intervene in vehicle operation and directly control the vehicle in dangerous situations. To this end, the amount of information that needs to be transmitted and received may become enormous, so 6G is expected to maximize autonomous driving with faster transmission speeds and lower latency than 5G.

도 8는 SL 통신을 위한 무선 프로토콜 구조(radio protocol architecture)를 나타낸다. 구체적으로, 도 8의 (a)는 NR의 사용자 평면 프로토콜 스택을 나타내고, 도 8의 (b)는 NR의 제어 평면 프로토콜 스택을 나타낸다.Fig. 8 shows a radio protocol architecture for SL communication. Specifically, Fig. 8 (a) shows a user plane protocol stack of NR, and Fig. 8 (b) shows a control plane protocol stack of NR.

이하, SL 동기 신호(Sidelink Synchronization Signal, SLSS) 및 동기화 정보에 대해 설명한다.Below, the SL synchronization signal (Sidelink Synchronization Signal, SLSS) and synchronization information are described.

SLSS는 SL 특정적인 시퀀스(sequence)로, PSSS(Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal)와 SSSS(Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal)를 포함할 수 있다. 상기 PSSS는 S-PSS(Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal)라고 칭할 수 있고, 상기 SSSS는 S-SSS(Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal)라고 칭할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 길이-127 M-시퀀스(length-127 M-sequences)가 S-PSS에 대하여 사용될 수 있고, 길이-127 골드-시퀀스(length-127 Gold sequences)가 S-SSS에 대하여 사용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 S-PSS를 이용하여 최초 신호를 검출(signal detection)할 수 있고, 동기를 획득할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 S-PSS 및 S-SSS를 이용하여 세부 동기를 획득할 수 있고, 동기 신호 ID를 검출할 수 있다.SLSS is an SL-specific sequence and may include a Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal (PSSS) and a Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal (SSSS). The PSSS may be referred to as a Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal (S-PSS), and the SSSS may be referred to as a Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal (S-SSS). For example, length-127 M-sequences may be used for the S-PSS, and length-127 Gold sequences may be used for the S-SSS. For example, a terminal may detect an initial signal (signal detection) and acquire synchronization using the S-PSS. For example, the terminal may acquire detailed synchronization and detect a synchronization signal ID using the S-PSS and the S-SSS.

PSBCH(Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel)는 SL 신호 송수신 전에 단말이 가장 먼저 알아야 하는 기본이 되는 (시스템) 정보가 전송되는 (방송) 채널일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 기본이 되는 정보는 SLSS에 관련된 정보, 듀플렉스 모드(Duplex Mode, DM), TDD UL/DL(Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) 구성, 리소스 풀 관련 정보, SLSS에 관련된 어플리케이션의 종류, 서브프레임 오프셋, 방송 정보 등일 수 있다. 예를 들어, PSBCH 성능의 평가를 위해, NR V2X에서, PSBCH의 페이로드 크기는 24 비트의 CRC를 포함하여 56 비트일 수 있다.PSBCH (Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel) may be a (broadcast) channel through which basic (system) information that a terminal must know first before transmitting and receiving an SL signal is transmitted. For example, the basic information may be information related to SLSS, duplex mode (DM), TDD UL/DL (Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) configuration, resource pool related information, type of application related to SLSS, subframe offset, broadcast information, etc. For example, in order to evaluate PSBCH performance, in NR V2X, the payload size of PSBCH may be 56 bits including a 24-bit CRC.

S-PSS, S-SSS 및 PSBCH는 주기적 전송을 지원하는 블록 포맷(예를 들어, SL SS(Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH 블록, 이하 S-SSB(Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block))에 포함될 수 있다. 상기 S-SSB는 캐리어 내의 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH(Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)와 동일한 뉴머놀로지(즉, SCS 및 CP 길이)를 가질 수 있고, 전송 대역폭은 (미리) 설정된 SL BWP(Sidelink BWP) 내에 있을 수 있다. 예를 들어, S-SSB의 대역폭은 11 RB(Resource Block)일 수 있다. 예를 들어, PSBCH는 11 RB에 걸쳐있을 수 있다. 그리고, S-SSB의 주파수 위치는 (미리) 설정될 수 있다. 따라서, 단말은 캐리어에서 S-SSB를 발견하기 위해 주파수에서 가설 검출(hypothesis detection)을 수행할 필요가 없다. S-PSS, S-SSS and PSBCH may be included in a block format supporting periodic transmission (e.g., SL SS (Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH block, hereinafter referred to as S-SSB (Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block)). The S-SSB may have the same numerology (i.e., SCS and CP length) as the PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) in a carrier, and a transmission bandwidth may be within a (pre-)configured SL BWP (Sidelink BWP). For example, the bandwidth of the S-SSB may be 11 RB (Resource Block). For example, the PSBCH may span 11 RBs. And, the frequency location of the S-SSB may be (pre-)configured. Therefore, the terminal does not need to perform hypothesis detection in frequency to discover the S-SSB in the carrier.

한편, NR SL 시스템에서, 서로 다른 SCS 및/또는 CP 길이를 가지는 복수의 뉴머놀로지가 지원될 수 있다. 이 때, SCS가 증가함에 따라서, 전송 단말이 S-SSB를 전송하는 시간 자원의 길이가 짧아질 수 있다. 이에 따라, S-SSB의 커버리지(coverage)가 감소할 수 있다. 따라서, S-SSB의 커버리지를 보장하기 위하여, 전송 단말은 SCS에 따라 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 하나 이상의 S-SSB를 수신 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 전송 단말이 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 전송하는 S-SSB의 개수는 전송 단말에게 사전에 설정되거나(pre-configured), 설정(configured)될 수 있다. 예를 들어, S-SSB 전송 주기는 160ms 일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 모든 SCS에 대하여, 160ms의 S-SSB 전송 주기가 지원될 수 있다. Meanwhile, in the NR SL system, multiple numerologies having different SCS and/or CP lengths may be supported. In this case, as the SCS increases, the length of the time resource for a transmitting terminal to transmit an S-SSB may become shorter. Accordingly, the coverage of the S-SSB may decrease. Therefore, in order to ensure the coverage of the S-SSB, the transmitting terminal may transmit one or more S-SSBs to a receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period according to the SCS. For example, the number of S-SSBs that the transmitting terminal transmits to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period may be pre-configured or configured for the transmitting terminal. For example, the S-SSB transmission period may be 160 ms. For example, an S-SSB transmission period of 160 ms may be supported for all SCSs.

예를 들어, SCS가 FR1에서 15kHz인 경우, 전송 단말은 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 1개 또는 2개의 S-SSB를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, SCS가 FR1에서 30kHz인 경우, 전송 단말은 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 1개 또는 2개의 S-SSB를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, SCS가 FR1에서 60kHz인 경우, 전송 단말은 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 1개, 2개 또는 4개의 S-SSB를 전송할 수 있다.For example, when the SCS is 15 kHz at FR1, the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period. For example, when the SCS is 30 kHz at FR1, the transmitting terminal can transmit one or two S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period. For example, when the SCS is 60 kHz at FR1, the transmitting terminal can transmit one, two, or four S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.

예를 들어, SCS가 FR2에서 60kHz인 경우, 전송 단말은 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 1개, 2개, 4개, 8개, 16개 또는 32개의 S-SSB를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, SCS가 FR2에서 120kHz인 경우, 전송 단말은 하나의 S-SSB 전송 주기 내에서 수신 단말에게 1개, 2개, 4개, 8개, 16개, 32개 또는 64개의 S-SSB를 전송할 수 있다.For example, when the SCS is 60 kHz at FR2, the transmitting terminal can transmit 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period. For example, when the SCS is 120 kHz at FR2, the transmitting terminal can transmit 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 S-SSBs to the receiving terminal within one S-SSB transmission period.

한편, SCS가 60kHz인 경우, 두 가지 타입의 CP가 지원될 수 있다. 또한, CP 타입에 따라서 전송 단말이 수신 단말에게 전송하는 S-SSB의 구조가 상이할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 CP 타입은 Normal CP(NCP) 또는 Extended CP(ECP)일 수 있다. 구체적으로, 예를 들어, CP 타입이 NCP인 경우, 전송 단말이 전송하는 S-SSB 내에서 PSBCH를 맵핑하는 심볼의 개수는 9 개 또는 8 개일 수 있다. 반면, 예를 들어, CP 타입이 ECP인 경우, 전송 단말이 전송하는 S-SSB 내에서 PSBCH를 맵핑하는 심볼의 개수는 7 개 또는 6 개일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 전송 단말이 전송하는 S-SSB 내의 첫 번째 심볼에는, PSBCH가 맵핑될 수 있다. 예를 들어, S-SSB를 수신하는 수신 단말은 S-SSB의 첫 번째 심볼 구간에서 AGC(Automatic Gain Control) 동작을 수행할 수 있다.Meanwhile, when SCS is 60 kHz, two types of CP can be supported. In addition, the structure of the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal to the receiving terminal may be different depending on the CP type. For example, the CP type may be Normal CP (NCP) or Extended CP (ECP). Specifically, for example, when the CP type is NCP, the number of symbols to which the PSBCH is mapped in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal may be 9 or 8. On the other hand, for example, when the CP type is ECP, the number of symbols to which the PSBCH is mapped in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal may be 7 or 6. For example, the PSBCH may be mapped to the first symbol in the S-SSB transmitted by the transmitting terminal. For example, the receiving terminal receiving the S-SSB may perform an AGC (Automatic Gain Control) operation in the first symbol section of the S-SSB.

도 9는 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 수행하는 단말을 나타낸다.Figure 9 shows a terminal performing V2X or SL communication.

도 9를 참조하면, V2X 또는 SL 통신에서 단말이라는 용어는 주로 사용자의 단말을 의미할 수 있다. 하지만, 기지국과 같은 네트워크 장비가 단말 사이의 통신 방식에 따라 신호를 송수신하는 경우, 기지국 또한 일종의 단말로 간주될 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 단말 1은 제 1 장치(100)일 수 있고, 단말 2 는 제 2 장치(200)일 수 있다. Referring to Fig. 9, the term terminal in V2X or SL communication may mainly mean a user's terminal. However, if a network device such as a base station transmits and receives a signal according to a communication method between terminals, the base station may also be considered a type of terminal. For example, terminal 1 may be a first device (100), and terminal 2 may be a second device (200).

예를 들어, 단말 1은 일련의 자원의 집합을 의미하는 리소스 풀(resource pool) 내에서 특정한 자원에 해당하는 자원 단위(resource unit)를 선택할 수 있다. 그리고, 단말 1은 상기 자원 단위를 사용하여 SL 신호를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 수신 단말인 단말 2는 단말 1이 신호를 전송할 수 있는 리소스 풀을 설정 받을 수 있고, 상기 리소스 풀 내에서 단말 1의 신호를 검출할 수 있다.For example, terminal 1 can select a resource unit corresponding to a specific resource within a resource pool, which means a set of a series of resources. Then, terminal 1 can transmit an SL signal using the resource unit. For example, terminal 2, which is a receiving terminal, can be configured with a resource pool in which terminal 1 can transmit a signal, and can detect a signal of terminal 1 within the resource pool.

여기서, 단말 1이 기지국의 연결 범위 내에 있는 경우, 기지국이 리소스 풀을 단말 1에게 알려줄 수 있다. 반면, 단말 1이 기지국의 연결 범위 밖에 있는 경우, 다른 단말이 단말 1에게 리소스 풀을 알려주거나, 또는 단말 1은 사전에 설정된 리소스 풀을 사용할 수 있다.Here, if terminal 1 is within the connection range of the base station, the base station can inform terminal 1 of the resource pool. On the other hand, if terminal 1 is outside the connection range of the base station, another terminal can inform terminal 1 of the resource pool, or terminal 1 can use a pre-configured resource pool.

일반적으로 리소스 풀은 복수의 자원 단위로 구성될 수 있고, 각 단말은 하나 또는 복수의 자원 단위를 선택하여 자신의 SL 신호 전송에 사용할 수 있다.In general, a resource pool can be composed of multiple resource units, and each terminal can select one or multiple resource units to use for its SL signal transmission.

도 10는 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 위한 자원 단위를 나타낸다.Figure 10 shows resource units for V2X or SL communication.

도 10를 참조하면, 리소스 풀의 전체 주파수 자원이 NF개로 분할될 수 있고, 리소스 풀의 전체 시간 자원이 NT개로 분할될 수 있다. 따라서, 총 NF * NT 개의 자원 단위가 리소스 풀 내에서 정의될 수 있다. 도 13는 해당 리소스 풀이 NT 개의 서브프레임의 주기로 반복되는 경우의 예를 나타낸다.Referring to Fig. 10, the entire frequency resources of the resource pool can be divided into NF units, and the entire time resources of the resource pool can be divided into NT units. Accordingly, a total of NF * NT resource units can be defined within the resource pool. Fig. 13 shows an example in which the resource pool repeats with a period of NT subframes.

도 10에 나타난 바와 같이, 하나의 자원 단위(예를 들어, Unit #0)는 주기적으로 반복하여 나타날 수 있다. 또는, 시간 또는 주파수 차원에서의 다이버시티(diversity) 효과를 얻기 위해서, 하나의 논리적인 자원 단위가 맵핑되는 물리적 자원 단위의 인덱스가 시간에 따라 사전에 정해진 패턴으로 변화할 수도 있다. 이러한 자원 단위의 구조에 있어서, 리소스 풀이란 SL 신호를 전송하고자 하는 단말이 전송에 사용할 수 있는 자원 단위들의 집합을 의미할 수 있다. As shown in Fig. 10, one resource unit (e.g., Unit #0) may appear repeatedly periodically. Or, in order to obtain a diversity effect in the time or frequency dimension, the index of the physical resource unit to which one logical resource unit is mapped may change in a pre-determined pattern over time. In the structure of such resource units, a resource pool may mean a set of resource units that a terminal that wishes to transmit an SL signal can use for transmission.

리소스 풀은 여러 종류로 세분화될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 각 리소스 풀에서 전송되는 SL 신호의 컨텐츠(content)에 따라, 리소스 풀은 아래와 같이 구분될 수 있다. Resource pools can be subdivided into several types. For example, depending on the content of the SL signal transmitted from each resource pool, resource pools can be divided as follows.

(1) 스케쥴링 할당(Scheduling Assignment, SA)은 전송 단말이 SL 데이터 채널의 전송으로 사용하는 자원의 위치, 그 외 데이터 채널의 복조를 위해서 필요한 MCS(Modulation and Coding Scheme) 또는 MIMO(Multiple Input Multiple Output) 전송 방식, TA(Timing Advance)등의 정보를 포함하는 신호일 수 있다. SA는 동일 자원 단위 상에서 SL 데이터와 함께 멀티플렉싱되어 전송되는 것도 가능하며, 이 경우 SA 리소스 풀이란 SA가 SL 데이터와 멀티플렉싱되어 전송되는 리소스 풀을 의미할 수 있다. SA는 SL 제어 채널(control channel)로 불릴 수도 있다. (1) Scheduling Assignment (SA) may be a signal that includes information such as the location of resources used by a transmitting terminal for transmission of an SL data channel, MCS (Modulation and Coding Scheme) or MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) transmission method required for demodulation of other data channels, and TA (Timing Advance). SA may also be transmitted multiplexed with SL data on the same resource unit, and in this case, the SA resource pool may mean a resource pool in which SA is multiplexed with SL data and transmitted. SA may also be called an SL control channel.

(2) SL 데이터 채널(Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH)은 전송 단말이 사용자 데이터를 전송하는데 사용하는 리소스 풀일 수 있다. 만약 동일 자원 단위 상에서 SL 데이터와 함께 SA가 멀티플렉싱되어 전송되는 경우, SA 정보를 제외한 형태의 SL 데이터 채널만이 SL 데이터 채널을 위한 리소스 풀에서 전송될 수 있다. 다시 말해, SA 리소스 풀 내의 개별 자원 단위 상에서 SA 정보를 전송하는데 사용되었던 REs(Resource Elements)는 SL 데이터 채널의 리소스 풀에서 여전히 SL 데이터를 전송하기 위해 사용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 전송 단말은 연속적인 PRB에 PSSCH를 맵핑시켜서 전송할 수 있다.(2) SL data channel (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel, PSSCH) may be a resource pool used by a transmitting terminal to transmit user data. If SA is multiplexed and transmitted together with SL data on the same resource unit, only SL data channels excluding SA information may be transmitted in the resource pool for the SL data channel. In other words, REs (Resource Elements) used to transmit SA information on individual resource units within the SA resource pool may still be used to transmit SL data in the resource pool of the SL data channel. For example, a transmitting terminal may transmit PSSCH by mapping it to consecutive PRBs.

(3) 디스커버리 채널은 전송 단말이 자신의 ID 등의 정보를 전송하기 위한 리소스 풀일 수 있다. 이를 통해, 전송 단말은 인접 단말이 자신을 발견하도록 할 수 있다.(3) The discovery channel may be a resource pool for transmitting terminals to transmit information such as their IDs. Through this, the transmitting terminals can enable adjacent terminals to discover themselves.

이상에서 설명한 SL 신호의 컨텐츠가 동일한 경우에도, SL 신호의 송수신 속성에 따라서 상이한 리소스 풀을 사용할 수 있다. 일 예로, 동일한 SL 데이터 채널이나 디스커버리 메시지라 하더라도, SL 신호의 전송 타이밍 결정 방식(예를 들어, 동기 기준 신호의 수신 시점에서 전송되는지 아니면 상기 수신 시점에서 일정한 타이밍 어드밴스를 적용하여 전송되는지), 자원 할당 방식(예를 들어, 개별 신호의 전송 자원을 기지국이 개별 전송 단말에게 지정해주는지 아니면 개별 전송 단말이 리소스 풀 내에서 자체적으로 개별 신호 전송 자원을 선택하는지), 신호 포맷(예를 들어, 각 SL 신호가 한 서브프레임에서 차지하는 심볼의 개수, 또는 하나의 SL 신호의 전송에 사용되는 서브프레임의 개수), 기지국으로부터의 신호 세기, SL 단말의 송신 전력 세기 등에 따라서 다시 상이한 리소스 풀로 구분될 수도 있다.Even when the content of the SL signal described above is the same, different resource pools may be used depending on the transmission/reception properties of the SL signal. For example, even when it is the same SL data channel or discovery message, it may be again divided into different resource pools depending on the transmission timing determination method of the SL signal (for example, whether it is transmitted at the time of reception of a synchronization reference signal or whether it is transmitted by applying a certain timing advance at the time of reception), the resource allocation method (for example, whether the base station designates transmission resources of individual signals to individual transmitting terminals or whether individual transmitting terminals select individual signal transmission resources on their own within the resource pool), the signal format (for example, the number of symbols that each SL signal occupies in one subframe or the number of subframes used for transmission of one SL signal), the signal strength from the base station, the transmission power strength of the SL terminal, etc.

도 11은 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따른, BWP의 일 예를 나타낸다. 도 11의 실시 예는 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예와 결합될 수 있다. 도 11의 실시 예에서, BWP는 세 개라고 가정한다.FIG. 11 illustrates an example of a BWP according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The embodiment of FIG. 11 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure. In the embodiment of FIG. 11, it is assumed that there are three BWPs.

도 11을 참조하면, CRB(common resource block)는 캐리어 밴드의 한 쪽 끝에서부터 다른 쪽 끝까지 번호가 매겨진 캐리어 자원 블록일 수 있다. 그리고, PRB는 각 BWP 내에서 번호가 매겨진 자원 블록일 수 있다. 포인트 A는 자원 블록 그리드(resource block grid)에 대한 공통 참조 포인트(common reference point)를 지시할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 11, a common resource block (CRB) may be a carrier resource block numbered from one end of a carrier band to the other end. And, a PRB may be a numbered resource block within each BWP. Point A may indicate a common reference point for a resource block grid.

BWP는 포인트 A, 포인트 A로부터의 오프셋(NstartBWP) 및 대역폭(NsizeBWP)에 의해 설정될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 포인트 A는 모든 뉴머놀로지(예를 들어, 해당 캐리어에서 네트워크에 의해 지원되는 모든 뉴머놀로지)의 서브캐리어 0이 정렬되는 캐리어의 PRB의 외부 참조 포인트일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 오프셋은 주어진 뉴머놀로지에서 가장 낮은 서브캐리어와 포인트 A 사이의 PRB 간격일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 대역폭은 주어진 뉴머놀로지에서 PRB의 개수일 수 있다.The BWP can be set by a point A, an offset from point A (NstartBWP) and a bandwidth (NsizeBWP). For example, point A can be an outer reference point of PRBs of a carrier where subcarrier 0 of all nucleos (e.g., all nucleosides supported by the network on that carrier) is aligned. For example, the offset can be the PRB spacing between the lowest subcarrier in a given nucleometry and point A. For example, the bandwidth can be the number of PRBs in a given nucleometry.

SLSS(Sidelink Synchronization Signal)는 SL(sidelink) 특정적인 시퀀스(sequence)로, PSSS(Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal)와 SSSS(Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal)를 포함할 수 있다. 상기 PSSS는 S-PSS(Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal)라고 칭할 수 있고, 상기 SSSS는 S-SSS(Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal)라고 칭할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 길이-127 M-시퀀스(length-127 M-sequences)가 S-PSS에 대하여 사용될 수 있고, 길이-127 골드-시퀀스(length-127 Gold sequences)가 S-SSS에 대하여 사용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 S-PSS를 이용하여 최초 신호를 검출(signal detection)할 수 있고, 동기를 획득할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 S-PSS 및 S-SSS를 이용하여 세부 동기를 획득할 수 있고, 동기 신호 ID를 검출할 수 있다.SLSS (Sidelink Synchronization Signal) is a SL (sidelink) specific sequence and may include PSSS (Primary Sidelink Synchronization Signal) and SSSS (Secondary Sidelink Synchronization Signal). The PSSS may be referred to as S-PSS (Sidelink Primary Synchronization Signal) and the SSSS may be referred to as S-SSS (Sidelink Secondary Synchronization Signal). For example, length-127 M-sequences may be used for S-PSS and length-127 Gold sequences may be used for S-SSS. For example, a terminal may detect an initial signal (signal detection) and obtain synchronization using S-PSS. For example, the terminal can obtain detailed synchronization using S-PSS and S-SSS and detect a synchronization signal ID.

PSBCH(Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel)는 SL 신호 송수신 전에 단말이 가장 먼저 알아야 하는 기본이 되는 (시스템) 정보가 전송되는 (방송) 채널일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 기본이 되는 정보는 SLSS에 관련된 정보, 듀플렉스 모드(Duplex Mode, DM), TDD UL/DL(Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) 구성, 리소스 풀 관련 정보, SLSS에 관련된 애플리케이션의 종류, 서브프레임 오프셋, 방송 정보 등일 수 있다. 예를 들어, PSBCH 성능의 평가를 위해, NR V2X에서, PSBCH의 페이로드 크기는 24 비트의 CRC(Cyclic Redundancy Check)를 포함하여 56 비트일 수 있다.PSBCH (Physical Sidelink Broadcast Channel) may be a (broadcast) channel through which basic (system) information that a terminal must know first before transmitting and receiving an SL signal is transmitted. For example, the basic information may be information related to SLSS, duplex mode (DM), TDD UL/DL (Time Division Duplex Uplink/Downlink) configuration, resource pool related information, type of application related to SLSS, subframe offset, broadcast information, etc. For example, in order to evaluate PSBCH performance, in NR V2X, the payload size of PSBCH may be 56 bits including a 24-bit CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).

S-PSS, S-SSS 및 PSBCH는 주기적 전송을 지원하는 블록 포맷(예를 들어, SL SS(Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH 블록, 이하 S-SSB(Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block))에 포함될 수 있다. 상기 S-SSB는 캐리어 내의 PSCCH(Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH(Physical Sidelink Shared Channel)와 동일한 뉴머놀로지(즉, SCS 및 CP 길이)를 가질 수 있고, 전송 대역폭은 (미리) 설정된 SL BWP(Sidelink BWP) 내에 있을 수 있다. 예를 들어, S-SSB의 대역폭은 11 RB(Resource Block)일 수 있다. 예를 들어, PSBCH는 11 RB에 걸쳐있을 수 있다. 그리고, S-SSB의 주파수 위치는 (미리) 설정될 수 있다. 따라서, 단말은 캐리어에서 S-SSB를 발견하기 위해 주파수에서 가설 검출(hypothesis detection)을 수행할 필요가 없다.S-PSS, S-SSS and PSBCH may be included in a block format supporting periodic transmission (e.g., SL SS (Synchronization Signal)/PSBCH block, hereinafter referred to as S-SSB (Sidelink-Synchronization Signal Block)). The S-SSB may have the same numerology (i.e., SCS and CP length) as the PSCCH (Physical Sidelink Control Channel)/PSSCH (Physical Sidelink Shared Channel) in a carrier, and a transmission bandwidth may be within a (pre-)configured SL BWP (Sidelink BWP). For example, the bandwidth of the S-SSB may be 11 RB (Resource Block). For example, the PSBCH may span 11 RBs. And, the frequency location of the S-SSB may be (pre-)configured. Therefore, the terminal does not need to perform hypothesis detection in frequency to discover the S-SSB in the carrier.

도 12는 본 개시의 일 실시 예에 따라, 단말이 자원 할당 모드에 따라 V2X 또는 SL 통신을 수행하는 절차를 나타낸다. 도 12의 실시 예는 본 개시의 다양한 실시 예와 결합될 수 있다.FIG. 12 illustrates a procedure for a terminal to perform V2X or SL communication according to a resource allocation mode according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The embodiment of FIG. 12 can be combined with various embodiments of the present disclosure.

도 12의 (a)를 참조하면, 자원 할당 모드 1에서, 기지국은 SL 전송을 위해 단말에 의해 사용될 SL 자원을 스케줄링할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단계 S1200에서, 기지국은 제 1 단말에게 SL 자원과 관련된 정보 및/또는 UL 자원과 관련된 정보를 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 UL 자원은 PUCCH 자원 및/또는 PUSCH 자원을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 UL 자원은 SL HARQ 피드백을 기지국에게 보고하기 위한 자원일 수 있다.Referring to (a) of FIG. 12, in resource allocation mode 1, the base station can schedule SL resources to be used by the terminal for SL transmission. For example, in step S1200, the base station can transmit information related to SL resources and/or information related to UL resources to the first terminal. For example, the UL resources can include PUCCH resources and/or PUSCH resources. For example, the UL resources can be resources for reporting SL HARQ feedback to the base station.

예를 들어, 제 1 단말은 DG(dynamic grant) 자원과 관련된 정보 및/또는 CG(configured grant) 자원과 관련된 정보를 기지국으로부터 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, CG 자원은 CG 타입 1 자원 또는 CG 타입 2 자원을 포함할 수 있다. 본 명세서에서, DG 자원은, 기지국이 DCI(downlink control information)를 통해서 제 1 단말에게 설정/할당하는 자원일 수 있다. 본 명세서에서, CG 자원은, 기지국이 DCI 및/또는 RRC 메시지를 통해서 제 1 단말에게 설정/할당하는 (주기적인) 자원일 수 있다. 예를 들어, CG 타입 1 자원의 경우, 기지국은 CG 자원과 관련된 정보를 포함하는 RRC 메시지를 제 1 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들어, CG 타입 2 자원의 경우, 기지국은 CG 자원과 관련된 정보를 포함하는 RRC 메시지를 제 1 단말에게 전송할 수 있고, 기지국은 CG 자원의 활성화(activation) 또는 해제(release)와 관련된 DCI를 제 1 단말에게 전송할 수 있다.For example, the first terminal may receive information related to a DG (dynamic grant) resource and/or information related to a CG (configured grant) resource from the base station. For example, the CG resource may include a CG type 1 resource or a CG type 2 resource. In this specification, the DG resource may be a resource that the base station configures/allocates to the first terminal via DCI (downlink control information). In this specification, the CG resource may be a (periodic) resource that the base station configures/allocates to the first terminal via DCI and/or an RRC message. For example, in case of a CG type 1 resource, the base station may transmit an RRC message including information related to the CG resource to the first terminal. For example, in case of a CG type 2 resource, the base station may transmit an RRC message including information related to the CG resource to the first terminal, and the base station may transmit DCI related to activation or release of the CG resource to the first terminal.

단계 S1510에서, 제 1 단말은 상기 자원 스케줄링을 기반으로 PSCCH(예, SCI(Sidelink Control Information) 또는 1st-stage SCI)를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 단계 S1220에서, 제 1 단말은 상기 PSCCH와 관련된 PSSCH(예, 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, 데이터 등)를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 단계 S1230에서, 제 1 단말은 PSCCH/PSSCH와 관련된 PSFCH를 제 2 단말로부터 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, HARQ 피드백 정보(예, NACK 정보 또는 ACK 정보)가 상기 PSFCH를 통해서 상기 제 2 단말로부터 수신될 수 있다. 단계 S1240에서, 제 1 단말은 HARQ 피드백 정보를 PUCCH 또는 PUSCH를 통해서 기지국에게 전송/보고할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 기지국에게 보고되는 HARQ 피드백 정보는, 상기 제 1 단말이 상기 제 2 단말로부터 수신한 HARQ 피드백 정보를 기반으로 생성(generate)하는 정보일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 기지국에게 보고되는 HARQ 피드백 정보는, 상기 제 1 단말이 사전에 설정된 규칙을 기반으로 생성(generate)하는 정보일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 DCI는 SL의 스케줄링을 위한 DCI일 수 있다.In step S1510, the first terminal may transmit a PSCCH (e.g., Sidelink Control Information (SCI) or 1st-stage SCI) to the second terminal based on the resource scheduling. In step S1220, the first terminal may transmit a PSSCH (e.g., 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, data, etc.) related to the PSCCH to the second terminal. In step S1230, the first terminal may receive a PSFCH related to the PSCCH/PSSCH from the second terminal. For example, HARQ feedback information (e.g., NACK information or ACK information) may be received from the second terminal via the PSFCH. In step S1240, the first terminal may transmit/report HARQ feedback information to the base station via a PUCCH or a PUSCH. For example, the HARQ feedback information reported to the base station may be information generated by the first terminal based on the HARQ feedback information received from the second terminal. For example, the HARQ feedback information reported to the base station may be information generated by the first terminal based on a rule set in advance. For example, the DCI may be DCI for scheduling of SL.

도 12의 (b)를 참조하면, 자원 할당 모드 2에서, 단말은 기지국/네트워크에 의해 설정된 SL 자원 또는 미리 설정된 SL 자원 내에서 SL 전송 자원을 결정할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 설정된 SL 자원 또는 미리 설정된 SL 자원은 자원 풀일 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 자율적으로 SL 전송을 위한 자원을 선택 또는 스케줄링할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 설정된 자원 풀 내에서 자원을 스스로 선택하여, SL 통신을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단말은 센싱(sensing) 및 자원 (재)선택 절차를 수행하여, 선택 윈도우 내에서 스스로 자원을 선택할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 상기 센싱은 서브채널 단위로 수행될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 단계 S1210에서, 자원 풀 내에서 자원을 스스로 선택한 제 1 단말은 상기 자원을 사용하여 PSCCH(예, SCI(Sidelink Control Information) 또는 1st-stage SCI)를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 단계 S1220에서, 제 1 단말은 상기 PSCCH와 관련된 PSSCH(예, 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, 데이터 등)를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 단계 S1230에서, 제 1 단말은 PSCCH/PSSCH와 관련된 PSFCH를 제 2 단말로부터 수신할 수 있다. Referring to (b) of FIG. 12, in resource allocation mode 2, a terminal can determine an SL transmission resource within an SL resource set by a base station/network or a preset SL resource. For example, the set SL resource or the preset SL resource may be a resource pool. For example, the terminal can autonomously select or schedule resources for SL transmission. For example, the terminal can perform SL communication by selecting a resource by itself within the set resource pool. For example, the terminal can select a resource by itself within a selection window by performing sensing and resource (re)selection procedures. For example, the sensing can be performed on a subchannel basis. For example, in step S1210, a first terminal that has selected a resource by itself within a resource pool can transmit a PSCCH (e.g., SCI (Sidelink Control Information) or 1st-stage SCI) to a second terminal using the resource. In step S1220, the first terminal can transmit a PSSCH (e.g., 2nd-stage SCI, MAC PDU, data, etc.) related to the PSCCH to the second terminal. In step S1230, the first terminal can receive a PSFCH related to the PSCCH/PSSCH from the second terminal.

도 12의 (a) 또는 (b)를 참조하면, 예를 들어, 제 1 단말은 PSCCH 상에서 SCI를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 또는, 예를 들어, 제 1 단말은 PSCCH 및/또는 PSSCH 상에서 두 개의 연속적인 SCI(예, 2-stage SCI)를 제 2 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 이 경우, 제 2 단말은 PSSCH를 제 1 단말로부터 수신하기 위해 두 개의 연속적인 SCI(예, 2-stage SCI)를 디코딩할 수 있다. 본 명세서에서, PSCCH 상에서 전송되는 SCI는 1st SCI, 제 1 SCI, 1st-stage SCI 또는 1st-stage SCI 포맷이라고 칭할 수 있고, PSSCH 상에서 전송되는 SCI는 2nd SCI, 제 2 SCI, 2nd-stage SCI 또는 2nd-stage SCI 포맷이라고 칭할 수 있다.Referring to (a) or (b) of FIG. 12, for example, the first terminal may transmit an SCI to the second terminal on the PSCCH. Or, for example, the first terminal may transmit two consecutive SCIs (e.g., 2-stage SCIs) to the second terminal on the PSCCH and/or the PSSCH. In this case, the second terminal may decode the two consecutive SCIs (e.g., 2-stage SCIs) to receive the PSSCH from the first terminal. In this specification, the SCI transmitted on the PSCCH may be referred to as a 1st SCI, a 1st SCI, a 1st-stage SCI, or a 1st-stage SCI format, and the SCI transmitted on the PSSCH may be referred to as a 2nd SCI, a 2nd SCI, a 2nd-stage SCI, or a 2nd-stage SCI format.

도 12의 (a) 또는 (b)를 참조하면, 단계 S1530에서, 제 1 단말은 PSFCH를 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제 1 단말 및 제 2 단말은 PSFCH 자원을 결정할 수 있고, 제 2 단말은 PSFCH 자원을 사용하여 HARQ 피드백을 제 1 단말에게 전송할 수 있다.Referring to (a) or (b) of FIG. 12, in step S1530, the first terminal can receive the PSFCH. For example, the first terminal and the second terminal can determine the PSFCH resource, and the second terminal can transmit the HARQ feedback to the first terminal using the PSFCH resource.

도 12의 (a)를 참조하면, 단계 S1540에서, 제 1 단말은 PUCCH 및/또는 PUSCH를 통해서 SL HARQ 피드백을 기지국에게 전송할 수 있다.Referring to (a) of FIG. 12, in step S1540, the first terminal may transmit SL HARQ feedback to the base station through PUCCH and/or PUSCH.

도 13은 직접 (direct) 경로에서 간접 (indirect) 경로로 경로 스위칭 (path switching)하는 절차를 도시한다.Figure 13 illustrates a procedure for path switching from a direct path to an indirect path.

도 13에 도시된 절차는 Rel-17 NR SL에 관련한 TR 문서(3GPP TR 38.836)에서 기술된 연결 관리 (connection management) 및 다이렉트 (direct) 경로에서 인다이렉트 (indirect) 경로로의 경로 스위칭 절차에 기반한다. 리모트 UE는 사용자 평면 데이터 전송 전에 네트워크와 자체 PDU 세션/DRB를 설정할 필요가 있다. The procedure illustrated in Fig. 13 is based on the connection management and path switching procedure from direct to indirect path described in the TR document (3GPP TR 38.836) related to Rel-17 NR SL. The remote UE needs to establish its own PDU session/DRB with the network before user plane data transmission.

Rel-16 NR V2X의 PC5-RRC 측면 PC5 유니캐스트 링크 설정 절차는, 리모트 UE가 릴레이 UE를 통해 네트워크와 Uu RRC 연결 (connection)을 수립하기 전에, 리모트 UE가 릴레이 UE사이에 L2 U2N 릴레이 (layer 2 UE-to-Network relaying)를 위해 보안 유니캐스트 링크 (secure unicast link)를 설정하는데 재사용될 수 있다. The PC5-RRC aspect PC5 unicast link establishment procedure of Rel-16 NR V2X can be reused to establish a secure unicast link for layer 2 UE-to-Network relaying (L2 U2N relay) between the remote UE and the relay UE before the remote UE establishes a Uu RRC connection with the network via the relay UE.

in-coverage 및 out-of-coverage 모두에 대해 리모트 UE가 gNB와의 연결 설정을 위한 첫 번째 RRC 메시지를 시작하면, 리모트 UE와 U2N 릴레이 UE 간의 전송을 위한 PC5 L2 구성은 표준에 정의된 RLC/MAC 구성에 기초할 수 있다. 리모트 UE의 Uu SRB1/SRB2 및 DRB의 수립은 L2 U2N 릴레이에 대한 레거시 Uu 구성 절차를 따른다. 도 13에 도시된 상위 수준 연결 설정 절차는 L2 UE-to-Network Relay에 적용된다.For both in-coverage and out-of-coverage, when the remote UE initiates the first RRC message for connection establishment with the gNB, the PC5 L2 configuration for transmission between the remote UE and the U2N relay UE can be based on the RLC/MAC configuration defined in the standard. The establishment of Uu SRB1/SRB2 and DRB of the remote UE follows the legacy Uu configuration procedure for L2 U2N relay. The high-level connection establishment procedure illustrated in Fig. 13 applies to L2 UE-to-Network Relay.

단계 S1300에서 리모트 UE 및 릴레이 UE는 탐색 절차를 수행하고 기존 Rel-16 절차를 기준으로 단계 S1301에서 PC5-RRC 연결을 설정할 수 있다In step S1300, the remote UE and the relay UE can perform a discovery procedure and establish a PC5-RRC connection in step S1301 based on the existing Rel-16 procedure.

단계 S1302에서 리모트 UE는 PC5의 기본 L2 구성을 사용하여 Relay UE를 통해 gNB와의 연결 설정을 위한 첫 번째 RRC 메시지(즉, RRCSetupRequest)를 전송할 수 있다. gNB는 RRCSetup 메시지로 리모트 UE에 응답(S1303)한다. 리모트 UE로의 RRCSetup 전달은 PC5의 기본 구성을 사용한다. 릴레이 UE가 RRC_CONNECTED에서 시작되지 않았다면 PC5의 기본 L2 구성에 대한 메시지 수신 시 자체 연결 설정을 수행해야 한다.In step S1302, the remote UE can transmit the first RRC message (i.e., RRCSetupRequest) to establish connection with the gNB via the Relay UE using the default L2 configuration of PC5. The gNB responds to the remote UE with an RRCSetup message (S1303). The RRCSetup delivery to the remote UE uses the default configuration of PC5. If the relay UE is not started in RRC_CONNECTED, it needs to perform its own connection establishment upon receiving the message for the default L2 configuration of PC5.

단계 S1304에서 gNB와 릴레이 UE는 Uu를 통해 릴레이 채널 설정 절차를 수행한다. gNB의 구성에 따라 릴레이/리모트 UE는 PC5를 통해 리모트 UE로 SRB1을 릴레이하기 위한 RLC 채널을 설정한다. 이 단계는 SRB1에 대한 릴레이 채널을 준비한다.In step S1304, the gNB and the relay UE perform a relay channel setup procedure via Uu. Depending on the configuration of the gNB, the relay/remote UE sets up an RLC channel to relay SRB1 to the remote UE via PC5. This step prepares a relay channel for SRB1.

단계 S1305에서, 리모트 UE SRB1 메시지(예: RRCSetupComplete 메시지)는 PC5를 통해 SRB1 릴레이 채널을 사용하여 릴레이 UE를 통해 gNB로 전송된다. 그리고 리모트 UE는 Uu를 통해 RRC 연결된다.In step S1305, a remote UE SRB1 message (e.g., an RRCSetupComplete message) is transmitted to the gNB through the relay UE using the SRB1 relay channel over PC5. And the remote UE is RRC connected over Uu.

단계 S1306 및 단계 S1307에서, 리모트 UE와 gNB는 레거시 절차에 따라 보안을 설정하고 보안 메시지는 Relay UE를 통해 전달된다. In steps S1306 and S1307, the remote UE and the gNB establish security according to legacy procedures and the security message is delivered through the Relay UE.

단계 S1308 및 단계 S1309에서, gNB는 릴레이 SRB2/DRB를 설정하기 위해 릴레이 UE를 통해 리모트 UE에 RRCReconfiguration을 전송한다. 리모트 UE는 RRCReconfigurationComplete를 Relay UE를 통해 gNB에 응답으로 전송한다.In steps S1308 and S1309, the gNB sends RRCReconfiguration to the remote UE through the relay UE to set up relay SRB2/DRB. The remote UE sends RRCReconfigurationComplete to the gNB through the relay UE in response.

단계 S1310에서, gNB는 트래픽 릴레이를 위해 gNB와 릴레이 UE 사이에 추가 RLC 채널을 설정한다. gNB의 구성에 따라 릴레이/리모트 UE는 트래픽 릴레이를 위해 리모트 UE와 Relay UE 사이에 추가 RLC 채널을 설정한다. In step S1310, the gNB sets up an additional RLC channel between the gNB and the relay UE for traffic relay. Depending on the configuration of the gNB, the relay/remote UE sets up an additional RLC channel between the remote UE and the relay UE for traffic relay.

연결 설정 절차 외에 L2 UE-to-Network 릴레이의 경우:For L2 UE-to-Network relay, in addition to the connection setup procedure:

- RRC 재구성 및 RRC 연결 해제 절차는 WI 단계에 남겨진 메시지 내용/구성 설계와 함께 레거시 RRC 절차를 재사용할 수 있다.- RRC reconfiguration and RRC disconnection procedures can reuse legacy RRC procedures with message content/configuration design left in the WI phase.

- RRC 연결 재설정 및 RRC 연결 재개 절차는 메시지 내용/구성 설계와 함께 릴레이 특정 부분을 처리하기 위해 위의 L2 U2N 릴레이의 연결 설정 절차를 고려함으로써 기존 RRC 절차를 베이스라인으로 재사용할 수 있다. 메시지 컨텐트/구성은 추후 정의될 수 있다.- RRC connection re-establishment and RRC connection resumption procedures can reuse existing RRC procedures as a baseline by considering the connection establishment procedure of the above L2 U2N relay to handle relay-specific parts along with message content/composition design. Message content/composition can be defined later.

도 14는 직접 경로에서 간접 경로로 전환하는 방법을 간략하게 도시한다.Figure 14 schematically illustrates how to switch from a direct route to an indirect route.

직접 리모트 UE는 도 14에 도시된 절차에 기반하여 L2 U2N 릴레이의 서비스 연속성을 위해 간접 릴레이 UE (indirect Relay UE)로 전환될 수 있다.A direct remote UE can be switched to an indirect relay UE for service continuity of L2 U2N relay based on the procedure illustrated in Fig. 14.

도 14를 참조하면, 단계 S1401에서 리모트 UE는 후보 릴레이 UE를 측정/발견한 후에 하나 또는 여러 개의 후보 릴레이 UE를 보고할 수 있다. 상기 리모트 UE는 보고할 때 상위 계층 기준을 충족하는 적절한 릴레이 UE를 필터링할 수 있다. 상기 적어도 하나의 후보 릴레이의 보고에는 릴레이 UE의 ID 및 SL RSRP 정보가 포함될 수 있으며, 여기서 PC5 측정 관련 세부사항은 추후 결정될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 14, in step S1401, the remote UE may report one or more candidate relay UEs after measuring/discovering the candidate relay UEs. The remote UE may filter appropriate relay UEs that meet upper layer criteria when reporting. The report of at least one candidate relay may include ID and SL RSRP information of the relay UE, where PC5 measurement related details may be determined later.

단계 S1402에서, gNB가 타겟 릴레이 UE로 전환하기로 결정하고 타겟 (재)구성((re)configuration)은 선택적으로 릴레이 UE로 전송된다 (S1403).In step S1402, the gNB decides to switch to the target relay UE and the target (re)configuration is optionally transmitted to the relay UE (S1403).

단계 S1404에서, 리모트 UE에 대한 RRC 재구성 메시지는 타겟 릴레이 UE의 ID, 타겟 Uu 및 PC5 구성을 포함할 수 있다.In step S1404, the RRC reconfiguration message to the remote UE may include the ID of the target relay UE, the target Uu, and the PC5 configuration.

단계 S1405에서, 연결이 아직 설정되지 않은 경우 리모트 UE는 타겟 릴레이 UE와 PC5 연결을 설정한다.In step S1405, if the connection is not yet established, the remote UE establishes a PC5 connection with the target relay UE.

단계 S1406에서, 리모트 UE는 RRCReconfiguration에서 제공된 타겟 구성을 사용하여 대상 경로를 통해 gNB에 RRCReconfigurationComplete를 피드백한다.In step S1406, the remote UE feeds back RRCReconfigurationComplete to the gNB through the target path using the target configuration provided in RRCReconfiguration.

단계 S1407에서, 데이터 경로가 전환된다.In step S1407, the data path is switched.

도 15 및 도 16은 릴레이 디스커버리 없이 U2U 릴레이 선택 (UE-to-UE Relay Selection)하는 절차를 설명하기 위한 도면이다.FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams for explaining a procedure for U2U relay selection (UE-to-UE Relay Selection) without relay discovery.

소정의 시나리오 (TR 23.752 6.8 절)를 참조하면, 소스 (source UE)가 타겟 (target) UE와 통신을 원할 경우, 먼저 소스 UE는 타겟 UE 정보가 포함된 직접 통신 요청 (Direct Communication Request) 또는 요청(Solicitation) 메시지를 전송하여 타겟 UE를 찾으려고 시도할 수 있다. 소스 UE가 타겟 UE에 직접 도달할 수 없는 경우, 소스 UE는 타겟 UE에 도달하기 위한 U2U 릴레이를 탐색 (discovery)을 시도할 수 있고, 또한, 타겟 UE를 탐색 (discovery)하기 위한 릴레이를 트리거할 수도 있습니다 (If the source UE cannot reach the target UE directly, it will try to discover a UE-to-UE relay to reach the target UE which may also trigger the relay to discover the target UE). 소스 UE는 하기의 두 가지 대안들에 기반하여 타겟 UE의 검색 및/또는 U2ㅕ 릴레이의 검색/선택을 통합시킬 수 있다. For a given scenario (TR 23.752 section 6.8), when a source UE wants to communicate with a target UE, the source UE may first try to find the target UE by transmitting a Direct Communication Request or Solicitation message containing target UE information. If the source UE cannot reach the target UE directly, it will try to discover a UE-to-UE relay to reach the target UE which may also trigger the relay to discover the target UE. The source UE may integrate the discovery of the target UE and/or the discovery/selection of a U2U relay based on the following two alternatives:

- 대안 1: U2U 릴레이 탐색 (discovery)/선택은 유니캐스트 링크 설정 절차(TS 23.287의 clause 6.3.3 참조) 에 통합될 수 있다.- Alternative 1: U2U relay discovery/selection can be integrated into the unicast link setup procedure (see clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287).

- 대안 2: U2U 릴레이 탐색 (discovery)/선택은 모델 B 직접 탐색 절차 (Model B direct discovery procedure)에 통합될 수 있다.- Alternative 2: U2U relay discovery/selection can be integrated into the Model B direct discovery procedure.

통신에 릴레이를 사용할 수 있는지 여부를 나타내기 위해 직접 통신 요청 또는 요청 메시지에 새로운 필드가 추가될 수 있다. 상기 새로운 필드는 Relay_indication로 정의될 수 있다. (소스) UE가 직접 통신 요청 (Direct Communication Request) 또는 요청(Solicitation) 메시지를 브로드캐스트하려는 경우, 상기 요청 메시지는 U2U 릴레이를 사용할 수 있는지 여부에 대한 Relay_indication를 포함할 수 있다. 한편, 릴리스 17의 경우에 Relay_indication의 값이 단일 홉으로 제한되는 것으로 가정될 수 있다.A new field may be added to the Direct Communication Request or Solicitation message to indicate whether a relay is available for communication. The new field may be defined as Relay_indication. When a (source) UE intends to broadcast a Direct Communication Request or Solicitation message, the request message may include Relay_indication for whether a U2U relay is available. Meanwhile, for Release 17, it may be assumed that the value of Relay_indication is restricted to a single hop.

U2U 릴레이가 상기 Relay_indication이 설정된 상기 요청 메시지를 수신할 경우, 상기 U2U 릴레이는 상기 요청 메시지를 포워딩할지 여부를 결정할 수 있다 (즉, 메시지를 수정하고 근처에서 브로드캐스트). 예컨대, 상기 U2U 릴레이는 Relay Service Code가 있는 경우에 Application ID, authorization policy (예: 특정 ProSe 서비스에 대한 Relay), Relay의 현재 트래픽 부하, Source UE와 Relay UE 간의 무선 상태 등을 고려하여 상기 요청 메시지의 포워딩 여부를 결정할 수 있다.When the U2U relay receives the request message with the Relay_indication set, the U2U relay can decide whether to forward the request message (i.e., modify the message and broadcast it nearby). For example, the U2U relay can decide whether to forward the request message by considering the Application ID, authorization policy (e.g., Relay for a specific ProSe service), current traffic load of the Relay, radio status between the Source UE and the Relay UE, etc. if there is a Relay Service Code.

또는, 다수의 U2U 릴레이들이 상기 타겟 UE에 도달하기 위해 사용될 수 있거나 (제1 경우), 타겟 UE가 소스 UE로부터 상기 요청 메시지를 직접 수신할 수도 있는 경우 (제2 경우)가 존재할 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 타겟 UE는 상기 제1 경우 또는 상기 제2 경우 중에서 어느 하나의 경우에 대한 응답 여부를 선택할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 타겟 UE는 신호 강도, local policy (예컨대, UE-UE 릴레이의 트래픽 부하), 릴레이 서비스 코드 (릴레이 서비스 코드가 있는 경우) 및/또는 운영자 정책 (예컨대, 항상 직접 통신을 선호하거나 일부 특정 UE-UE 릴레이만 사용)에 기초하여 상기 제1 경우 또는 상기 제2 경우 중에서 어느 하나의 경우에 대한 응답 여부를 선택할 수 있다Alternatively, multiple U2U relays may be used to reach the target UE (case 1), or the target UE may directly receive the request message from the source UE (case 2). In this case, the target UE may choose whether to respond to either the first or the second case. For example, the target UE may choose whether to respond to either the first or the second case based on signal strength, local policy (e.g., traffic load of the UE-UE relay), relay service code (if there is a relay service code), and/or operator policy (e.g., always preferring direct communication or using only some specific UE-UE relays).

또는, 상기 소스 UE는 다수의 U2U 릴레이들로부터 상기 요청 메시지에 대한 응답을 수신할 수도 있고, 상기 타겟 UE으로부터 직접 상기 요청 메시지에 대한 응답을 수신할 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 소스 UE는 신호 강도 또는 운영자 정책(예: 항상 직접 통신을 선호하거나 일부 특정 UE-UE 릴레이만 사용)에 기초하여 통신 경로 (직접 경로 또는 간접 경로)를 선택할 수 있다.Alternatively, the source UE may receive responses to the request message from multiple U2U relays, or may receive responses to the request message directly from the target UE. In this case, the source UE may select a communication path (direct path or indirect path) based on signal strength or operator policy (e.g., always preferring direct communication or using only some specific UE-UE relays).

구체적으로, 상술한 대안 1은 표 5 및 도 15에 기술된 바와 같이 수행될 수 있다.Specifically, the above-described alternative 1 can be performed as described in Table 5 and FIG. 15.

6.8.2 Procedures
6.8.2.1 UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into the unicast link establishment procedure (Alternative 1)
Fig 14 illustrates the procedure of the proposed method.
0. UEs are authorized to use the service provided by the UE-to-UE relays. UE-to-UE relays are authorized to provide service of relaying traffic among UEs. The authorization and the parameter provisioning can use solutions for KI#8, e.g. Sol#36. The authorization can be done when UEs/relays are registered to the network. Security related parameters may be provisioned so that a UE and a relay can verify the authorization with each other if needed.
1. UE-1 wants to establish unicast communication with UE-2 and the communication can be either through direct link with UE-2 or via a UE-to-UE relay. Then UE-1 broadcasts Direct Communication Request with relay_indication enabled. The message will be received by relay-1, relay-2. The message may also be received by UE-2 if it is in the proximity of UE-1. UE-1 includes source UE info, target UE info, Application ID, as well as Relay Service Code if there is any. If UE-1 does not want relay to be involved in the communication, then it will made relay_indication disabled.
NOTE 1: The data type of relay_indication can be determined in Stage 3. Details of Direct Communication Request/Accept messages will be determined in stage 3.
2. Relay-1 and relay-2 decide to participate in the procedure. They broadcast a new Direct Communication Request message in their proximity without relay_indication enabled. If a relay receives this message, it will just drop it. When a relay broadcasts the Direct Communication Request message, it includes source UE info, target UE info and Relay UE info (e.g. Relay UE ID) in the message and use Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID. The Relay maintains association between the source UE information (e.g. source UE L2 ID) and the new Direct Communication Request.
3. UE-2 receives the Direct Communication Requests from relay-1 and relay-2. UE-2 may also receive Direct Communication Request message directly from the UE-1 if the UE-2 is in the communication range of UE-1.
4. UE-2 chooses relay-1 and replies with Direct Communication Accept message. If UE-2 directly receives the Direct Communication Request from UE-1, it may choose to setup a direct communication link by sending the Direct Communication Accept message directly to UE-1. After receiving Direct Communication Accept, a UE-to-UE relay retrieves the source UE information stored in step 2 and sends the Direct Communication Accept message to the source UE with its Relay UE info added in the message.
After step 4, UE-1 and UE-2 have respectively setup the PC5 links with the chosen UE-to-UE relay.
NOTE 2: The security establishment between the UE1 and Relay-1, and between Relay-1 and UE-2 are performed before the Relay-1 and UE-2 send Direct Communication Accept message. Details of the authentication/ security establishment procedure are determined by SA WG3. The security establishment procedure can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the source (or target) UE and the relay which can be used for relaying the traffic.
5. UE-1 receives the Direct Communication Accept message from relay-1. UE-1 chooses path according to e.g. policies (e.g. always choose direct path if it is possible), signal strength, etc. If UE-1 receives Direct Communication Accept / Response message request accept directly from UE-2, it may choose to setup a direct PC5 L2 link with UE-2 as described in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5], then step 6 is skipped.
6a. For the L3 UE-to-UE Relay case, UE-1 and UE-2 finish setting up the communication link via the chosen UE-to-UE relay. The link setup information may vary depending on the type of relay, e.g. L2 or L3 relaying. Then UE-1 and UE-2 can communicate via the relay. Regarding IP address allocation for the source/remote UE, the addresses can be either assigned by the relay or by the UE itself (e.g. link-local IP address) as defined in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5].
6b. For the Layer 2 UE-to-UE Relay case, the source and target UE can setup an end-to-end PC5 link via the relay. UE-1 sends a unicast E2E Direct Communication Request message to UE-2 via the Relay-1, and UE-2 responds with a unicast E2E Direct Communication Accept message to UE-1 via the Relay-1. Relay-1 transfers the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer.
NOTE 3: How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase.
NOTE 4: In order to make a relay or path selection, the source UE can setup a timer after sending out the Direct Communication Request for collecting the corresponding response messages before making a decision. Similarly, the target UE can also setup a timer after receiving the first copy of the Direct Communication Request / message for collecting multiple copies of the message from different paths before making a decision.
NOTE 5: In the first time when a UE receives a message from a UE-to-UE relay, the UE needs to verify if the relay is authorized be a UE-to-UE relay. Similarly, the UE-to-UE relay may also need to verify if the UE is authorized to use the relay service. The verification details and the how to secure the communication between two UEs through a UE-to-UE relay is to be defined by SA WG3.
6.8.2 Procedures
6.8.2.1 UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into the unicast link establishment procedure (Alternative 1)
Fig 14 illustrates the procedure of the proposed method.
0. UEs are authorized to use the service provided by the UE-to-UE relays. UE-to-UE relays are authorized to provide service of relaying traffic among UEs. The authorization and the parameter provisioning can use solutions for KI#8, eg Sol#36. The authorization can be done when UEs/relays are registered to the network. Security related parameters may be provisioned so that a UE and a relay can verify the authorization with each other if needed.
1. UE-1 wants to establish unicast communication with UE-2 and the communication can be either through direct link with UE-2 or via a UE-to-UE relay. Then UE-1 broadcasts Direct Communication Request with relay_indication enabled. The message will be received by relay-1, relay-2. The message may also be received by UE-2 if it is in the proximity of UE-1. UE-1 includes source UE info, target UE info, Application ID, as well as Relay Service Code if there is any. If UE-1 does not want relay to be involved in the communication, then it will made relay_indication disabled.
NOTE 1: The data type of relay_indication can be determined in Stage 3. Details of Direct Communication Request/Accept messages will be determined in stage 3.
2. Relay-1 and relay-2 decide to participate in the procedure. They broadcast a new Direct Communication Request message in their proximity without relay_indication enabled. If a relay receives this message, it will just drop it. When a relay broadcasts the Direct Communication Request message, it includes source UE info, target UE info and Relay UE info (eg Relay UE ID) in the message and use Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID. The Relay maintains association between the source UE information (eg source UE L2 ID) and the new Direct Communication Request.
3. UE-2 receives the Direct Communication Requests from relay-1 and relay-2. UE-2 may also receive Direct Communication Request message directly from the UE-1 if the UE-2 is in the communication range of UE-1.
4. UE-2 chooses relay-1 and replies with Direct Communication Accept message. If UE-2 directly receives the Direct Communication Request from UE-1, it may choose to setup a direct communication link by sending the Direct Communication Accept message directly to UE-1. After receiving Direct Communication Accept, a UE-to-UE relay retrieves the source UE information stored in step 2 and sends the Direct Communication Accept message to the source UE with its Relay UE info added in the message.
After step 4, UE-1 and UE-2 have respectively setup the PC5 links with the chosen UE-to-UE relay.
NOTE 2: The security establishment between the UE1 and Relay-1, and between Relay-1 and UE-2 are performed before the Relay-1 and UE-2 send Direct Communication Accept message. Details of the authentication/security establishment procedure are determined by SA WG3. The security establishment procedure can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the source (or target) UE and the relay which can be used for relaying the traffic.
5. UE-1 receives the Direct Communication Accept message from relay-1. UE-1 chooses path according to eg policies (eg always choose direct path if it is possible), signal strength, etc. If UE-1 receives Direct Communication Accept / Response message request accept directly from UE-2, it may choose to setup a direct PC5 L2 link with UE-2 as described in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5], then step 6 is skipped.
6a. For the L3 UE-to-UE Relay case, UE-1 and UE-2 finish setting up the communication link via the chosen UE-to-UE relay. The link setup information may vary depending on the type of relay, eg L2 or L3 relaying. Then UE-1 and UE-2 can communicate via the relay. Regarding IP address allocation for the source/remote UE, the addresses can be either assigned by the relay or by the UE itself (eg link-local IP address) as defined in clause 6.3.3 of TS 23.287 [5].
6b. For the Layer 2 UE-to-UE Relay case, the source and target UE can setup an end-to-end PC5 link via the relay. UE-1 sends a unicast E2E Direct Communication Request message to UE-2 via the Relay-1, and UE-2 responds with a unicast E2E Direct Communication Accept message to UE-1 via the Relay-1. Relay-1 transfers the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer.
NOTE 3: How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase.
NOTE 4: In order to make a relay or path selection, the source UE can setup a timer after sending out the Direct Communication Request for collecting the corresponding response messages before making a decision. Similarly, the target UE can also setup a timer after receiving the first copy of the Direct Communication Request / message for collecting multiple copies of the message from different paths before making a decision.
NOTE 5: In the first time when a UE receives a message from a UE-to-UE relay, the UE needs to verify if the relay is authorized to be a UE-to-UE relay. Similarly, the UE-to-UE relay may also need to verify if the UE is authorized to use the relay service. The verification details and the how to secure the communication between two UEs through a UE-to-UE relay is to be defined by SA WG3.

상술한 대안 2은 표 6 및 도 16에 기술된 바와 같이 수행될 수 있다.Alternative 2 described above can be performed as described in Table 6 and Fig. 16.

6.8.2.2 UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into Model B direct discovery procedure (Alternative 2)
Depicted in Fig 15 is the procedure for UE-UE Relay discovery Model B, and the discovery/selection procedure is separated from hop by hop and end-to-end link establishment.
1. UE-1 broadcasts discovery solicitation message carrying UE-1 info, target UE info (UE-2), Application ID, Relay Service Code if any, the UE-1 can also indicate relay_indication enabled.
2. On reception of discovery solicitation, the candidate Relay UE-R broadcasts discovery solicitation carrying UE-1 info, UE-R info, Target UE info. The Relay UE-R uses Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID.
3. The target UE-2 responds the discovery message. If the UE-2 receives discovery solicitation message in step 1, then UE-2 responds discovery response in step 3b with UE-1 info, UE-2 info. If not and UE-2 receives discovery solicitation in step 2, then UE-2 responds discovery response message in step 3a with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info.
4. On reception of discovery response in step 3a, UE-R sends discovery response with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info. If more than one candidate Relay UEs responding discovery response message, UE-1 can select one Relay UE based on e.g. implementation or link qualification.
5. The source and target UE may need to setup PC5 links with the relay before communicating with each other. Step 5a can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-1 and UE-R which can be used for relaying. Step 5b can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-2 and UE-R which can be used for relaying.
6a. Same as step 6a described in clause 6.8.2.1.
6b. For the Layer-2 UE-to-UE Relay, the E2E unicast Direct Communication Request message is sent from UE1 to the selected Relay via the per-hop link (established in steps 5a) and the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3) as the destination. The UE-to-UE Relay transfers the E2E messages based on the identity information of peer UE in the Adaptation Layer. The initiator (UE1) knows the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3) after a discovery procedure. UE3 responds with E2E unicast Direct Communication Accept message in the same way.
NOTE 1: For the Layer 2 UE-to-UE Relay case, whether step5b is performed before step 6b or triggered during step 6b will be decided at normative phase.
NOTE 2: How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase.
6.8.3 Impacts on services, entities and interfaces
UE impacts to support new Relay related functions.
6.8.2.2 UE-to-UE relay discovery and selection is integrated into Model B direct discovery procedure (Alternative 2)
Depicted in Fig 15 is the procedure for UE-UE Relay discovery Model B, and the discovery/selection procedure is separated from hop by hop and end-to-end link establishment.
1. UE-1 broadcasts discovery solicitation message carrying UE-1 info, target UE info (UE-2), Application ID, Relay Service Code if any, the UE-1 can also indicate relay_indication enabled.
2. On reception of discovery solicitation, the candidate Relay UE-R broadcasts discovery solicitation carrying UE-1 info, UE-R info, Target UE info. The Relay UE-R uses Relay's L2 address as the source Layer-2 ID.
3. The target UE-2 responds the discovery message. If the UE-2 receives discovery solicitation message in step 1, then UE-2 responds discovery response in step 3b with UE-1 info, UE-2 info. If not and UE-2 receives discovery solicitation in step 2, then UE-2 responds discovery response message in step 3a with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info.
4. On reception of discovery response in step 3a, UE-R sends discovery response with UE-1 info, UE-R info, UE-2 info. If more than one candidate Relay UEs responding discovery response message, UE-1 can select one Relay UE based on eg implementation or link qualification.
5. The source and target UE may need to setup PC5 links with the relay before communicating with each other. Step 5a can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-1 and UE-R which can be used for relaying. Step 5b can be skipped if there already exists a PC5 link between the UE-2 and UE-R which can be used for relaying.
6a. Same as step 6a described in clause 6.8.2.1.
6b. For the Layer-2 UE-to-UE Relay, the E2E unicast Direct Communication Request message is sent from UE1 to the selected Relay via the per-hop link (established in steps 5a) and the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3 ) as the destination. The UE-to-UE Relay transfers the E2E messages based on the identity information of peer UE in the Adaptation Layer. The initiator (UE1) knows the Adaptation layer info identifying the peer UE (UE3) after a discovery procedure. UE3 responds with E2E unicast Direct Communication Accept message in the same way.
NOTE 1: For the Layer 2 UE-to-UE Relay case, whether step5b is performed before step 6b or triggered during step 6b will be decided at normative phase.
NOTE 2: How Relay-1 can transfer the messages based on the identity information of UE-1/UE-2 in the Adaptation Layer requires cooperation with RAN2 during the normative phase.
6.8.3 Impacts on services, entities and interfaces
UE impacts to support new Relay related functions.

도 17(a)는 L2 U2U 릴레이를 위한 평면 프로토콜 스택을 간략하게 도시한다.Figure 17(a) schematically illustrates a flat protocol stack for L2 U2U relay.

도 17(a)는 L2 U2U 릴레이를 위한 사용자 평면 프로토콜 스택을 도시하고, 도 17(b)는 L2 U2U 릴레이를 위한 제어 평면 프로토콜 스택을 도시한다. 다음 표 7은 Layer-2 릴레이의 Architecture 및 Protocol Stack에 대한 도 17에 관련된 설명이다.Fig. 17(a) illustrates a user plane protocol stack for an L2 U2U relay, and Fig. 17(b) illustrates a control plane protocol stack for an L2 U2U relay. Table 7 below provides a description related to Fig. 17 regarding the Architecture and Protocol Stack of a Layer-2 Relay.

5.5 Layer-2 Relay
5.5.1 Architecture and Protocol Stack
For L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture, the protocol stacks are similar to L2 UE-to-Network Relay other than the fact that the termination points are two Remote UEs. The protocol stacks for the user plane and control plane of L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture are described in Figure 5.5.1-1 and Figure 5.5.1-2.
An adaptation layer is supported over the second PC5 link (i.e. the PC5 link between Relay UE and Destination UE) for L2 UE-to-UE Relay. For L2 UE-to-UE Relay, the adaptation layer is put over RLC sublayer for both CP and UP over the second PC5 link. The sidelink SDAP/PDCP and RRC are terminated between two Remote UEs, while RLC, MAC and PHY are terminated in each PC5 link.
For the first hop of L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The N:1 mapping is supported by first hop PC5 adaptation layer between Remote UE SL Radio Bearers and first hop PC5 RLC channels for relaying.
- The adaptation layer over first PC5 hop between Source Remote UE and Relay UE supports to identify traffic destined to different Destination Remote UEs.
For the second hop of L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The second hop PC5 adaptation layer can be used to support bearer mapping between the ingress RLC channels over first PC5 hop and egress RLC channels over second PC5 hop at Relay UE.
- PC5 Adaptation layer supports the N:1 bearer mapping between multiple ingress PC5 RLC channels over first PC5 hop and one egress PC5 RLC channel over second PC5 hop and supports the Remote UE identification function.
For L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The identity information of Remote UE end-to-end Radio Bearer is included in the adaptation layer in first and second PC5 hop.
- In addition, the identity information of Source Remote UE and/or the identity information of Destination Remote UE are candidate information to be included in the adaptation layer, which are to be decided in WI phase.
5.5 Layer-2 Relay
5.5.1 Architecture and Protocol Stack
For L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture, the protocol stacks are similar to L2 UE-to-Network Relay other than the fact that the termination points are two Remote UEs. The protocol stacks for the user plane and control plane of L2 UE-to-UE Relay architecture are described in Figure 5.5.1-1 and Figure 5.5.1-2.
An adaptation layer is supported over the second PC5 link (ie the PC5 link between Relay UE and Destination UE) for L2 UE-to-UE Relay. For L2 UE-to-UE Relay, the adaptation layer is put over RLC sublayer for both CP and UP over the second PC5 link. The sidelink SDAP/PDCP and RRC are terminated between two Remote UEs, while RLC, MAC and PHY are terminated in each PC5 link.
For the first hop of L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The N:1 mapping is supported by first hop PC5 adaptation layer between Remote UE SL Radio Bearers and first hop PC5 RLC channels for relaying.
- The adaptation layer over first PC5 hop between Source Remote UE and Relay UE supports to identify traffic destined to different Destination Remote UEs.
For the second hop of L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The second hop PC5 adaptation layer can be used to support bearer mapping between the ingress RLC channels over first PC5 hop and egress RLC channels over second PC5 hop at Relay UE.
- PC5 Adaptation layer supports the N:1 bearer mapping between multiple ingress PC5 RLC channels over first PC5 hop and one egress PC5 RLC channel over second PC5 hop and supports the Remote UE identification function.
For L2 UE-to-UE Relay,
- The identity information of Remote UE end-to-end Radio Bearer is included in the adaptation layer in first and second PC5 hop.
- In addition, the identity information of Source Remote UE and/or the identity information of Destination Remote UE are candidate information to be included in the adaptation layer, which are to be decided in WI phase.

이하, PC5를 통한 브로드캐스트 원격 ID 및 다이렉트 DAA (Detect-and-Avoid) 지원을 위한 U2X에 대해 자세히 설명한다 (TR 23.700-58 참조).Below, we detail U2X for broadcast remote ID and direct DAA (Detect-and-Avoid) support over PC5 (see TR 23.700-58).

UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle)-to-everything (U2X)UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle)-to-everything (U2X)

도 18 내지 도 22은 U2X 시스템을 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figures 18 to 22 are drawings for explaining the U2X system.

소정의 시나리오 (TR 23.700-58)에서 제안된 U2X 솔루션의 주요 사항은 하기와 같다.The key points of the proposed U2X solution for the given scenario (TR 23.700-58) are as follows:

- U2X는 TS 23.287에 정의된 V2X 메커니즘을 활용하여 BRID 및 다이렉트 DAA를 지원할 수 있다. 이 경우, TS 23.285에 정의된 LTE PC5와 NR PC5가 모두 지원되며 RAT 선택은 U2XP를 기반으로 수행될 수 있다.- U2X can support BRID and Direct DAA by leveraging the V2X mechanism defined in TS 23.287. In this case, both LTE PC5 and NR PC5 defined in TS 23.285 are supported and RAT selection can be performed based on U2XP.

- 통신 모드: BRID (Broadcasting UAV identification)는 Broadcast 통신 모드를 사용할 수 있다. DAA는 UAV 정보를 광고 (advertise)하기 위해 브로드캐스트 통신 모드를 사용할 수 있다. PC5를 통한 브로드캐스트 또는 PC5를 통한 유니캐스트는 DAA 충돌 해제를 위해 두 대 이상의 UAV 간에 사용될 수 있다. U2X AS를 통한 Uu를 통한 유니캐스트는 상술한 U2X 솔루션에 지원되지 않을 수 있다. NR 기반 PC5에 대한 그룹캐스트 모드는 상술한 U2X 솔루션에 지원되지 않을 수 있다. NR PC5를 선택할 경우, DAA에 연결 없는 그룹캐스트 통신이 사용될 수 있다. 한편, 명확한 요구 사항이 없기 때문에 당해 릴리스에서는 애플리케이션 계층 관리형 그룹캐스트가 고려되지 않을 수 있다.- Communication mode: BRID (Broadcasting UAV identification) can use Broadcast communication mode. DAA can use Broadcast communication mode to advertise UAV information. Broadcast over PC5 or Unicast over PC5 can be used between two or more UAVs for DAA de-collision. Unicast over Uu over U2X AS may not be supported in the above-described U2X solution. Groupcast mode for NR based PC5 may not be supported in the above-described U2X solution. When NR PC5 is selected, connectionless Groupcast communication can be used for DAA. Meanwhile, application layer managed Groupcast may not be considered in this release due to lack of clear requirement.

- U2X는 V2X Application Server의 경우와 마찬가지로 NEF를 통해 사업자 네트워크와 인터페이스하는 U2X Application Server에서 지원될 수 있다.- U2X can be supported in a U2X Application Server that interfaces with the operator network via NEF, as is the case with V2X Application Servers.

한편, 상기 소정의 시나리오/솔루션은 전용 서비스 세트가 정의가 정의될 수 있고, UAV를 제공하는 U2X AS와 USS가 동일하거나 다른 엔터티인 경우에 Multiple deployment scenarios가 허용될 필요가 있다.Meanwhile, the above given scenario/solution needs to allow for multiple deployment scenarios where a dedicated service set can be defined and where the U2X AS and USS providing the UAV are the same or different entities.

- U2X 정책 (U2XP)은 PC5 기준점 (reference point) 또는 Uu 기준점 (reference point)을 통한 U2X 통신을 위한 UE에 구성 파라미터를 제공하기 위해 정의될 수 있다. 상기 구성 파라미터는 ME (Mobile Equipment)에서 사전 설정되거나, UICC (universal IC card)에 설정되거나, ME에 사전-설정되고 UICC에 설정되거나, PCF (policy control function) 및/또는 V1 기준점을 통해 U2X 어플리케이션 서버에 의해 제공/업데이트되거나, PCF에 의해 UE에 제공/업데이트될 수 있습니다. 여기서, UE는 PCF에 의해 제공/업데이트된 것, V1 참조점을 통해 U2X 어플리케이션 서버에 의해 제공/업데이트된 것, UICC에 구성된 것, ME에 사전 구성된 것 순서로 우선 순위에 따라 상기 U2X 정책을 고려할 필요가 있다. 충돌 방지 (De-conflicting) 정책은 충돌 제거를 위한 통신 모드 (유니캐스트 또는 브로드캐스트), 충돌 제거를 위한 통신 빈도 등을 나타내는 정책일 수 있다.- U2X policy (U2XP) can be defined to provide configuration parameters to UE for U2X communication via PC5 reference point or Uu reference point. The configuration parameters can be preset in ME (Mobile Equipment), set in UICC (universal IC card), pre-set in ME and set in UICC, provided/updated by U2X application server via PCF (policy control function) and/or V1 reference point, or provided/updated to UE by PCF. Here, UE needs to consider the U2X policies in priority order: provided/updated by PCF, provided/updated by U2X application server via V1 reference point, configured in UICC, and pre-configured in ME. De-conflicting policy can be a policy indicating communication mode for de-confliction (unicast or broadcast), communication frequency for de-confliction, etc.

- V2X와 마찬가지로 Tx 프로필 또는 NR Tx 프로필은 U2X 서비스 유형의 U2XP 매핑에 따라 결정될 수 있다.- As with V2X, the Tx profile or NR Tx profile can be determined based on the U2XP mapping of the U2X service type.

- UICC가 있는 UAV와 UICC가 없는 (즉, MNO에 가입하지 않은) UAV가 모두 지원될 수 있다. 여기서, UICC가 없는 UAV는 "E-UTRA에서 제공되지 않음" 및 "NR에서 제공되지 않음"으로 승인된 경우에만 U2X 통신을 수행할 수 있다.- Both UAVs with UICC and UAVs without UICC (i.e. not subscribed to MNO) can be supported. Here, UAVs without UICC can perform U2X communication only if they are approved as “Not provided in E-UTRA” and “Not provided in NR”.

- U2X 애플리케이션 서버 또는 PCF의 U2X 통신 파라미터들은 UAV-C UE를 통해 전달될 수 있다.- U2X communication parameters of the U2X application server or PCF can be transmitted via the UAV-C UE.

- V2X에 대한 기존 파라미터들 외에도, PC5 RAT(예: LTE PC5, NR PC5) 별 무선 파리미터로 지리적 영역, 고도 제한 및 유효 기간 타이머가 설정될 수 있다. 이와 같은 추가 정보/파라미터들은 UAV의 특정 위치에 따라 PC5 사용을 정책적으로 제어하기 위해 필요할 수 있다.- In addition to the existing parameters for V2X, the radio parameters for PC5 RAT (e.g. LTE PC5, NR PC5) can be set such as geographical area, altitude restriction and validity timer. Such additional information/parameters may be required to control PC5 usage policy-wise based on the specific location of the UAV.

- DAA/UAV 서비스 유형에 대한 정의는 상술한 소정의 시나리오 범위를 벗어날 수도 있다.- Definition of DAA/UAV service types may go beyond the scope of the given scenarios described above.

- UICC가 있는 UAV에서 BRID 및 DAA를 위한 PC5 기반 통신을 사용하려면 TS 23.256에 정의된 대로 UUAA 인증/승인이 성공적으로 이루어지고 U2XP를 통한 승인이 이루어져야 한다. 다만, 미국 연방항공청에서는 BRID 또는 DAA에 대한 PC5 사용에 대한 구체적인 승인을 요구하지 않는다. UICC가 없는 UAV의 경우, BRID 및 DAA를 위한 PC5 기반 통신의 사용은 U2XP에 의해서만 승인될 수 있다. 한편, U2X 서비스는 항공 애플리케이션을 위해 특별히 정의된 값에 따라 ITS-AID (ITS Application Identifier), PSID (Provider Service Identifier) 또는 AID(Application Identifier) 중 하나로 식별될 수 있다.- For UAVs with UICC, the use of PC5-based communications for BRID and DAA requires successful UUAA authentication/authorization as defined in TS 23.256 and authorization via U2XP. However, the FAA does not require specific authorization for the use of PC5 for BRID or DAA. For UAVs without UICC, the use of PC5-based communications for BRID and DAA can only be authorized via U2XP. Meanwhile, U2X services can be identified by one of the ITS Application Identifier (ITS-AID), the Provider Service Identifier (PSID), or the Application Identifier (AID), depending on values specifically defined for airborne applications.

- TS 23.287의 경우와 마찬가지로, PC5 기준점을 통한 브로드캐스트 U2X 통신에 대한 보안은 다른 SDO에서 개발된 U2X 애플리케이션 계층 체계에서 지원될 수 있다.- As in TS 23.287, security for broadcast U2X communications over the PC5 reference point can be supported in U2X application layer schemes developed in other SDOs.

도 18를 참조하면, PC5를 통한 U2X 통신을 위한 논-로밍 (Non-roaming) 5G 시스템 아키텍처 (Architecture)는 도 18에 도시된 바와 같이 구성될 수 있다. 여기서, PC5를 통한 U2X 통신을 위한 논-로밍 (Non-roaming) 5G 시스템 아키텍처 (Architecture)는 TS 23.287의 기준점 (reference point)이 적용될 수 있고, 다음과 같은 차이점이 있을 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 18, a non-roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communication via PC5 can be configured as illustrated in FIG. 18. Here, the non-roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communication via PC5 can be applied with the reference point of TS 23.287, and may have the following differences.

- U2X1: UE와 UAV-C 및 U2X 애플리케이션 서버의 U2X 애플리케이션 사이의 기준점으로써, 이 기준점은 상기 소정의 시나리오의 범위를 벗어날 수 있다.- U2X1: As a reference point between the U2X application of UE and UAV-C and U2X application server, this reference point may be outside the scope of the above given scenario.

- U2X5: UE 내 U2X 애플리케이션 간의 기준점으로써, 이 기준점은 소정의 시나리오의 릴리즈에서 특정/지정되지 않을 수 있다.- U2X5: As a reference point between U2X applications within the UE, this reference point may/may not be specified in the release of a given scenario.

- N1: N1 에 대한 TS 23.501에 정의된 관련 기능 외에도, U2X 서비스의 경우에 U2X 정책 및 파라미터(서비스 승인 포함)를 AMF 에서 UE 로 전달하고 UE 의 U2X 기능 및 U2X 정보를 위한 PC5 function들을 UE 에서 AMF로 전달하는 데에도 사용될 수 있다.- N1: In addition to the relevant functions defined in TS 23.501 for N1, it can also be used to convey U2X policies and parameters (including service authorization) from AMF to UE for U2X services, and PC5 functions for U2X capabilities and U2X information from UE to AMF.

- N2: N2에 대해 TS 23.501에 정의된 관련 기능 외에도 U2X 서비스의 경우에 U2X 정책 및 파라미터(서비스 승인 포함)를 AMF에서 NG-RAN으로 전달하는 데에도 사용될 수 있다.- N2: In addition to the relevant functions defined in TS 23.501 for N2, it can also be used to convey U2X policies and parameters (including service authorization) from AMF to NG-RAN for U2X services.

- 상술한 솔루션은 Uu 연결을 활용하는 UAV UE와 Uu 연결을 활용하지 않는 UAV UE (즉, Uu를 사용할 수 있거나 Uu를 사용하지 않는 UAV UE)를 지원할 수 있다. Uu 기능을 활용하지 않는 UAV는 BRID 및 DAA에 U2X를 사용할 수 있으며 3GPP의 범위를 벗어난 전송을 통해 U2X1을 통해 구성될 수 있다. 한편, Uu 능력 (capabilities) 활용 없는 UAV UE는 U2X 애플리케이션 서버에 의한 구성에 U2X1을 사용하고 3GPP에서 지정한 PC5 연결을 구현하므로 3GPP 에코시스템의 일부일 수 있다.- The above solution can support UAV UEs leveraging Uu connectivity and UAV UEs not leveraging Uu connectivity (i.e., Uu capable or non-Uu capable UAV UEs). UAVs not leveraging Uu capabilities can use U2X for BRID and DAA and can be configured over U2X1 for transmissions outside the scope of 3GPP. On the other hand, UAV UEs without leveraging Uu capabilities can be part of the 3GPP ecosystem as they use U2X1 for configuration by U2X application server and implement PC5 connectivity as specified by 3GPP.

PC5를 통한 U2X 통신을 위한 로밍 (roaming) 5G 시스템 아키텍처 (Architecture)는 도 19 및 도 20에 도시된 바와 같이 구성될 수 있다. 구체적으로, 도 19은 로컬 브레이크아웃 (local breakout) 시나리오에서 PC5를 통한 U2X 통신을 위한 로밍 5G 시스템 아키텍처를 도시하고, 도 20는 홈 라우팅 시나리오에서 PC5를 통한 U2X 통신을 위한 로밍 5G 시스템 아키텍처를 도시한다.A roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communications over PC5 can be configured as illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20. Specifically, FIG. 19 illustrates a roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communications over PC5 in a local breakout scenario, and FIG. 20 illustrates a roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communications over PC5 in a home routing scenario.

PC5 기준점을 통한 U2X 통신을 위한 PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) 간 5G 시스템 아키텍처는 다음과 같을 수 있다.A 5G system architecture between Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMNs) for U2X communications over PC5 reference points could be as follows.

- PC5 기준점을 통한 PLMN 간 U2X 통신의 경우, PC5 파라미터는 특정 지역 내의 UE 간에 일관된 방식으로 설정될 필요가 있다.- For inter-PLMN U2X communication via PC5 reference point, PC5 parameters need to be set in a consistent manner between UEs within a specific area.

- Inter-PLMN PC5 의 경우의 아키텍처는 도 18을 참조하여 설명한 PC5를 통한 U2X 통신을 위한 논-로밍 5G 시스템 아키텍처에 정의된 것과 유사할 수 있다.- The architecture for inter-PLMN PC5 may be similar to that defined in the non-roaming 5G system architecture for U2X communication over PC5 described with reference to Fig. 18.

U2X 통신을 위한 AF 기반 서비스 파라미터 프로비저닝 (provisioning)는 하기와 같이 정의될 수 있다.AF-based service parameter provisioning for U2X communication can be defined as follows.

- TS 23.287에 정의된 대로 5G 시스템은 PLMN의 NF와 U2X 어플리케이션 서버 간의 통신을 활성화하기 위해 NEF 서비스를 제공할 수 있다. 구체적으로, U2X 통신을 위한 AF 기반 서비스 파라미터 프로비저닝의 하이 레벨 뷰 (high level view)는 도 21에서 도시된 바와 같이 보여질 수 있다. 서비스 파라미터는 3GPP 범위를 벗어난 방법을 사용하여 UAV에서 사전 구성될 수도 있다 (예컨대, Uu 기능을 활용하지 않는 경우).- As defined in TS 23.287, a 5G system may provide NEF services to enable communication between a PLMN's NF and a U2X application server. Specifically, a high level view of AF-based service parameter provisioning for U2X communication may be illustrated as illustrated in Fig. 21. The service parameters may also be pre-configured in the UAV using methods outside the scope of 3GPP (e.g., when not utilizing Uu functionality).

U2X 시나리오에서는 하기와 같은 사항들이 고려될 수 있다.In a U2X scenario, the following may be considered:

- BRID를 위한 U2X의 사용/용도: BRID용 메시지 내용은 BRID에 대한 지역 규정 (예컨대, ASTM F3411.19 또는 ASD-STAN prEN 4709-002 P1의 메시지 세트)에 따라 정의될 수 있고, 선택적으로 규정 준수 문서 (compliance documents )의 지역 평균 (regional mean)에 따라 정의될 수 있다.- Usage/Usage of U2X for BRID: The message content for BRID can be defined according to regional regulations for BRID (e.g. message sets of ASTM F3411.19 or ASD-STAN prEN 4709-002 P1) and optionally according to regional means in compliance documents.

- DAA에 U2X 사용/용도: DAA용 메시지 내용은 DAA에 대한 지역 규정에 따라 정의되며 상술한 소정의 시나리오의 범위를 벗어날 수 있다.- Usage/Usage of U2X for DAA: Message content for DAA is defined by local regulations for DAA and may go beyond the scope of the given scenarios described above.

TS 23.287의 절차 및 메커니즘은 U2X 시나리오에 적용될 수 있다. 구체적으로, DAA 충돌 해소를 위해 PC5를 통한 브로드캐스트를 위한 절차는 도 22와 같이 수행될 수 있다. 한편, DAA 충돌 해소를 위해 PC5를 통한 브로드캐스트를 위한 절차는 UAV에 DAA 충돌 제거 정책 (예컨대 충돌 제거를 위한 유니캐스트 또는 브로드캐스트 통신, 통신 주파수)이 포함된 U2X 정책이 프로비저닝되어 있음이 전제될 수 있다. The procedures and mechanisms of TS 23.287 can be applied to U2X scenarios. Specifically, the procedure for broadcasting over PC5 for DAA collision resolution can be performed as shown in Fig. 22. Meanwhile, the procedure for broadcasting over PC5 for DAA collision resolution can be assumed that the UAV is provisioned with a U2X policy including a DAA collision resolution policy (e.g., unicast or broadcast communication for collision resolution, communication frequency).

구체적으로, 도 22에 따른 DAA 충돌 해소를 위해 PC5를 통한 브로드캐스트를 위한 절차는 하기와 같이 수행될 수 있다.Specifically, the procedure for broadcasting through PC5 for DAA collision resolution according to Fig. 22 can be performed as follows.

1. UAV1은 UAV2로부터 애플리케이션 계층 DAA 페이로드 (예컨대, CAA 레벨 UAV ID, UAV2의 USS 주소, 속도, 진행 방향, 위치 등)를 포함할 수 있는 브로드캐스트 메시지를 수신할 수 있다.1. UAV1 may receive a broadcast message from UAV2, which may include application layer DAA payload (e.g., CAA level UAV ID, USS address of UAV2, speed, heading, position, etc.).

- 참고 1: USS 주소 (Unmanned aerial system Traffic Management(UTM) Service Supplier address)는 UAV 간 충돌이 로컬에서 해결되는 경우에 필요하지 않지만, 충돌에 관련된 UAV의 USS 조정이 필요한 경우에는 필요할 수 있다.- Note 1: The Unmanned aerial system Traffic Management (UTM) Service Supplier address (USS) is not required if UAV-to-UAV collisions are resolved locally, but may be required if USS coordination of the UAVs involved in the collision is required.

2. UAV1이 상위 계층에 DAA 페이로드를 전달할 수 있다. 애플리케이션 레이어는 UAV2에서 수신한 브로드캐스트 메시지를 기반으로 자신의 궤적 및 위치와 비교하는 등의 방법으로 충돌을 감지할 수 있다. UAV1의 애플리케이션 레이어가 충돌을 감지하면 UAV2와 충돌 회피/충돌 해결 절차가 시작될 수 있다.2. UAV1 can deliver the DAA payload to the upper layer. The application layer can detect collisions by comparing its own trajectory and position with the broadcast message received from UAV2. When the application layer of UAV1 detects a collision, collision avoidance/collision resolution procedures can be initiated with UAV2.

3. 선택적으로 UAV1은 피어 UAV 2의 ID를 포함하여 감지된 충돌에 대해 자신의 USS (UTM Service Supplier)에 알릴 수 있다.3. Optionally, UAV1 can notify its USS (UTM Service Supplier) about the detected collision, including the ID of peer UAV 2.

4. UAV1은 애플리케이션 계층과 DAA 정책에서 수신된 입력을 기반으로 DAA 충돌 해제를 위한 통신 모드(브로드캐스트 또는 유니캐스트)를 선택할 수 있다. 브로드캐스트 충돌 해제 방법을 선택한 경우 UAV 간에 다음 메시지가 교환될 수 있다.4. UAV1 can select a communication mode (broadcast or unicast) for DAA de-collision based on inputs received from the application layer and DAA policy. If the broadcast de-collision method is selected, the following messages can be exchanged between UAVs.

5. UAV1은 메시지(예컨대, PC5-S 메시지)를 브로드캐스트하며(예컨대, 충돌 해제 요청 메시지), U2X 기능의 일부이며 UAV가 프로토콜, DAA 충돌 해제 정책 (브로드캐스트 기반, 충돌 해제 메시지 주파수), 충돌 감지 경고, 해당 CAA 레벨 UAV ID와 다른 충돌 감지된 다른 UAV의 ID, 특정 파라미터 (예컨대, 충돌 해제 정보)를 위한 통신에 참여할 수 있는지를 나타내는 DAA 기능을 포함할 수 있다 (예컨대, 충돌을 피하기 위한 궤적 보정 정보). (UAV1 broadcasts a message (e.g. PC5-S message), e.g. deconfliction request message and may include DAA capability, which is part of U2X capability and indicates whether the UAV is able to engage in communication for deconflicting protocol, DAA deconflicting policy (broadcast based, deconflicting message frequency), collision detection alert, its CAA-level UAV IDs and the one(s) from other detected conflicting UAV(s), and deconflicting specific parameters (e.g. trajectory correction information to avoid collision))5. UAV1 broadcasts a message (e.g., PC5-S message) (e.g., de-collision request message), which is part of the U2X functionality and may include DAA functionality indicating whether the UAV can participate in communication for protocol, DAA de-collision policy (broadcast based, de-collision message frequency), collision detection warning, ID of other UAVs detected in collision different from that of the corresponding CAA level UAV ID, and certain parameters (e.g., de-collision information) (e.g., trajectory correction information to avoid collision). (UAV1 broadcasts a message (e.g. PC5-S message), e.g. deconfliction request message and may include DAA capability, which is part of U2X capability and indicates whether the UAV is able to engage in communication for deconflicting protocol, DAA deconflicting policy (broadcast based, deconflicting message frequency), collision detection alert, its CAA-level UAV IDs and the one(s) from other detected conflicting UAV(s), and deconflicting specific parameters (e.g. trajectory correction information to avoid collision))

6. UAV2는 메시지 (예컨대, PC5-S 메시지)를 브로드캐스트하여 합의된 DAA 충돌 제거 정책, 업데이트된 궤적 및 기타 정보(예: 메시지 충돌 제거 상태 응답, 충돌 해결 경고, 수신 UAV로부터 참여 UAV의 CAA 수준 UAV ID)를 제공할 수 있다. 합의된 메시지 빈도에 따라 트래픽 충돌 해결 (예컨대, 상호 위치/궤적 모니터링)에 도달할 때까지 UAV 간에 후속 브로드캐스트 메시지가 교환될 수 있습니다.6. UAV2 may broadcast a message (e.g., PC5-S message) to provide the agreed upon DAA conflict resolution policy, updated trajectory, and other information (e.g., message conflict resolution status response, conflict resolution warning, CAA-level UAV ID of participating UAV from receiving UAV). Subsequent broadcast messages may be exchanged between UAVs until traffic conflict resolution (e.g., mutual position/trajectory monitoring) is reached, depending on the agreed upon message frequency.

상술한 U2X와 관련된 서비스, 엔티티 및 인터페이스에 미치는 영향은 하기의 표 8 및 표 9과 같을 수 있다.The impact on services, entities, and interfaces related to the U2X described above may be as shown in Tables 8 and 9 below.

1. UE: In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the UE may support the following functions:
- Report the U2X Capability (including DAA Capability) and PC5 Capability for U2X to 5GC over N1 reference point.
- Indicate U2X Policy Provisioning Request in UE Policy Container for UE triggered U2X Policy provisioning.
- Receive the U2X parameters from 5GC over N1 reference point.
- Procedures for U2X communication over PC5 reference point.
- Configuration of parameters for U2X communication. These parameters can be pre-configured in the UE, or, if in coverage, provisioned or updated by signalling over the N1 reference point from the PCF in the HPLMN or over U2X1 reference point from the U2X Application Server.
2. AMF: In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the AMF performs the following functions:
- Obtain from UDM the subscription information related to U2X and store them as part of the UE context data.
- Select a PCF supporting U2X Policy/Parameter provisioning and report the PC5 Capability for U2X to the selected PCF.
- Obtain from PCF the PC5 QoS information related to U2X and store it as part of the UE context data.
- Provision the NG-RAN with indication about the UE authorization status about U2X communication over PC5 reference point.
- Provision the NG-RAN with PC5 QoS parameters related to U2X communication.
- PCF: In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the PCF includes the functions described in 23.287 to provision the UE and AMF with necessary parameters in order to use U2X communication.
- UDM: Subscription management for U2X communication over PC5 reference point. The UE subscription data types are extended according to the following table 6.
3. U2X Application Server: implements a subset of the V2X AS functionality specified in TS 23.287:
- includes AF functionality, and may support at least the following capabilities:
- For U2X service parameters provisioning, the U2X AS provides the 5GC and the UAV UE (possibly via the UAVC) with parameters for U2X communications over PC5 and Uu reference points.
- UDR: In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the UDR stores U2X service parameters.
- NRF: In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the NRF performs PCF discovery by considering U2X capability.
- NEF: for U2X AS, the NEF supports U2X service parameters.
1. UE: In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the UE may support the following functions:
- Report the U2X Capability (including DAA Capability) and PC5 Capability for U2X to 5GC over N1 reference point.
- Indicate U2X Policy Provisioning Request in UE Policy Container for UE triggered U2X Policy provisioning.
- Receive the U2X parameters from 5GC over N1 reference point.
- Procedures for U2X communication over PC5 reference point.
- Configuration of parameters for U2X communication. These parameters can be pre-configured in the UE, or, if in coverage, provisioned or updated by signaling over the N1 reference point from the PCF in the HPLMN or over U2X1 reference point from the U2X Application Server.
2. AMF: In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the AMF performs the following functions:
- Obtain from UDM the subscription information related to U2X and store them as part of the UE context data.
- Select a PCF supporting U2X Policy/Parameter provisioning and report the PC5 Capability for U2X to the selected PCF.
- Obtain from PCF the PC5 QoS information related to U2X and store it as part of the UE context data.
- Provision the NG-RAN with indication about the UE authorization status about U2X communication over PC5 reference point.
- Provision the NG-RAN with PC5 QoS parameters related to U2X communication.
- PCF: In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the PCF includes the functions described in 23.287 to provision the UE and AMF with necessary parameters in order to use U2X communication.
- UDM: Subscription management for U2X communication over PC5 reference point. The UE subscription data types are extended according to the following table 6.
3. U2X Application Server: implements a subset of the V2X AS functionality specified in TS 23.287:
- includes AF functionality, and may support at least the following capabilities:
- For U2X service parameters provisioning, the U2X AS provides the 5GC and the UAV UE (possibly via the UAVC) with parameters for U2X communications over PC5 and Uu reference points.
- UDR: In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the UDR stores U2X service parameters.
- NRF: In addition to the functions defined in TS 23.501, the NRF performs PCF discovery by considering U2X capability.
- NEF: for U2X AS, the NEF supports U2X service parameters.

U2X Subscription data U2X Subscription data NR U2X Services AuthorizationNR U2X Services Authorization Indicates whether the UE is authorized to use the NR sidelink for U2X services as UAV UE, UAV-C UE, or Authority UE.Indicates whether the UE is authorized to use the NR sidelink for U2X services as UAV UE, UAV-C UE, or Authority UE. LTE U2X Services AuthorizationLTE U2X Services Authorization Indicates whether the UE is authorized to use the LTE sidelink for U2X services as UAV UE, UAV-C UE, or Authority UE.Indicates whether the UE is authorized to use the LTE sidelink for U2X services as UAV UE, UAV-C UE, or Authority UE. NR UE-PC5-AMBRNR UE-PC5-AMBR AMBR of UE's NR sidelink (i.e. PC5) communication for U2X services.AMBR of UE's NR sidelink (i.e. PC5) communication for U2X services. LTE UE-PC5-AMBRLTE UE-PC5-AMBR AMBR of UE's LTE sidelink (i.e. PC5) communication for U2X services.AMBR of UE's LTE sidelink (i.e. PC5) communication for U2X services.

또한, 상술한 소정의 시나리오와 관련하여 최근에 논의된 사항은 하기의 표 10과 같다.Additionally, the recently discussed issues related to the above-mentioned given scenario are as shown in Table 10 below.

Measurement Reporting
- Use LTE principle as a baseline, introduce similar event H1 (aerial UE height become higher than threshold) and H2 (aerial UE height become lower than threshold. FFS if further NR enhancements are needed. FFS study scaling of RRM parameters (e.g. which parameters and what is the purpose/benefit of the scaling and how)
-- FFS how to limit excessive measurements and measurement reporting.
-- FFS if user consent is needed for location reporting in CONNECTED
-- FFS study the vertical movement and associated mobility for UAV UEs
- Rel-18 NR supports reporting of UAV UE's height, location and velocity. It is for further study what accuracy and reporting mechanisms are required and if further enhancements are needed.
- As in LTE, flight path plan reporting will be introduced. Location list of waypoints (3D location information) and timestamp is adopted as the basic content of flight path report. FFS if timestamp is mandatory or optional for NR. FFS if further enhancements are needed.
- Introduce similar functionality to LTE (numberofTriggeringCells). FFS whether numberoftriggerbeams for NR is required or other enhancements. FFS study how to avoid sending the measurement reports mainly due to reportOnLeave.
- A waypoint is a planned location for the UE along the flight path and is described via the existing parameter type LocationCoordinates defined in TS 37.355.
- A timestamp provides the UTC time associated with estimated time of arrival to a waypoint as baseline. FFS on granularity.
- No requirements are placed on spatial distribution of waypoints.
- A UE indicates whether flight plan information is available within the RRCReconfigurationComplete, RRCReestablishmentComplete, RRCResumeComplete, or RRCSetupComplete message. Flight path reporting uses at the UE Information request/response procedure as baseline.
- UE indicates to the network a new flight path is available in the UE (whether it is initial or update). Then, reuse the normal request/response procedure of flight path report.
- UAI message can also be used to indicate the UE has flight path availability.
- FFS whether and what triggering conditions are specified for flight update. FFS The maximum number of waypoints within flight path plan is left FFS.
- When event H1 or H2 triggers, the content of the measurement report is configurable by the network (i.e. it can contain UAV UEs height, location information and/or RSRP/RSRQ measurement results). FFS whether UAV UE's height is mandatorily reported and which parameter/IE is used for height reporting
- Joint use of height-dependent condition and RSRP/RSRQ/SINR-based condition for measurement report triggering is supported in NR Rel-18 UAV. The combination of existing events will be used.
- Height-dependent parameter scaling is not supported as a part of Rel-18 NR
- Do not extend the Number of triggering cells mechanism to apply to the inter-RAT scenario, i.e. event B1 and B2 triggering.
- Do not restrict the applicability of Number of triggering cells mechanism to FR1 only. In other words, the Number of triggering cells mechanism is applicable to FR1 and FR2 (up to network configuration).
- The UE shall not ignore or bypass the Number of triggering cells mechanism, once configured.
- Do not introduce the use of a "numberOfTriggeringBeams" mechanism.
- Do not introduce an alternative mechanism to the Number of triggering cells mechanism.
- Do not introduce an additional mechanism based on Number of changed cells.
- For the purpose of interference control (i.e. for number of trigger cells), do not introduce a prohibit timer mechanism.
- Report on leave is not triggered by a cell that was not previously included in the measurement report for the number of triggering cell.
- Support configuring height-dependent more-than-one configurations targeting measurement and measurement reporting enhancement. UE applies corresponding configuration based on the UE height. The proposed solutions should aim at avoiding RAN4 impacts. FFS how this would be configured (i.e. different MO configurations or different parameters FFS Exact parameters and details.
- Height-dependent more-than-one configurations is supported on parameter/field level (i.e. different fields/values within the same MO) where different values (or value ranges) of the parameter/field applies to different height or height range.
- For MO configuration parameters: at least the following will have ability to be configured with height-dependent more-than-one configurations/values, each for a specific height region: SSB-ToMeasure. Details on how to specify is FFS. FFS on UE behavior on L1 and L3 measurement.
- For MR configuration parameters: at least the following will have ability to be configured with height-dependent more-than-one configurations/values, each for a specific height region: Event A4 threshold and numberoftriggeringcells. Details on how to specify is FFS (i.e. maybe it can be achieved by combination of events).
- When height-dependent more-than-one configurations are provided, UE applies the new value once it moves to new height (or height range) similar to the case of RRC reconfiguration. Need Codes, field descriptions, etc. as in legacy specifications apply.
- If a height-specific value is not explicitly configured for certain height, whether to keep using the value that was used or consider the parameter as released (i.e. parameter/value not applicable at this height) should be looked into case by case, and can be clarified by need code, field description, or procedural text as needed. FFS details.
Measurement Reporting
- Use LTE principle as a baseline, introduce similar event H1 (aerial UE height become higher than threshold) and H2 (aerial UE height become lower than threshold. FFS if further NR enhancements are needed. FFS study scaling of RRM parameters (eg which parameters and what is the purpose/benefit of the scaling and how)
-- FFS how to limit excessive measurements and measurement reporting.
-- FFS if user consent is needed for location reporting in CONNECTED
-- FFS study the vertical movement and associated mobility for UAV UEs
- Rel-18 NR supports reporting of UAV UE's height, location and velocity. It is for further study what accuracy and reporting mechanisms are required and if further enhancements are needed.
- As in LTE, flight path plan reporting will be introduced. Location list of waypoints (3D location information) and timestamp is adopted as the basic content of flight path report. FFS if timestamp is mandatory or optional for NR. FFS if further enhancements are needed.
- Introduce similar functionality to LTE (numberofTriggeringCells). FFS whether numberoftriggerbeams for NR is required or other enhancements. FFS study how to avoid sending the measurement reports mainly due to reportOnLeave.
- A waypoint is a planned location for the UE along the flight path and is described via the existing parameter type LocationCoordinates defined in TS 37.355.
- A timestamp provides the UTC time associated with estimated time of arrival to a waypoint as baseline. FFS on granularity.
- No requirements are placed on spatial distribution of waypoints.
- A UE indicates whether flight plan information is available within the RRCReconfigurationComplete, RRCReestablishmentComplete, RRCResumeComplete, or RRCSetupComplete message. Flight path reporting uses at the UE Information request/response procedure as baseline.
- UE indicates to the network a new flight path is available in the UE (whether it is initial or update). Then, reuse the normal request/response procedure of flight path report.
- UAI message can also be used to indicate the UE has flight path availability.
- FFS whether and what triggering conditions are specified for flight update. FFS The maximum number of waypoints within flight path plan is left FFS.
- When event H1 or H2 triggers, the content of the measurement report is configurable by the network (ie it can contain UAV UEs height, location information and/or RSRP/RSRQ measurement results). FFS whether UAV UE's height is mandatorily reported and which parameter/IE is used for height reporting
- Joint use of height-dependent condition and RSRP/RSRQ/SINR-based condition for measurement report triggering is supported in NR Rel-18 UAV. The combination of existing events will be used.
- Height-dependent parameter scaling is not supported as a part of Rel-18 NR
- Do not extend the Number of triggering cells mechanism to apply to the inter-RAT scenario, ie event B1 and B2 triggering.
- Do not restrict the applicability of Number of triggering cells mechanism to FR1 only. In other words, the Number of triggering cells mechanism is applicable to FR1 and FR2 (up to network configuration).
- The UE shall not ignore or bypass the Number of triggering cells mechanism, once configured.
- Do not introduce the use of a "numberOfTriggeringBeams" mechanism.
- Do not introduce an alternative mechanism to the Number of triggering cells mechanism.
- Do not introduce an additional mechanism based on Number of changed cells.
- For the purpose of interference control (ie for number of trigger cells), do not introduce a prohibit timer mechanism.
- Report on leave is not triggered by a cell that was not previously included in the measurement report for the number of triggering cell.
- Support configuring height-dependent more-than-one configurations targeting measurement and measurement reporting enhancement. UE applies corresponding configuration based on the UE height. The proposed solutions should aim at avoiding RAN4 impacts. FFS how this would be configured (ie different MO configurations or different parameters FFS Exact parameters and details.
- Height-dependent more-than-one configurations is supported on parameter/field level (ie different fields/values within the same MO) where different values (or value ranges) of the parameter/field applies to different height or height range.
- For MO configuration parameters: at least the following will have ability to be configured with height-dependent more-than-one configurations/values, each for a specific height region: SSB-ToMeasure. Details on how to specify is FFS. FFS on UE behavior on L1 and L3 measurement.
- For MR configuration parameters: at least the following will have ability to be configured with height-dependent more-than-one configurations/values, each for a specific height region: Event A4 threshold and numberoftriggeringcells. Details on how to specify is FFS (ie maybe it can be by combination of events).
- When height-dependent more-than-one configurations are provided, UE applies the new value once it moves to new height (or height range) similar to the case of RRC reconfiguration. Need Codes, field descriptions, etc. as in legacy specifications apply.
- If a height-specific value is not explicitly configured for certain height, whether to keep using the value that was used or consider the parameter as released (ie parameter/value not applicable at this height) should be looked into case by case, and can be clarified by need code, field description, or procedural text as needed. FFS details.

이하에서는, UAV UE가 relay UE를 선택하는 경우 사용될 수 있는 criteria에 대해서 자세히 설명한다.Below, we describe in detail the criteria that can be used when a UAV UE selects a relay UE.

UAV 리모트 UE를 위한 후보 릴레이 UE 선택 방법Candidate Relay UE Selection Method for UAV Remote UE

UAV 리모트 UE는 일반 리모트 UE가 릴레이 UE를 선택하는 것과는 다른 기준(criteria)으로 UAV 릴레이 UE를 선택하는 것이 요구될 수도 있다. 여기서, UAV 리모트 UE가 선택하는 릴레이 UE는 UAV UE거나 다른 UE일 수 있다. 이하에서는, 설명의 편의상 UAV 리모트 UE가 릴레이 통신을 위해 선택하는 UE를 UAV 릴레이 UE 또는 릴레이 UE로 설명한다.A UAV remote UE may be required to select a UAV relay UE based on criteria different from those used by a general remote UE to select a relay UE. Here, the relay UE selected by the UAV remote UE may be a UAV UE or another UE. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, a UE selected by the UAV remote UE for relay communication is described as a UAV relay UE or relay UE.

UAV UE는 비행 경로 (flight path)를 (주기적으로) 기지국 (및/또는, Core Network; CN)에 보고할 수 있다 (UAV UE에 대한 규정임). 여기서, 비행 경로 값은 UAV의 네비게이션 (navigation) 값이 될 수 있으며, UAV UE가 목적지까지 도달하는 예상 경로와 관련된 값들이 포함될 수 있다.A UAV UE may (periodically) report its flight path to a base station (and/or a Core Network; CN) (as specified for UAV UE). Here, the flight path value may be a navigation value of the UAV, and may include values related to the expected path along which the UAV UE will reach the destination.

UAV 리모트 UE가 후보 릴레이 UE의 L2 ID를 기지국에 보고할 경우, 기지국은 후보 릴레이 UE의 비행 경로와 UAV 리모트 UE의 비행 경로를 비교 (방향, 속도, 높이, 위치 등의 측면에서) 할 수 있다. 이 경우, 기지국은 상기 UAV 리모트 UE의 비행 경로와 유사한 비행 경로를 갖는 릴레이 UE를 선택할 수 있고, 상기 UAV 릴레이 UE와 선택된 릴레이 UE 간의 (SL) 연결을 설정할 수 있다. 이를 위해, 후보 릴레이 UE는 디스커버리 메시지 (discovery message)를 전송할 경우에 사용한 L2 소스 ID를 기지국에 보고할 필요가 있다 (여기서, 모든 릴레이 UE는 RRC CONNECTED 상태로 가정할 수도 있음).When the UAV remote UE reports the L2 ID of the candidate relay UE to the base station, the base station can compare (in terms of direction, speed, height, position, etc.) the flight path of the candidate relay UE with the flight path of the UAV remote UE. In this case, the base station can select a relay UE having a similar flight path to the flight path of the UAV remote UE, and establish a (SL) connection between the UAV relay UE and the selected relay UE. To this end, the candidate relay UE needs to report the L2 source ID used when transmitting the discovery message to the base station (here, all relay UEs may be assumed to be in RRC CONNECTED state).

또는, UAV 리모트 UE는 유사한 비행 경로를 갖는 후보 릴레이 UE만을 보고/선택할 수도 있다. 예컨대, UAV 리모트 UE는 자신의 비행 경로와 방향, 속도, 높이, 위치 등의 측면에서 정해진 오프셋 (offset) 내에 속하는 비행 경로를 갖는 후보 릴레이 UE를 선택하여 기지국에 보고할 수 있다. 이를 위해, 후보 릴레이 UE는 자신의 비행 경로를 포함하는 디스커버리 메시지를 전송할 수도 있다. 다만, 모든 비행 경로가 공유되는 경우에 보안 (security) 문제가 발생할 수도 있는바, 후보 릴레이 UE는 자신의 비행 경로 중 일부만을 상기 디스커버리 메시지를 통해 공유할 수 있다. 예컨대, 후보 릴레이 UE는 자신의 현재 위치에서 몇 개의 way point만을 상기 디스커버리 메시지를 통해 공유하도록 설정되거나, 소정의 시간 단위 내의 비행 경로 (예컨대, 몇 초/분 이내의 비행 경로)만을 상기 디스커버리 메시지를 통해 공유하도록 설정될 수 있다. 이와 같은 비행 경로에 대한 정보가 디스커버리 메시지에 포함되면, UAV 리모트 UE는 자신의 비행 경로 값과 디스커버리 메시지에 포함된 비행 경로의 값을 비교할 수 있고, 비교 결과 비행 경로 값이 미리 설정된 오프셋 이내인 적어도 하나의 릴레이 UE를 후보 릴레이 UE로 선택하고, 선택된 후보 릴레이 UE를 기지국에 보고할 수 있다.Alternatively, the UAV remote UE may report/select only candidate relay UEs having similar flight paths. For example, the UAV remote UE may select and report to the base station a candidate relay UE having a flight path that is within a predetermined offset in terms of direction, speed, height, position, etc. from its own flight path. To this end, the candidate relay UE may transmit a discovery message including its own flight path. However, since a security issue may arise when all flight paths are shared, the candidate relay UE may share only a part of its flight paths via the discovery message. For example, the candidate relay UE may be configured to share only a few way points from its current location via the discovery message, or may be configured to share only a flight path within a predetermined time unit (e.g., a flight path within a few seconds/minutes) via the discovery message. When information about such a flight path is included in a discovery message, the UAV remote UE can compare its own flight path value with the value of the flight path included in the discovery message, select at least one relay UE whose flight path value is within a preset offset as a candidate relay UE as a result of the comparison, and report the selected candidate relay UE to the base station.

또는, UAV 리모트 UE는 높이(및/또는, 높이 범위)에 따라 보고/선택할 수 있는 후보 릴레이 UE의 개수가 상이하게 설정될 수도 있다. 예컨대, UAV 리모트 UE의 고도가 높아질수록 gNB로부터의 신호 세기가 감소하고 다른 gNB의 신호에 의해 발생하는 간섭 (interference)이 커질 수 있다. 이 경우, UAV 리모트 UE는 소정의 고도 이상일 경우에 한 개 이상의 릴레이 UE (또는, 복수의 릴레이 UE)와 연결이 필요할 수도 있다. 따라서, UAV 리모트 UE는 자신의 높이/고도에 따라 보고/선택할 수 있는 릴레이 UE의 수가 상이하게 설정될 필요가 있다.Alternatively, the UAV remote UE may be configured to have a different number of candidate relay UEs to report/select depending on its height (and/or height range). For example, as the altitude of the UAV remote UE increases, the signal strength from the gNB may decrease and interference caused by signals from other gNBs may increase. In this case, the UAV remote UE may need to connect to one or more relay UEs (or multiple relay UEs) when it is above a certain altitude. Therefore, the UAV remote UE needs to have a different number of relay UEs to report/select depending on its height/altitude.

또는, gNB는 UAV 리모트 UE에게 선택할 수 있는 릴레이 UE의 높이 (및/또는 높이 범위)를 설정 받을 수 있다. 예컨대, UAV 리모트 UE의 (서빙) gNB는 후보 릴레이 UE로 보고할 높이 범위를 설정할 수 있다. 이 경우, UAV 리모트 UE는 해당된 높이 범위 내에 존재하는 릴레이 UE만을 후보 릴레이 UE로 선택하여 상기 (서빙) gNB에 보고할 수 있다. 이는, gNB가 현재 리모트 UE의 높이에서 (서빙) 릴레이 UE로 동작하기에 적당하다고 판단되는 후보 릴레이 UE의 높이 범위를 용이하게 판단할 수 있기 때문이다. 이를 통해, 릴레이 UE를 통한 커버리지 확장 (coverage extension) 효과를 최대화할 수 있다.Alternatively, the gNB may be configured with a height (and/or height range) of selectable relay UEs by the UAV remote UE. For example, the (serving) gNB of the UAV remote UE may configure a height range to be reported as a candidate relay UE. In this case, the UAV remote UE may select only relay UEs existing within the corresponding height range as candidate relay UEs and report them to the (serving) gNB. This is because the gNB can easily determine a height range of candidate relay UEs that are deemed suitable to operate as a (serving) relay UE from the height of the current remote UE. This allows the coverage extension effect via the relay UE to be maximized.

또는, UAV 리모트 UE가 리모트 UE로 동작할지 여부 및/또는 UAV 릴레이 UE가 릴레이 UE로 동작할지 여부는 높이 범위에 따라 상이하게 설정될 수 있다. 예컨대, UAV 리모트 UE는 (설정된) 특정 높이 범위 내에 위치할 경우에 리모트 UE로 동작하는 것이 허용될 수 있다. 또는, UAV 리모트 UE는 상기 특정 높이를 벗어난 경우에 리모트 UE로 동작하는 것이 허용될 수 있다. UAV 릴레이 UE도 (설정된) 특정 높이 범위 내에 위치할 경우에 릴레이 UE로 동작하는 것이 허용되거나, 상기 특정 높이를 벗어난 경우에 릴레이 UE로 동작하는 것이 허용될 수 있다. Alternatively, whether the UAV remote UE operates as a remote UE and/or whether the UAV relay UE operates as a relay UE may be configured differently depending on the height range. For example, the UAV remote UE may be allowed to operate as a remote UE when it is located within a (configured) specific height range. Or, the UAV remote UE may be allowed to operate as a remote UE when it is outside the specific height range. The UAV relay UE may also be allowed to operate as a relay UE when it is located within a (configured) specific height range, or may be allowed to operate as a relay UE when it is outside the specific height range.

또는, UAV 리모트 UE가 군집 주행을 하는 경우, UAV 리모트 UE는 군집 내에서만 릴레이 UE를 선택할 수 있다. 이 경우, 후보 릴레이 UE가 전송하는 디스커버리 메시지에는 군집을 나타낼 수 있는 ID가 더 포함될 수 있다. 동일 군집에 속하는 UAV 리모트 UE는 군집 ID가 동일한 후보 릴레이 UE만을 선택하거나, 선택된 후보 릴레이 UE를 기지국에 보고하도록 릴레이 UE의 선택/보고 동작이 제한/한정될 수 있다.Alternatively, when the UAV remote UE drives in a cluster, the UAV remote UE may select a relay UE only within the cluster. In this case, the discovery message transmitted by the candidate relay UE may further include an ID that may indicate the cluster. The UAV remote UE belonging to the same cluster may select only candidate relay UEs having the same cluster ID, or the selection/reporting operation of the relay UE may be restricted/limited so that the relay UE reports the selected candidate relay UE to the base station.

또는, UAV 리모트 UE가 후보 릴레이 UE를 선정하는 경우, UAV 리모트 UE는 자신과 릴레이 UE 사이의 신호 세기(SD-RSRP/SL-RSRP)가 정해진 임계 세기 이상인 후보 릴레이 UE로 선택할 수 있도록 한정될 수 있다. 및/또는, UAV 리모트 UE는 특정 영역에 존재하는 릴레이 UE만을 후보 릴레이 UE로 선택할 수도 있다. 예컨대, UAV 리모트 UE는 자신의 위치 값을 기준으로 특정 반경(/3차원 공간) 내에 속하는 릴레이 UE만을 후보 릴레이 UE로 보고/선택할 수도 있다. 또는, UAV 리모트 UE에 대해 후보 릴레이 UE를 선택할 수 있는 특정 (3D 위치) 영역이 설정될 수 있고, UAV 리모트 UE는 상기 설정된 특정 영역에 속하는 릴레이 UE들 중에서만 후보 릴레이 UE를 선택할 수도 있다. 이는, 릴레이 UE가 존재하는 특정 영역을 따로 설정/지정 함으로써 상기 특정 영역에서만 릴레이 통신을 통한 리모트 UE의 저전력 동작을 수행하는 것을 허용하기 위함일 수 있다.Alternatively, when the UAV remote UE selects a candidate relay UE, the UAV remote UE may be limited to selecting a candidate relay UE in which the signal strength (SD-RSRP/SL-RSRP) between itself and the relay UE is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold strength. And/or, the UAV remote UE may select only relay UEs existing in a specific area as candidate relay UEs. For example, the UAV remote UE may report/select only relay UEs belonging to a specific radius (/3D space) based on its position value as candidate relay UEs. Alternatively, a specific (3D location) area from which candidate relay UEs can be selected may be set for the UAV remote UE, and the UAV remote UE may select candidate relay UEs only from among relay UEs belonging to the set specific area. This may be to allow low-power operation of the remote UE through relay communication to be performed only in the specific area by separately setting/designating a specific area in which the relay UE exists.

또는, UAV 리모트 UE는 적어도 하나의 후보 릴레이 UE를 자신의 서빙 기지국에 보고할 수 있다. 이 경우, 기지국은 보고된 적어도 하나의 후보 릴레이 UE 중 하나의 릴레이 UE를 선택하고, 상기 리모트 UE에게 선택된 하나의 릴레이 UE와 SL 연결/릴레이 연결을 맺도록 설정할 수 있다. 또는, UAV 리모트 UE는 적어도 하나의 후보 릴레이 UE 중에서 소정의 기준을 만족하는 하나의 릴레이 UE와 SL 연결/릴레이을 맺고, 상기 하나의 릴레이 UE를 통해 기지국과 연결되는 연결 (즉, 간접 링크)를 맺어 상기 기지국과의 메시지를 송수신할 수도 있다.Alternatively, the UAV remote UE may report at least one candidate relay UE to its serving base station. In this case, the base station may select one of the reported at least one candidate relay UE, and configure the remote UE to establish an SL connection/relay connection with the selected one. Alternatively, the UAV remote UE may establish an SL connection/relay with one relay UE that satisfies a predetermined criterion among the at least one candidate relay UE, and establish a connection (i.e., an indirect link) with the base station through the one relay UE to transmit and receive messages with the base station.

이와 같이, 제안 발명은 지상의 기존 리모트 UE와는 상이한 UAV의 특성을 고려한 UAV 리모트 UE가 릴레이 UE를 선택하는 기준을 정의함으로써, UAV 리모트 UE가 보다 효과적으로 릴레이 통신을 수행하는 것을 보장할 수 있다.In this way, the proposed invention can ensure that the UAV remote UE performs relay communication more effectively by defining criteria for selecting a relay UE by a UAV remote UE that takes into account the characteristics of the UAV that are different from those of existing remote UEs on the ground.

한편, 상술한 제안 발명에서 릴레이 UE는 gNB, IAB-node 등으로 확장 해석 될 수 있음은 당연하다.Meanwhile, it is obvious that the relay UE in the above-described proposed invention can be expanded to include gNB, IAB-node, etc.

도 23은 단말이 릴레이 단말을 선택하는 방법을 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figure 23 is a drawing for explaining how a terminal selects a relay terminal.

도 23을 참조하면, 상기 단말은 릴레이 단말을 통한 릴레이 통신을 수행하기 위한 릴레이 설정 정보를 기지국으로부터 수신할 수 있다 (S231). 여기서, 상기 단말 및 릴레이 단말은 "UAV 리모트 UE를 위한 후보 릴레이 UE 선택 방법"에서 설명한 바와 같이 비지상 (Non-terrestrial) 단말인 UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) 단말일 수 있다. 즉, 상기 단말은 지상 단말과 달리 일정 고도 이상에서 이동하는 단말일 수 있고, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 기존 릴레이 단말의 선택 방법과 상이한 선택 기준에 대한 설정들을 포함할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 23, the terminal may receive relay setting information for performing relay communication through a relay terminal from a base station (S231). Here, the terminal and the relay terminal may be a UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) terminal, which is a non-terrestrial terminal, as described in “Candidate Relay UE Selection Method for UAV Remote UE”. That is, the terminal may be a terminal moving at a certain altitude or higher, unlike a ground terminal, and the relay setting information may include settings for selection criteria that are different from a selection method of an existing relay terminal.

다음으로, 상기 단말은 복수의 릴레이 단말들로부터 디스커버리 메시지들을 수신할 수 있다 (S233). 여기서, 상기 디스커버리 메시지는 상기 릴레이 단말의 식별 정보, 상기 릴레이 단말이 속한 군집 정보, 상기 릴레이 단말의 비행 경로, 상기 릴레이 단말의 고도/높이 정보 및 상기 릴레이 단말의 위치 정보 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다.Next, the terminal may receive discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals (S233). Here, the discovery message may include at least one of identification information of the relay terminal, cluster information to which the relay terminal belongs, a flight path of the relay terminal, altitude/height information of the relay terminal, and location information of the relay terminal.

또는, 상기 단말은 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 릴레이 통신을 위한 상기 디스커버리 메시지의 수신 여부를 결정할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 리모트 단말의 동작 수행이 허용되는 허용 조건에 대한 정보가 더 포함될 수 있다. 여기서, 허용 조건은 특정 높이 범위에 대한 정보일 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 단말은 자신의 높이가 상기 특정 높이 범위 내에 위치하는 경우에 상기 릴레이 통신을 위해 상기 디스커버리 메시지/신호를 수신하는 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 또는, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보에 상기 릴레이 통신이 제한되는 특정 높이 범위에 대한 정보를 더 포함된 경우, 상기 단말은 상기 특정 높이 범위 내에 위치하지 않을 경우에만 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 상기 디스커버리 메시지/신호를 수신하는 동작을 수행할 수 있다. Alternatively, the terminal may determine whether to receive the discovery message for relay communication based on the configuration information. For example, the relay configuration information may further include information on an allowance condition under which the remote terminal is permitted to perform an operation. Here, the allowance condition may be information on a specific height range. For example, the terminal may perform an operation of receiving the discovery message/signal for the relay communication when its own height is located within the specific height range. Alternatively, if the relay configuration information further includes information on a specific height range to which the relay communication is restricted, the terminal may perform an operation of receiving the discovery message/signal for the relay communication only when it is not located within the specific height range.

또는, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 릴레이 단말의 동작이 허용되는 특정 높이 범위에 대한 정보를 더 포함할 수 있다. 이 경우, 단말은 상기 특정 높이 범위 내에 위치할 경우에만 릴레이 단말로써 동작할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 단말은 상기 특정 높이 범위 내에 위치할 경우에만 상기 디스커버리 메시지를 전송할 수 있다. 또는, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 상기 릴레이 단말의 동작이 제한되는 특정 높이 범위에 대한 정보를 더 포함할 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 특정 높이 범위 내에 위치하지 않은 단말은 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 디스커버리 신호/메시지를 전송하는 동작을 수행할 수 있다.Alternatively, the relay configuration information may further include information on a specific height range within which the operation of the relay terminal is permitted. In this case, the terminal may operate as a relay terminal only when located within the specific height range. For example, the terminal may transmit the discovery message only when located within the specific height range. Alternatively, the relay configuration information may further include information on a specific height range within which the operation of the relay terminal is restricted. In this case, a terminal that is not located within the specific height range may perform an operation of transmitting a discovery signal/message for the relay communication.

다음으로, 상기 단말은 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들로부터 수신된 복수의 디스커버리 메시지들 및 상기 릴레이 설정 정보에 기초하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택할 수 있다 (S235).Next, the terminal can select a candidate relay terminal from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the plurality of discovery messages received from the plurality of relay terminals and the relay configuration information (S235).

이 때, 상기 단말은 기존 지상 단말의 릴레이 선택 기준과 상이한 기준으로 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 단말은 자신의 높이 및 상기 릴레이 설정 정보에 기초하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 선택해야 할 후보 릴레이 단말의 수를 결정할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 상기 단말이 릴레이 통신을 위해 선택할 필요가 있는 후보 릴레이 단말의 수를 높이 또는 높이 범위 별로 설정하는 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 단말은 상기 릴레이 설정 정보에 기초하여 자신의 높이에 대응하는 높이/높이 범위에 대해 설정된 제1 개수 이상 상기 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 설정 정보는 제1 높이 또는 제1 높이 범위에 대해 K 개 (정수)의 후보 릴레이 단말들을 선택하도록 설정하고, 제2 높이 또는 제2 높이 범위에 대해 N 개 (정수)의 후보 릴레이 단말들을 선택하도록 설정할 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 단말의 높이/고도가 상기 제1 높이 또는 상기 제1 높이 범위에 속하는 경우, 상기 단말은 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 후보 릴레이 단말을 K 개수 이상 선택할 수 있다 (즉, 최소 K 개 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말의 선택/보고가 필요함). 즉, 상기 단말은 자신의 높이/고도 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 자신이 선택해야 하는 후보 릴레이 단말의 수를 결정하고, 상기 결정된 후보 릴레이 단말의 수만큼 후보 릴레이 단말들을 선택할 수 있다. 한편, 상기 제1 높이 또는 제1 높이 범위가 상기 제2 높이 또는 제2 높이 범위보다 높은 경우, 상기 K 개는 상기 N 개보다 큰 값일 수 있다. 이는, 상기 단말의 높이 높아질수록 상기 기지국과의 통신 환경이 상대적으로 더 열화되기 때문에 보다 많은 릴레이 단말과 릴레이 통신을 위한 링크를 형성할 필요가 있기 때문이다. 예컨대, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 높이/높이 범위 별로 선택이 필요한 상기 후보 릴레이 단말의 수를 상이하게 설정할 수 있다. At this time, the terminal may select the candidate relay terminals based on criteria different from the relay selection criteria of the existing ground terminals. For example, the terminal may determine the number of candidate relay terminals to be selected from the plurality of relay terminals based on its own height and the relay configuration information. For example, the relay configuration information may include information for setting the number of candidate relay terminals that the terminal needs to select for relay communication by height or height range. In this case, the terminal may select the candidate relay terminals at least a first number set for the height/height range corresponding to its own height based on the relay configuration information. For example, the configuration information may be set to select K (integer) candidate relay terminals for the first height or the first height range, and to select N (integer) candidate relay terminals for the second height or the second height range. In this case, when the height/altitude of the terminal falls within the first height or the first height range, the terminal may select K or more candidate relay terminals from the plurality of relay terminals (i.e., selection/reporting of at least K candidate relay terminals is required). That is, the terminal determines the number of candidate relay terminals to be selected based on its own height/altitude and the setting information, and can select candidate relay terminals equal to the number of candidate relay terminals determined. Meanwhile, when the first height or the first height range is higher than the second height or the second height range, the K may be a larger value than the N. This is because, as the height of the terminal increases, the communication environment with the base station relatively deteriorates more, and therefore, it is necessary to form a link for relay communication with more relay terminals. For example, the relay setting information may set the number of candidate relay terminals to be selected differently for each height/height range.

또는, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 릴레이 단말의 선택 조건에 대한 조건 정보를 더 포함할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 상기 단말이 상기 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택할 수 있는 선택 허용 높이 범위를 포함할 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 단말은 상기 디스커버리 메시지에 기초하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 선택 허용 높이 범위 내에 위치하는 릴레이 단말만을 후보 릴레이 단말로 선택할 수 있다. 또는, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 상기 단말이 보고한 높이 정보에 기초하여 결정된 선택 허용 높이 범위가 포함될 수 있다. 즉, 상기 기지국은 상기 단말의 높이에 따라 릴레이 통신하기에 적절한 릴레이 단말의 높이 범위를 결정하고, 이를 포함하는 릴레이 설정 정보를 상기 단말에게 제공할 수 있다.Alternatively, the relay configuration information may further include condition information on a selection condition of the relay terminal. For example, the relay configuration information may include a selection allowable height range from which the terminal may select the candidate relay terminal. In this case, the terminal may select only a relay terminal located within the selection allowable height range among the plurality of relay terminals as a candidate relay terminal based on the discovery message. Alternatively, the relay configuration information may include a selection allowable height range determined based on height information reported by the terminal. That is, the base station may determine a height range of a relay terminal suitable for relay communication based on the height of the terminal, and provide relay configuration information including the height range to the terminal.

또는, 상기 단말은 상기 디스커버리 메시지에 포함된 비행 경로에 대한 정보를 고려하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 비행 경로와 관련하여 미리 설정된 오프셋 정보를 포함할 수 있고, 상기 단말은 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 자신의 비행 경로 (방향, 속도, 높이, 위치 등)와 상기 미리 설정된 오프셋 범위 내에 있는 비행 경로를 갖는 릴레이 단말을 상기 후보 릴레이 단말로 선택할 수 있다. 한편, 상기 디스커버리 메시지에 포함된 비행 경로는 보안 상 문제를 고려하여 미리 설정된 시간 단위 내의 비행 경로일 수 있다.Alternatively, the terminal may select a candidate relay terminal from among the plurality of relay terminals by considering information about the flight path included in the discovery message. For example, the relay configuration information may include preset offset information related to the flight path, and the terminal may select a relay terminal having a flight path (direction, speed, height, position, etc.) within its own flight path and the preset offset range as the candidate relay terminal from among the plurality of relay terminals. Meanwhile, the flight path included in the discovery message may be a flight path within a preset time unit by considering security issues.

또는, 상기 단말은 상기 디스커버리 메시지에 포함된 군집 정보에 기초하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 단말은 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 자신이 속한 군집과 동일한 군집 내에 있는 릴레이 단말만을 상기 후보 릴레이 단말로 선택할 수 있다.Alternatively, the terminal may select a candidate relay terminal from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the cluster information included in the discovery message. For example, the terminal may select only a relay terminal within the same cluster as the cluster to which it belongs from among the plurality of relay terminals as the candidate relay terminal.

한편, 상술한 후보 릴레이 단말의 선택은 특정 임계 세기 이상으로 디스커버리 메시지가 수신된 경우를 전제한 선택 동작일 수 있다.Meanwhile, the selection of the above-described candidate relay terminal may be a selection operation based on the assumption that a discovery message is received above a certain threshold intensity.

또는, 상기 단말은 상기 선택된 후보 릴레이 단말에 대한 후보 릴레이 단말 정보를 기지국에 보고할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 단말은 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 릴레이 설정 정보에 따른 제1 개수의 후보 릴레이 단말들에 대한 상기 후보 릴레이 단말 정보를 상기 기지국에 보고할 수 있다. 즉, 상기 단말이 보고할 후보 릴레이 단말의 수도 상기 릴레이 설정 정보에 포함된 높이 또는 높이 범위 별 수에 따라 제1 개수로 결정될 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 단말은 상기 기지국이 상기 제1 개수의 후보 릴레이 단말 중에서 선택한 제2 개수의 후보 릴레이 단말에 대한 선택 정보를 수신할 수 있다. 상기 단말은 상기 제2 개수의 후보 릴레이 단말들 각각과 간접 링크의 형성을 위한 설정을 수행할 수 있다. 즉, 상기 단말은 상기 제2 개수의 릴레이 단말들 각각과 제2 개수의 간접 링크 (즉, 릴레이 단말과의 SL 연결을 통해 상기 기지국과 연결되는 링크)를 형성할 수 있다. 여기서, 상기 제2 개수는 상기 제1 개수와 대응하거나 작을 수 있다. 이 때, 상술한 바와 같이, 상기 제2 개수도 상기 단말의 높이에 따라 상이한 값으로 결정될 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 제2 개수는 상기 단말의 높이가 높을수록 상대적으로 더 높은 값으로 결정될 수 있다.Alternatively, the terminal may report candidate relay terminal information for the selected candidate relay terminal to the base station. For example, the terminal may report candidate relay terminal information for a first number of candidate relay terminals according to the relay configuration information among the plurality of relay terminals to the base station. That is, the number of candidate relay terminals to be reported by the terminal may also be determined as the first number according to the number of heights or height ranges included in the relay configuration information. In this case, the terminal may receive selection information for a second number of candidate relay terminals selected by the base station from the first number of candidate relay terminals. The terminal may perform configuration for forming an indirect link with each of the second number of candidate relay terminals. That is, the terminal may form a second number of indirect links (i.e., links connected to the base station through SL connections with relay terminals) with each of the second number of relay terminals. Here, the second number may correspond to or be smaller than the first number. At this time, as described above, the second number may also be determined to a different value depending on the height of the terminal. For example, the second number may be determined to a relatively higher value as the height of the terminal is higher.

도 24는 기지국이 단말로부터 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신하는 방법을 설명하기 위한 도면이다.Figure 24 is a diagram for explaining a method for a base station to receive candidate relay information from a terminal.

도 24를 참조하면, 기지국은 단말에게 릴레이 통신과 관련된 릴레이 설정 정보를 전송할 수 있다 (S241). 여기서, 릴레이 설정 정보는 "UAV 리모트 UE를 위한 후보 릴레이 UE 선택 방법" 및 도 23를 참조하여 설명한 비지상 (Non-terrestrial) 단말인 UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) 단말이 릴레이 단말을 선택하는 기준과 관련된 설정 정보를 포함할 수 잇다. 이 때, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 상술한 바와 같이 기존 지상 리모트 단말이 릴레이 통신을 위해 릴레이 단말을 선택하는 기준과 상이한 기준을 설정할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 릴레이 설정 정보는 상기 단말의 높이/높이 범위 별로 상기 후보 릴레이 정보로 선택/보고해야 할 후보 릴레이 단말의 수를 상이하게 설정할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 24, the base station can transmit relay configuration information related to relay communication to the terminal (S241). Here, the relay configuration information can include configuration information related to a criterion for selecting a relay terminal by a UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) terminal, which is a non-terrestrial terminal, as described with reference to the "Candidate Relay UE Selection Method for UAV Remote UE" and FIG. 23. At this time, the relay configuration information can set a criterion different from the criterion for selecting a relay terminal by an existing terrestrial remote terminal for relay communication as described above. For example, the relay configuration information can set a different number of candidate relay terminals to be selected/reported as the candidate relay information according to the height/height range of the terminal.

다음으로, 상기 기지국은 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 선택된 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들에 대한 상기 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신할 수 있다 (S243). "UAV 리모트 UE를 위한 후보 릴레이 UE 선택 방법" 및 도 16을 참조하여 설명한 바와 같이, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 릴레이 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정될 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이가 증가할수록 큰 값으로 결정될 수 있다.Next, the base station can receive candidate relay information for a first number or more of candidate relay terminals selected from among the plurality of relay terminals (S243). As described with reference to “Candidate Relay UE Selection Method for UAV Remote UE” and FIG. 16, the first number can be determined based on the height of the terminal and the relay configuration information. For example, the first number can be determined to be a larger value as the height of the terminal increases.

다음으로, 상기 기지국은 상기 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들 중에서 릴레이 통신을 수행할 적어도 하나의 릴레이 단말을 선택하고, 상기 선택된 적어도 하나의 단말에 대한 정보를 상기 단말에게 전송할 수 있다 (S245). 예컨대, 상기 기지국은 상기 후보 릴레이 상기 후보 릴레이 정보에 포함된 상기 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들 각각의 비행 경로, 높이, 위치 등을 종합적으로 고려하여 상기 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들 중에서 릴레이 통신을 수행할 적어도 하나의 릴레이 단말을 선택할 수 있다. 한편, 상기 적어도 하나의 릴레이 단말의 수는 상기 단말의 높이에 따라 상이할 수 있다. 예컨대, 상기 기지국은 상기 단말이 높이 특정 임계 높이 미만이면, 1개의 릴레이 단말을 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 릴레이 단말로 선택하고, 상기 단말의 높이가 특정 임계 높이 이상이면 2 개의 릴레이 단말을 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 릴레이 단말로 선택할 수 있다. 이는, 상기 단말의 높이가 높을수록 상기 기지국과의 통신 환경이 더 나빠질 수 있는 점에서, 상기 기지국은 상기 단말과의 보다 원활한 통신을 위해 둘 이상의 릴레이 단말들을 통한 릴레이 연결을 상기 단말에게 설정할 수 있다.Next, the base station may select at least one relay terminal to perform relay communication from among the first number or more candidate relay terminals, and transmit information about the selected at least one terminal to the terminal (S245). For example, the base station may comprehensively consider the flight path, height, location, etc. of each of the first number or more candidate relay terminals included in the candidate relay information, and select at least one relay terminal to perform relay communication from among the first number or more candidate relay terminals. Meanwhile, the number of the at least one relay terminal may vary depending on the height of the terminal. For example, if the height of the terminal is lower than a specific threshold height, the base station may select one relay terminal as the relay terminal for the relay communication, and if the height of the terminal is higher than a specific threshold height, the base station may select two relay terminals as the relay terminals for the relay communication. This is because the communication environment with the base station may become worse as the height of the terminal is higher, and therefore, the base station may set up a relay connection to the terminal through two or more relay terminals for smoother communication with the terminal.

이와 같이, 제안 발명은 UAV와 관련된 릴레이 단말의 선택/보고 기준을 제시함으로써 UAV 특성에 적합한 릴레이 단말의 선택/보고 기회를 제공할 수 있다. 또는, 제안 발명은 상기 단말의 높이의 증가에 따라 보고/선택이 필요한 후보 릴레이 단말의 수를 증가시킴으로써 상기 단말의 높이 증가에 따른 기지국의 신호 세기 저하 및 간섭 증가하는 통신 환경에서도 릴레이 통신을 통한 안정적인 기지국과의 통신을 보장할 수 있다. 또는, 제안 발명은 UAV 특성을 고려한 릴레이 통신의 설정을 통해 높은 고도/높이에서도 릴레이 통신을 이용한 저전력 통신을 효과적으로 지원할 수 있다.In this way, the proposed invention can provide a selection/reporting opportunity for a relay terminal suitable for the characteristics of a UAV by presenting selection/reporting criteria for a relay terminal related to a UAV. Alternatively, the proposed invention can ensure stable communication with a base station through relay communication even in a communication environment where the signal strength of the base station decreases and interference increases due to an increase in the height of the terminal by increasing the number of candidate relay terminals requiring reporting/selection as the height of the terminal increases. Alternatively, the proposed invention can effectively support low-power communication using relay communication even at high altitudes/heights by setting up relay communication considering the characteristics of the UAV.

멀티 홉 U2U 동작에서 local ID 설정 방법How to set local ID in multi-hop U2U operation

멀티 홉 U2U relay 동작 시 소스 리모트 UE에서 전송하는 메시지를 중간 단계의 릴레이 UE가 수신했을 때, 해당 메시지의 최종 목적지가 타겟 리모트 UE 임을 알 수 있도록 하기 위해서는 해당 메시지에 타겟 리모트 UE의 ID가 포함되어야 한다. 또한 타겟 리모트 UE가 해당 메시지를 수신한 경우에 해당 메시지가 어디에서 생성되어 전송된 메시지인지를 타겟 리모트 UE가 알 수 있기 위해서는 해당 메시지에 소스 리모트 UE의 ID가 포함되어야 한다. 즉, 멀티홉 전송에 있어서 소스 리모트 UE가 전송하는 메시지에는 소스 리모트 UE ID와 타겟 리모트 UE ID가 포함되어야 한다. 이때 포함되는 ID는 L2 ID가 될 수 있다. 그러나 L2 ID를 그대로 사용하는 경우, 총 48 bit의 header가 매 MAC PDU 전송시 필요한 값이 되므로 overhead 문제가 고려될 수 있다. 이를 해결하기 위하여 L2 ID 보다 작은 값으로 소스 리모트 UE와 타겟 리모트 UE를 identify 하기 위한 로컬 ID (local ID)가 사용될 수 있다.In order for an intermediate relay UE to know that the final destination of a message transmitted from a source remote UE in a multi-hop U2U relay operation is the target remote UE, the target remote UE's ID must be included in the message. In addition, in order for the target remote UE to know where the message was generated and transmitted when the target remote UE receives the message, the source remote UE's ID must be included in the message. That is, in multi-hop transmission, the message transmitted by the source remote UE must include the source remote UE ID and the target remote UE ID. The included ID can be the L2 ID. However, if the L2 ID is used as it is, a total of 48 bits of header are required for each MAC PDU transmission, which may cause an overhead problem. To solve this problem, a local ID smaller than the L2 ID can be used to identify the source remote UE and the target remote UE.

로컬 ID는 소스 리모트 UE (/ 타겟 리모트 UE)가 소스 리모트 UE와 타겟 리모트 UE의 L2 ID를 identify 할 수 있는 값을 로컬 ID로 할당하여 중간 단계의 릴레이 UE에 고유한 값으로 할당하는 값일 수 있다. 소스 리모트 UE는 1st-hop에 대하여 릴레이 UE에게 (initial) SL configuration (e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink / RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink)을 수행할 때, 소스 리모트 UE를 identify 할 수 있는 로컬 ID와 타겟 리모트 UE를 identify 할 수 있는 로컬 ID를 configure 할 수 있다. 해당 값은 RRCReconfigurationSidelink 메시지에 포함될 수 있다. 이 값은 source/타겟 리모트 UE의 L2 ID와 source/타겟 리모트 UE를 identify 하는 로컬 ID의 mapping 관계를 알려주기 위한 값이므로, source/타겟 리모트 UE의 L2 ID와 이에 대한 로컬 ID가 함께 notify 되어야 할 수 있다. 이를 수신한 릴레이 UE는 다음 hop의 릴레이 UE에게 해당 값을 그대로 전송하여 다음 hop의 릴레이 UE 또는 소스 리모트 UE와 타겟 리모트 UE를 identify 하는 로컬 ID 값을 알 수 있도록 한다. 해당 로컬 ID 값은 소스 리모트 UE에서 타겟 리모트 UE로 각 릴레이 UE를 거치면서 변함 없이 사용되는 값이 될 수 있다. 위와 유사하게 로컬 ID 할당을 타겟 리모트 UE가 수행할 수도 있다. 타겟 리모트 UE가 수행하는 경우, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink 메시지에 해당 값이 포함되어 전송될 수 있다. 이때 해당 값이라 함은, 소스 리모트 UE (L2) ID, 타겟 리모트 UE (L2) ID, 그리고(/또는) source/target pair와 mapping 되는 로컬 ID 값을 의미할 수 있다.The local ID may be a value that the source remote UE (/target remote UE) assigns as a local ID a value that can identify the L2 IDs of the source remote UE and the target remote UE, and assigns a unique value to the intermediate relay UE. When the source remote UE performs (initial) SL configuration (e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink / RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink) to the relay UE for the 1st-hop, the source remote UE may configure a local ID that can identify the source remote UE and a local ID that can identify the target remote UE. The corresponding values may be included in the RRCReconfigurationSidelink message. Since this value is a value to indicate a mapping relationship between the L2 IDs of the source/target remote UE and the local ID that identifies the source/target remote UE, the L2 IDs of the source/target remote UE and the corresponding local ID may need to be notified together. The relay UE receiving this transmits the corresponding value as it is to the relay UE of the next hop so that the relay UE of the next hop or the local ID value that identifies the source remote UE and the target remote UE can be known. The corresponding local ID value can be a value that is used unchanged when passing through each relay UE from the source remote UE to the target remote UE. Similarly to the above, the target remote UE can also perform local ID allocation. If the target remote UE performs it, the corresponding value can be included and transmitted in the RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink message. In this case, the corresponding value can mean the source remote UE (L2) ID, the target remote UE (L2) ID, and/or the local ID value mapped to the source/target pair.

로컬 ID는 SL connection establishment에 대한 configure를 하는 UE (/소스 리모트 UE / 릴레이 UE)가 자신과 연결되어 있는 릴레이 UE (또는) 타겟 리모트 UE (/연결된 link)에 대해서 행할 수 있다. (소스 리모트 UE/각 hop의 릴레이 UE가 configure 하는 값은 HbH (hop-by-hop)으로 다를 수 있음.) Local ID can be configured by the UE (/source remote UE/relay UE) for SL connection establishment to the relay UE (or) target remote UE (/connected link) to which it is connected. (The values configured by the source remote UE/relay UE of each hop can be different in HbH (hop-by-hop).)

또는, 소스 리모트 UE가 1st-hop의 릴레이 UE에 configure 하는 (initial) SL configuration 메시지 (예컨대, RRCReconfigurationSidelink)에는 소스 리모트 UE에서 타겟 리모트 UE로 전달되는 메시지를 identify 하기 위한 (하나의) 값이 configure 될 수 있다. 해당 메시지(/SL configuration 메시지)에는 소스 리모트 UE의 L2 ID, 타겟 리모트 UE의 L2 ID, 그리고 이들의 pair를 나타내기 위한 로컬 ID가 포함될 수 있다. 이를 수신한 릴레이 UE는 타겟 리모트 UE로 향하는 다음 번 릴레이 UE에게 마찬가지로 소스 리모트 UE에서 타겟 리모트 UE로 전달되는 메시지를 identify 하기 위한 (하나의) 값(/로컬 ID)을 configure 할 수 있으며, 해당 값은 이전 홉(e.g., 소스 리모트 UE가 1st-hop 릴레이 UE에 configure 한 로컬 ID 값) 과 다른(/같은) 값일 수 있다. 즉, 다음 hop을 configure 하는 릴레이 UE가 정하는 값으로 결정될 수 있다. 릴레이 UE가 다음 번 릴레이 UE에게 로컬 ID를 할당하는 경우에도, 이를 할당 받은 릴레이 UE가 다음 번 홉의 로컬 ID를 할당할 수 있도록 하기 위해서 소스 리모트 UE의 L2 ID값과 타겟 리모트 UE의 L2 ID 값, 그리고 이들의 pair를 나타내는 로컬 ID 값이 포함될 수 있다. 해당 값은 initial SL configuration 메시지 (e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink)에만 포함되는 값일 수 있다.Alternatively, an (initial) SL configuration message (e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink) that the source remote UE configures to the 1st-hop relay UE may be configured with (a) value for identifying a message to be transmitted from the source remote UE to the target remote UE. The message (/SL configuration message) may include an L2 ID of the source remote UE, an L2 ID of the target remote UE, and a local ID for indicating a pair of these. The relay UE receiving the message may similarly configure (a) value (/local ID) for identifying a message to be transmitted from the source remote UE to the target remote UE, to the next relay UE heading to the target remote UE, and the value may be different (or the same) as the previous hop (e.g., the local ID value that the source remote UE configured to the 1st-hop relay UE). That is, the value may be determined by the relay UE configuring the next hop. Even when a relay UE allocates a local ID to the next relay UE, the L2 ID value of the source remote UE, the L2 ID value of the target remote UE, and a local ID value representing a pair of them may be included so that the assigned relay UE can allocate a local ID of the next hop. The value may be a value included only in the initial SL configuration message (e.g., RRCReconfigurationSidelink).

예를 들어, {소스 리모트 UE (L2 ID), 타겟 리모트 UE (L2 ID)} pair를 하나의 로컬 ID(A) 값으로 assign 하면, 이를 할당 받은 릴레이 UE는 다음 hop의 릴레이 UE에는 동일한 {소스 리모트 UE, 타겟 리모트 UE} pair에 대해서 동일/다른 하나의 로컬 ID(B) 값으로 assign 하는 것이 가능하다. (A와 B는 같은 값일 수 있음). SL connection establishment가 완료된 후, 데이터(/시그널) 전송 시, 소스 리모트 UE가 전송하는 데이터의 adaptation layer에 로컬 ID(A)를 포함하여 전송하면, 이를 수신한 1st-hop의 릴레이 UE는 해당 메시지의 로컬 ID를 로컬 ID(B)로 replace 하여 다음 hop의 릴레이 UE에 전송할 수 있다. 마찬가지로 이를 수신한 2nd-hop의 릴레이 UE는 로컬 ID(B)를 수신하면 해당 메시지가 어떤 소스 리모트 UE에서 어떤 타겟 리모트 UE로 전송되는 메시지인지를 알 수 있고 (초기 SL connection establishment 과정을 통해서), 자신이 할당한 로컬 ID(C)를 adaptation layer의 로컬 ID field 에 포함하여 전송하는 식으로 타겟 리모트 UE까지 메시지가 전송 될 수 있다. 이러한 식으로 타겟 리모트 UE까지 메시지가 전송되면 타겟 리모트 UE는 해당 메시지의 adaptation layer의 header 값을 통하여 최초 어떤 소스 리모트 UE가 전송했는지를 identify 하는 것이 가능하다.For example, if a {source remote UE (L2 ID), target remote UE (L2 ID)} pair is assigned to one local ID (A) value, the assigned relay UE can assign the same {source remote UE, target remote UE} pair to the relay UE of the next hop with the same/different local ID (B) value. (A and B can be the same value). After SL connection establishment is completed, when transmitting data (/signal), if the adaptation layer of the data transmitted by the source remote UE is included and transmitted, the 1st-hop relay UE that receives this can replace the local ID of the message with the local ID (B) and transmit it to the relay UE of the next hop. Likewise, the 2nd-hop relay UE that receives this can know from which source remote UE the message is transmitted to which target remote UE by receiving the local ID (B) (through the initial SL connection establishment process), and can transmit the message to the target remote UE by including its own assigned local ID (C) in the local ID field of the adaptation layer. When the message is transmitted to the target remote UE in this way, the target remote UE can identify which source remote UE initially transmitted the message through the header value of the adaptation layer of the message.

또는, initial SL connection establishment 메시지 (/RRCReconfigurationSidelink, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink)는 adaptation layer header를 포함하지 않거나 (로컬 ID가 아직 할당 전이므로), adaptation layer의 header의 로컬 ID field에 non-used 값을 나타내는 특별한 값(0000 /11111)을 포함하여 전송할 수 있다. 이러한 경우, 각 릴레이 UE/소스 리모트 UE가 할당하는 로컬 ID 값에서 특별한 값(00000 / 1111)은 제외하고 설정하도록 암묵적인 규약이 설정될 수도 있다.Alternatively, the initial SL connection establishment message (/RRCReconfigurationSidelink, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink) may be transmitted without an adaptation layer header (since no local ID is allocated yet), or with a special value (0000 /11111) indicating a non-used value in the Local ID field of the adaptation layer header. In this case, an implicit convention may be established that each relay UE/source remote UE excludes the special value (00000 / 1111) from the Local ID value it allocates.

릴레이 UE가 로컬 ID를 설정하고, 해당 값을 이전 hop에 notify 하는 경우가 고려될 수 있다. 구체적으로, 릴레이 UE가 자신과 이전 홉에 사용될 로컬 ID를 할당하고 이를 이전 홉의 릴레이 UE/소스 리모트 UE에게 알려주는 방법이 사용될 수도 있다. 이 경우, 각 릴레이 UE가 할당하는 로컬 ID 값은 동일 소스 리모트 UE (L2) ID, 타겟 리모트 UE (L2) ID pair에 대하여 동일/다른 값일 수 있다. 릴레이 UE가 이전 홉의 릴레이 UE/소스 리모트 UE에 로컬 ID를 할당하는 경우, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink, 또는 별도의 PC5-RRC 메시지가 사용될 수 있다. 또한 릴레이 UE가 이전 홉에 로컬 ID를 할당하는 경우, 소스 리모트 UE (L2) ID, 타겟 리모트 UE (L2) ID 및 이들의 pair 값에 대한 로컬 ID 정보를 함께 알려 주어야 할 수 있다.A case may be considered where the relay UE sets a local ID and notifies the previous hop of the corresponding value. Specifically, a method may be used where the relay UE allocates a local ID to be used for itself and the previous hop and notifies the relay UE/source remote UE of the previous hop of the same local ID. In this case, the local ID values allocated by each relay UE may be the same/different values for the same source remote UE (L2) ID, target remote UE (L2) ID pair. If the relay UE allocates a local ID to the relay UE/source remote UE of the previous hop, RRCReconfigurationCompleteSidelink or a separate PC5-RRC message may be used. In addition, if the relay UE allocates a local ID to the previous hop, it may be necessary to notify local ID information for the source remote UE (L2) ID, the target remote UE (L2) ID, and their pair values together.

또는, 소스 리모트 UE / 릴레이 UE가 다음 hop에 대한 로컬 ID 할당을 한 경우, (혹은) 릴레이 UE, 타겟 리모트 UE가 이전 hop에 대한 로컬 ID 할당을 한 경우, 로컬 ID가 주어지면, 해당 hop으로의 데이터 및 시그널 정보 전송 시 adaptation layer에는 해당 로컬 ID 값을 포함하여 전송할 수 있다. 이를 수신한 릴레이 UE, 타겟 리모트 UE는 해당 로컬 ID 가 어떤 소스 리모트 UE (L2) ID, 타겟 리모트 UE (L2) ID에 mapping 되는 값인지를 알고 있으므로, 해당 메시지가 어디로 향하는 메시지 인지, 어느 리모트 UE로부터 온 메시지 인지를 판단할 수 있다.Alternatively, if the source remote UE/relay UE has allocated a local ID for the next hop, (or) the relay UE, the target remote UE has allocated a local ID for the previous hop, and if a local ID is given, the adaptation layer can include the local ID value when transmitting data and signaling information to the corresponding hop. The relay UE and the target remote UE that receive this know which source remote UE (L2) ID and target remote UE (L2) ID the local ID is mapped to, and thus can determine where the message is headed and from which remote UE the message is sent.

또는, 서로 다른 2개의 릴레이 UE(릴레이 UE(A), 릴레이 UE(B))가 하나의 동일한 다음 홉 릴레이 UE(릴레이 UE(C))에 대하여 서로 다른 소스 리모트 UE (L2) ID, 타겟 리모트 UE (L2) ID에 대하여 동일한 로컬 ID를 할당한 경우, 이를 수신한 릴레이 UE는 해당 로컬 ID에 대하여 이를 할당한 릴레이 UE의 L2 ID를 이용하여 filtering 할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 릴레이 UE(C)는 소스 리모트 UE, 타겟 리모트 UE와 이들의 pair에 대한 로컬 ID를 저장하는 경우, 이를 할당한 릴레이 UE(/소스 리모트 UE)의 L2 ID도 저장하고 있을 수 있다. 서로 다른 릴레이 UE가 동일한 로컬 ID를 할당한다고 하더라도, 이를 할당한 릴레이 UE(/소스 리모트 UE)의 L2 ID를 이용하여 서로 다른 source/타겟 리모트 UE pair에 대한 로컬 ID임을 identify 할 수 있다.Alternatively, if two different relay UEs (relay UE (A), relay UE (B)) allocate the same local ID for different source remote UE (L2) IDs, target remote UE (L2) IDs to one same next hop relay UE (relay UE (C)), the relay UE receiving it can filter the local ID using the L2 ID of the relay UE that allocates it. For example, if the relay UE (C) stores the local IDs for the source remote UE, the target remote UE and their pair, it may also store the L2 ID of the relay UE (/source remote UE) that allocates it. Even if different relay UEs allocate the same local ID, it is possible to identify the local IDs for different source/target remote UE pairs using the L2 ID of the relay UE (/source remote UE) that allocates it.

발명이 적용되는 통신 시스템 예Examples of communication systems to which the invention applies

이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 본 문서에 개시된 본 발명의 다양한 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 기기들간에 무선 통신/연결(예, 5G)을 필요로 하는 다양한 분야에 적용될 수 있다.Although not limited thereto, the various descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods and/or operational flowcharts of the present invention disclosed in this document may be applied to various fields requiring wireless communication/connectivity (e.g., 5G) between devices.

이하, 도면을 참조하여 보다 구체적으로 예시한다. 이하의 도면/설명에서 동일한 도면 부호는 다르게 기술하지 않는 한, 동일하거나 대응되는 하드웨어 블록, 소프트웨어 블록 또는 기능 블록을 예시할 수 있다. Hereinafter, more specific examples will be provided with reference to the drawings. In the drawings/descriptions below, the same drawing symbols may illustrate identical or corresponding hardware blocks, software blocks, or functional blocks, unless otherwise described.

도 25은 본 발명에 적용되는 통신 시스템을 예시한다.Figure 25 illustrates a communication system applied to the present invention.

도 25를 참조하면, 본 발명에 적용되는 통신 시스템(1)은 무선 기기, 기지국 및 네트워크를 포함한다. 여기서, 무선 기기는 무선 접속 기술(예, 5G NR(New RAT), LTE(Long Term Evolution))을 이용하여 통신을 수행하는 기기를 의미하며, 통신/무선/5G 기기로 지칭될 수 있다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 무선 기기는 로봇(100a), 차량(100b-1, 100b-2), XR(eXtended Reality) 기기(100c), 휴대 기기(Hand-held device)(100d), 가전(100e), IoT(Internet of Thing) 기기(100f), AI기기/서버(400)를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 차량은 무선 통신 기능이 구비된 차량, 자율 주행 차량, 차량간 통신을 수행할 수 있는 차량 등을 포함할 수 있다. 여기서, 차량은 UAV(Unmanned Aerial Vehicle)(예, 드론)를 포함할 수 있다. XR 기기는 AR(Augmented Reality)/VR(Virtual Reality)/MR(Mixed Reality) 기기를 포함하며, HMD(Head-Mounted Device), 차량에 구비된 HUD(Head-Up Display), 텔레비전, 스마트폰, 컴퓨터, 웨어러블 디바이스, 가전 기기, 디지털 사이니지(signage), 차량, 로봇 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 휴대 기기는 스마트폰, 스마트패드, 웨어러블 기기(예, 스마트워치, 스마트글래스), 컴퓨터(예, 노트북 등) 등을 포함할 수 있다. 가전은 TV, 냉장고, 세탁기 등을 포함할 수 있다. IoT 기기는 센서, 스마트미터 등을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 기지국, 네트워크는 무선 기기로도 구현될 수 있으며, 특정 무선 기기(200a)는 다른 무선 기기에게 기지국/네트워크 노드로 동작할 수도 있다.Referring to FIG. 25, a communication system (1) applied to the present invention includes a wireless device, a base station, and a network. Here, the wireless device means a device that performs communication using a wireless access technology (e.g., 5G NR (New RAT), LTE (Long Term Evolution)) and may be referred to as a communication/wireless/5G device. Although not limited thereto, the wireless device may include a robot (100a), a vehicle (100b-1, 100b-2), an XR (eXtended Reality) device (100c), a hand-held device (100d), a home appliance (100e), an IoT (Internet of Thing) device (100f), and an AI device/server (400). For example, the vehicle may include a vehicle equipped with a wireless communication function, an autonomous vehicle, a vehicle capable of performing vehicle-to-vehicle communication, etc. Here, the vehicle may include a UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) (e.g., a drone). XR devices include AR (Augmented Reality)/VR (Virtual Reality)/MR (Mixed Reality) devices and can be implemented in the form of HMD (Head-Mounted Device), HUD (Head-Up Display) installed in a vehicle, television, smartphone, computer, wearable device, home appliance, digital signage, vehicle, robot, etc. Portable devices can include smartphone, smart pad, wearable device (e.g., smart watch, smart glass), computer (e.g., laptop, etc.). Home appliances can include TV, refrigerator, washing machine, etc. IoT devices can include sensors, smart meters, etc. For example, base stations and networks can also be implemented as wireless devices, and a specific wireless device (200a) can act as a base station/network node to other wireless devices.

무선 기기(100a~100f)는 기지국(200)을 통해 네트워크(300)와 연결될 수 있다. 무선 기기(100a~100f)에는 AI(Artificial Intelligence) 기술이 적용될 수 있으며, 무선 기기(100a~100f)는 네트워크(300)를 통해 AI 서버(400)와 연결될 수 있다. 네트워크(300)는 3G 네트워크, 4G(예, LTE) 네트워크 또는 5G(예, NR) 네트워크 등을 이용하여 구성될 수 있다. 무선 기기(100a~100f)는 기지국(200)/네트워크(300)를 통해 서로 통신할 수도 있지만, 기지국/네트워크를 통하지 않고 직접 통신(e.g. 사이드링크 통신(sidelink communication))할 수도 있다. 예를 들어, 차량들(100b-1, 100b-2)은 직접 통신(e.g. V2V(Vehicle to Vehicle)/V2X(Vehicle to everything) communication)을 할 수 있다. 또한, IoT 기기(예, 센서)는 다른 IoT 기기(예, 센서) 또는 다른 무선 기기(100a~100f)와 직접 통신을 할 수 있다.Wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to a network (300) via a base station (200). Artificial Intelligence (AI) technology can be applied to the wireless devices (100a to 100f), and the wireless devices (100a to 100f) can be connected to an AI server (400) via the network (300). The network (300) can be configured using a 3G network, a 4G (e.g., LTE) network, a 5G (e.g., NR) network, etc. The wireless devices (100a to 100f) can communicate with each other via the base station (200)/network (300), but can also communicate directly (e.g., sidelink communication) without going through the base station/network. For example, vehicles (100b-1, 100b-2) can communicate directly (e.g. V2V (Vehicle to Vehicle)/V2X (Vehicle to everything) communication). Also, IoT devices (e.g., sensors) can communicate directly with other IoT devices (e.g., sensors) or other wireless devices (100a to 100f).

무선 기기(100a~100f)/기지국(200), 기지국(200)/기지국(200) 간에는 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)이 이뤄질 수 있다. 여기서, 무선 통신/연결은 상향/하향링크 통신(150a)과 사이드링크 통신(150b)(또는, D2D 통신), 기지국간 통신(150c)(e.g. relay, IAB(Integrated Access Backhaul)과 같은 다양한 무선 접속 기술(예, 5G NR)을 통해 이뤄질 수 있다. 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)을 통해 무선 기기와 기지국/무선 기기, 기지국과 기지국은 서로 무선 신호를 송신/수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 통신/연결(150a, 150b, 150c)은 다양한 물리 채널을 통해 신호를 송신/수신할 수 있다. 이를 위해, 본 발명의 다양한 제안들에 기반하여, 무선 신호의 송신/수신을 위한 다양한 구성정보 설정 과정, 다양한 신호 처리 과정(예, 채널 인코딩/디코딩, 변조/복조, 자원 매핑/디매핑 등), 자원 할당 과정 등 중 적어도 일부가 수행될 수 있다.Wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c) can be established between wireless devices (100a to 100f)/base stations (200), and base stations (200)/base stations (200). Here, the wireless communication/connection can be achieved through various wireless access technologies (e.g., 5G NR) such as uplink/downlink communication (150a), sidelink communication (150b) (or, D2D communication), and communication between base stations (150c) (e.g., relay, IAB (Integrated Access Backhaul). Through the wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c), a wireless device and a base station/wireless device, and a base station and a base station can transmit/receive wireless signals to/from each other. For example, the wireless communication/connection (150a, 150b, 150c) can transmit/receive signals through various physical channels. To this end, at least some of various configuration information setting processes for transmitting/receiving wireless signals, various signal processing processes (e.g., channel encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, resource mapping/demapping, etc.), and resource allocation processes can be performed based on various proposals of the present invention.

본 발명이 적용되는 무선 기기 예Examples of wireless devices to which the present invention is applied

도 26은 본 발명에 적용될 수 있는 무선 기기를 예시한다.Figure 26 illustrates a wireless device that can be applied to the present invention.

도 26을 참조하면, 제1 무선 기기(100)와 제2 무선 기기(200)는 다양한 무선 접속 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 통해 무선 신호를 송수신할 수 있다. 여기서, {제1 무선 기기(100), 제2 무선 기기(200)}은 도 25의 {무선 기기(100x), 기지국(200)} 및/또는 {무선 기기(100x), 무선 기기(100x)}에 대응할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 26, the first wireless device (100) and the second wireless device (200) can transmit and receive wireless signals through various wireless access technologies (e.g., LTE, NR). Here, {the first wireless device (100), the second wireless device (200)} can correspond to {the wireless device (100x), the base station (200)} and/or {the wireless device (100x), the wireless device (100x)} of FIG. 25.

제1 무선 기기(100)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102) 및 하나 이상의 메모리(104)를 포함하며, 추가적으로 하나 이상의 송수신기(106) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(108)을 더 포함할 수 있다. 프로세서(102)는 메모리(104) 및/또는 송수신기(106)를 제어하며, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 구현하도록 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 프로세서(102)는 메모리(104) 내의 정보를 처리하여 제1 정보/신호를 생성한 뒤, 송수신기(106)을 통해 제1 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(102)는 송수신기(106)를 통해 제2 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 수신한 뒤, 제2 정보/신호의 신호 처리로부터 얻은 정보를 메모리(104)에 저장할 수 있다. 메모리(104)는 프로세서(102)와 연결될 수 있고, 프로세서(102)의 동작과 관련한 다양한 정보를 저장할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 메모리(104)는 프로세서(102)에 의해 제어되는 프로세스들 중 일부 또는 전부를 수행하거나, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 수행하기 위한 명령들을 포함하는 소프트웨어 코드를 저장할 수 있다. 여기서, 프로세서(102)와 메모리(104)는 무선 통신 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 구현하도록 설계된 통신 모뎀/회로/칩셋의 일부일 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 프로세서(102)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 안테나(108)를 통해 무선 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신할 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 송신기 및/또는 수신기를 포함할 수 있다. 송수신기(106)는 RF(Radio Frequency) 유닛과 혼용될 수 있다. 본 발명에서 무선 기기는 통신 모뎀/회로/칩셋을 의미할 수도 있다.A first wireless device (100) includes one or more processors (102) and one or more memories (104), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (106) and/or one or more antennas (108). The processor (102) controls the memory (104) and/or the transceiver (106), and may be configured to implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. For example, the processor (102) may process information in the memory (104) to generate first information/signal, and then transmit a wireless signal including the first information/signal via the transceiver (106). Additionally, the processor (102) may receive a wireless signal including second information/signal via the transceiver (106), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the second information/signal in the memory (104). The memory (104) may be connected to the processor (102) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (102). For example, the memory (104) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (102), or may store software codes including instructions for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. Here, the processor (102) and the memory (104) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chipset designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR). The transceiver (106) may be connected to the processor (102) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (108). The transceiver (106) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver. The transceiver (106) may be used interchangeably with an RF (Radio Frequency) unit. In the present invention, a wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chipset.

구체적으로, 제1 무선 기기 또는 단말은 (100)는 송수신기 (106)와 연결되는 프로세서 (102)와 메모리(104)를 포함할 수 있다. 메모리(104)는 도 23, 도 24 및 "UAV 리모트 UE를 위한 후보 릴레이 UE 선택 방법"에서 설명된 실시예들과 관련된 동작을 수행할 수 있는 적어도 하나의 프로그램들이 포함될 수 있다.Specifically, the first wireless device or terminal (100) may include a processor (102) and a memory (104) connected to a transceiver (106). The memory (104) may include at least one program capable of performing operations related to the embodiments described in FIGS. 23, 24 and “Candidate Relay UE Selection Method for UAV Remote UE.”

프로세서(102)는 송수신기 (106)를 제어하여 제어하여 릴레이 통신과 관련된 설정 정보를 수신하고, 복수의 릴레이 단말들로부터 디스커버리 메시지들을 수신하며, 상기 디스커버리 메시지들 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 후보 릴레이 단말을 제1 개수 이상 선택할 수 있다. 여기서, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정될 수 있다.The processor (102) controls the transceiver (106) to receive configuration information related to relay communication, receive discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals, and select a first or more number of candidate relay terminals for the relay communication from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the discovery messages and the configuration information. Here, the first number can be determined based on the height of the terminal and the configuration information.

또는, 프로세서 (102) 및 메모리(104)를 포함하는 프로세싱 장치가 구성될 수 있다. 이 경우, 적어도 하나의 프로세서; 및 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 연결되고 명령어들을 저장하는 적어도 하나의 메모리를 포함하되, 상기 명령어들은 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 의해 실행되는 것을 기반으로 상기 단말로 하여금: 릴레이 통신과 관련된 설정 정보를 수신하고, 복수의 릴레이 단말들로부터 디스커버리 메시지들을 수신하며, 상기 디스커버리 메시지들 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 후보 릴레이 단말을 제1 개수 이상 선택하게 할 수 있다. 여기서, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정될 수 있다.Alternatively, a processing device including a processor (102) and a memory (104) may be configured. In this case, at least one processor; and at least one memory connected to the at least one processor and storing instructions, wherein the instructions, based on being executed by the at least one processor, cause the terminal to: receive configuration information related to relay communication, receive discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals, and select a first or more number of candidate relay terminals for the relay communication from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the discovery messages and the configuration information. Here, the first number may be determined based on a height of the terminal and the configuration information.

제2 무선 기기(200)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(202), 하나 이상의 메모리(204)를 포함하며, 추가적으로 하나 이상의 송수신기(206) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(208)를 더 포함할 수 있다. 프로세서(202)는 메모리(204) 및/또는 송수신기(206)를 제어하며, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 구현하도록 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 프로세서(202)는 메모리(204) 내의 정보를 처리하여 제3 정보/신호를 생성한 뒤, 송수신기(206)를 통해 제3 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 전송할 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(202)는 송수신기(206)를 통해 제4 정보/신호를 포함하는 무선 신호를 수신한 뒤, 제4 정보/신호의 신호 처리로부터 얻은 정보를 메모리(204)에 저장할 수 있다. 메모리(204)는 프로세서(202)와 연결될 수 있고, 프로세서(202)의 동작과 관련한 다양한 정보를 저장할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 메모리(204)는 프로세서(202)에 의해 제어되는 프로세스들 중 일부 또는 전부를 수행하거나, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들을 수행하기 위한 명령들을 포함하는 소프트웨어 코드를 저장할 수 있다. 여기서, 프로세서(202)와 메모리(204)는 무선 통신 기술(예, LTE, NR)을 구현하도록 설계된 통신 모뎀/회로/칩의 일부일 수 있다. 송수신기(206)는 프로세서(202)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 안테나(208)를 통해 무선 신호를 송신 및/또는 수신할 수 있다. 송수신기(206)는 송신기 및/또는 수신기를 포함할 수 있다 송수신기(206)는 RF 유닛과 혼용될 수 있다. 본 발명에서 무선 기기는 통신 모뎀/회로/칩을 의미할 수도 있다.The second wireless device (200) includes one or more processors (202), one or more memories (204), and may additionally include one or more transceivers (206) and/or one or more antennas (208). The processor (202) may be configured to control the memories (204) and/or the transceivers (206), and implement the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. For example, the processor (202) may process information in the memory (204) to generate third information/signals, and then transmit a wireless signal including the third information/signals via the transceivers (206). Additionally, the processor (202) may receive a wireless signal including fourth information/signals via the transceivers (206), and then store information obtained from signal processing of the fourth information/signals in the memory (204). The memory (204) may be connected to the processor (202) and may store various information related to the operation of the processor (202). For example, the memory (204) may perform some or all of the processes controlled by the processor (202), or may store software codes including commands for performing the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. Here, the processor (202) and the memory (204) may be part of a communication modem/circuit/chip designed to implement wireless communication technology (e.g., LTE, NR). The transceiver (206) may be connected to the processor (202) and may transmit and/or receive wireless signals via one or more antennas (208). The transceiver (206) may include a transmitter and/or a receiver. The transceiver (206) may be used interchangeably with an RF unit. In the present invention, a wireless device may also mean a communication modem/circuit/chip.

구체적으로, 제2 무선 기기 또는 기지국 (200)은 송수신기 또는 RF 송수신기(206)와 연결되는 프로세서 (202)와 메모리(204)를 포함할 수 있다. 메모리(204)는 도 23, 도 24 및 "UAV 리모트 UE를 위한 후보 릴레이 UE 선택 방법"에서 설명된 실시예들과 관련된 동작을 수행할 수 있는 적어도 하나의 프로그램들이 포함될 수 있다.Specifically, the second wireless device or base station (200) may include a processor (202) and a memory (204) coupled to a transceiver or RF transceiver (206). The memory (204) may include at least one program capable of performing operations related to the embodiments described in FIGS. 23, 24 and “Candidate Relay UE Selection Method for UAV Remote UE.”

프로세서(202)는 송수신기(206)를 제어하여 릴레이 통신과 관련된 설정 정보를 전송하고, 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 선택된 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들에 대한 상기 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신하며, 상기 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들 중에서 릴레이 통신을 수행할 적어도 하나의 릴레이 단말을 선택하고, 상기 선택된 적어도 하나의 단말에 대한 정보를 상기 단말에게 전송할 수 있다. 여기서, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정될 수 있다.The processor (202) controls the transceiver (206) to transmit configuration information related to relay communication, receive candidate relay information for a first or more number of candidate relay terminals selected from among the plurality of relay terminals, select at least one relay terminal to perform relay communication from among the first or more number of candidate relay terminals, and transmit information about the at least one selected terminal to the terminal. Here, the first number can be determined based on the height of the terminal and the configuration information.

이하, 무선 기기(100, 200)의 하드웨어 요소에 대해 보다 구체적으로 설명한다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 하나 이상의 프로토콜 계층이 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 계층(예, PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP와 같은 기능적 계층)을 구현할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 하나 이상의 PDU(Protocol Data Unit) 및/또는 하나 이상의 SDU(Service Data Unit)를 생성할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 메시지, 제어정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 생성할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 본 문서에 개시된 기능, 절차, 제안 및/또는 방법에 따라 PDU, SDU, 메시지, 제어정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 포함하는 신호(예, 베이스밴드 신호)를 생성하여, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)에게 제공할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)로부터 신호(예, 베이스밴드 신호)를 수신할 수 있고, 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들에 따라 PDU, SDU, 메시지, 제어정보, 데이터 또는 정보를 획득할 수 있다.Hereinafter, hardware elements of the wireless device (100, 200) will be described in more detail. Although not limited thereto, one or more protocol layers may be implemented by one or more processors (102, 202). For example, one or more processors (102, 202) may implement one or more layers (e.g., functional layers such as PHY, MAC, RLC, PDCP, RRC, SDAP). One or more processors (102, 202) may generate one or more Protocol Data Units (PDUs) and/or one or more Service Data Units (SDUs) according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. One or more processors (102, 202) may generate messages, control information, data, or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document. One or more processors (102, 202) can generate signals (e.g., baseband signals) including PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the functions, procedures, suggestions and/or methodologies disclosed herein and provide the signals to one or more transceivers (106, 206). One or more processors (102, 202) can receive signals (e.g., baseband signals) from one or more transceivers (106, 206) and obtain PDUs, SDUs, messages, control information, data or information according to the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein.

하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 컨트롤러, 마이크로 컨트롤러, 마이크로 프로세서 또는 마이크로 컴퓨터로 지칭될 수 있다. 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하드웨어, 펌웨어, 소프트웨어, 또는 이들의 조합에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 일 예로, 하나 이상의 ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit), 하나 이상의 DSP(Digital Signal Processor), 하나 이상의 DSPD(Digital Signal Processing Device), 하나 이상의 PLD(Programmable Logic Device) 또는 하나 이상의 FPGA(Field Programmable Gate Arrays)가 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 포함될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어를 사용하여 구현될 수 있고, 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어는 모듈, 절차, 기능 등을 포함하도록 구현될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 수행하도록 설정된 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 포함되거나, 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)에 저장되어 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)에 의해 구동될 수 있다. 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도들은 코드, 명령어 및/또는 명령어의 집합 형태로 펌웨어 또는 소프트웨어를 사용하여 구현될 수 있다. The one or more processors (102, 202) may be referred to as a controller, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, or a microcomputer. The one or more processors (102, 202) may be implemented by hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof. For example, one or more Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), one or more Digital Signal Processors (DSPs), one or more Digital Signal Processing Devices (DSPDs), one or more Programmable Logic Devices (PLDs), or one or more Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs) may be included in the one or more processors (102, 202). The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software, and the firmware or software may be implemented to include modules, procedures, functions, etc. The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software configured to perform one or more of the following: included in one or more processors (102, 202), or stored in one or more memories (104, 204) and driven by one or more of the processors (102, 202). The descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or operational flowcharts disclosed in this document may be implemented using firmware or software in the form of codes, instructions and/or sets of instructions.

하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있고, 다양한 형태의 데이터, 신호, 메시지, 정보, 프로그램, 코드, 지시 및/또는 명령을 저장할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 ROM, RAM, EPROM, 플래시 메모리, 하드 드라이브, 레지스터, 캐쉬 메모리, 컴퓨터 판독 저장 매체 및/또는 이들의 조합으로 구성될 수 있다. 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)의 내부 및/또는 외부에 위치할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 메모리(104, 204)는 유선 또는 무선 연결과 같은 다양한 기술을 통해 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있다.One or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and may store various forms of data, signals, messages, information, programs, codes, instructions and/or commands. The one or more memories (104, 204) may be comprised of ROM, RAM, EPROM, flash memory, hard drives, registers, cache memory, computer readable storage media and/or combinations thereof. The one or more memories (104, 204) may be located internally and/or externally to the one or more processors (102, 202). Additionally, the one or more memories (104, 204) may be coupled to the one or more processors (102, 202) via various technologies, such as wired or wireless connections.

하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 다른 장치에게 본 문서의 방법들 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 전송할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 다른 장치로부터 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)와 연결될 수 있고, 무선 신호를 송수신할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)가 하나 이상의 다른 장치에게 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보 또는 무선 신호를 전송하도록 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)는 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)가 하나 이상의 다른 장치로부터 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보 또는 무선 신호를 수신하도록 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 안테나(108, 208)와 연결될 수 있고, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 안테나(108, 208)를 통해 본 문서에 개시된 설명, 기능, 절차, 제안, 방법 및/또는 동작 순서도 등에서 언급되는 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 송수신하도록 설정될 수 있다. 본 문서에서, 하나 이상의 안테나는 복수의 물리 안테나이거나, 복수의 논리 안테나(예, 안테나 포트)일 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 수신된 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)를 이용하여 처리하기 위해, 수신된 무선 신호/채널 등을 RF 밴드 신호에서 베이스밴드 신호로 변환(Convert)할 수 있다. 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 하나 이상의 프로세서(102, 202)를 이용하여 처리된 사용자 데이터, 제어 정보, 무선 신호/채널 등을 베이스밴드 신호에서 RF 밴드 신호로 변환할 수 있다. 이를 위하여, 하나 이상의 송수신기(106, 206)는 (아날로그) 오실레이터 및/또는 필터를 포함할 수 있다.One or more transceivers (106, 206) can transmit user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the methods and/or flowcharts of this document, to one or more other devices. One or more transceivers (106, 206) can receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc., as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, suggestions, methods and/or flowcharts of this document, from one or more other devices. For example, one or more transceivers (106, 206) can be coupled to one or more processors (102, 202) and can transmit and receive wireless signals. For example, one or more processors (102, 202) can control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to transmit user data, control information, or wireless signals to one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more processors (102, 202) may control one or more transceivers (106, 206) to receive user data, control information, or wireless signals from one or more other devices. Additionally, one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be coupled to one or more antennas (108, 208), and one or more transceivers (106, 206) may be configured to transmit and receive user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, and the like, as described in the descriptions, functions, procedures, proposals, methods, and/or operational flowcharts disclosed herein, via one or more antennas (108, 208). In this document, one or more antennas may be multiple physical antennas, or multiple logical antennas (e.g., antenna ports). One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from RF band signals to baseband signals in order to process the received user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. using one or more processors (102, 202). One or more transceivers (106, 206) may convert processed user data, control information, wireless signals/channels, etc. from baseband signals to RF band signals using one or more processors (102, 202). For this purpose, one or more transceivers (106, 206) may include an (analog) oscillator and/or filter.

본 발명이 적용되는 무선 기기 활용 예Examples of wireless devices to which the present invention is applied

도 27은 본 발명에 적용되는 무선 기기의 다른 예를 나타낸다. 무선 기기는 사용-예/서비스에 따라 다양한 형태로 구현될 수 있다 (도 25 참조).Fig. 27 shows another example of a wireless device applied to the present invention. The wireless device can be implemented in various forms depending on the use-example/service (see Fig. 25).

도 27을 참조하면, 무선 기기(100, 200)는 도 26의 무선 기기(100,200)에 대응하며, 다양한 요소(element), 성분(component), 유닛/부(unit), 및/또는 모듈(module)로 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 기기(100, 200)는 통신부(110), 제어부(120), 메모리부(130) 및 추가 요소(140)를 포함할 수 있다. 통신부는 통신 회로(112) 및 송수신기(들)(114)을 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 통신 회로(112)는 도 27의 하나 이상의 프로세서(102,202) 및/또는 하나 이상의 메모리(104,204)를 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 송수신기(들)(114)는 도 26의 하나 이상의 송수신기(106,206) 및/또는 하나 이상의 안테나(108,208)을 포함할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 통신부(110), 메모리부(130) 및 추가 요소(140)와 전기적으로 연결되며 무선 기기의 제반 동작을 제어한다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 메모리부(130)에 저장된 프로그램/코드/명령/정보에 기반하여 무선 기기의 전기적/기계적 동작을 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 제어부(120)는 메모리부(130)에 저장된 정보를 통신부(110)을 통해 외부(예, 다른 통신 기기)로 무선/유선 인터페이스를 통해 전송하거나, 통신부(110)를 통해 외부(예, 다른 통신 기기)로부터 무선/유선 인터페이스를 통해 수신된 정보를 메모리부(130)에 저장할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 27, the wireless device (100, 200) corresponds to the wireless device (100, 200) of FIG. 26 and may be composed of various elements, components, units/units, and/or modules. For example, the wireless device (100, 200) may include a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a memory unit (130), and an additional element (140). The communication unit may include a communication circuit (112) and a transceiver(s) (114). For example, the communication circuit (112) may include one or more processors (102, 202) and/or one or more memories (104, 204) of FIG. 27. For example, the transceiver(s) (114) may include one or more transceivers (106, 206) and/or one or more antennas (108, 208) of FIG. 26. The control unit (120) is electrically connected to the communication unit (110), the memory unit (130), and the additional elements (140) and controls overall operations of the wireless device. For example, the control unit (120) may control electrical/mechanical operations of the wireless device based on programs/codes/commands/information stored in the memory unit (130). In addition, the control unit (120) may transmit information stored in the memory unit (130) to an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface through the communication unit (110), or may store information received from an external device (e.g., another communication device) via a wireless/wired interface in the memory unit (130).

추가 요소(140)는 무선 기기의 종류에 따라 다양하게 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 추가 요소(140)는 파워 유닛/배터리, 입출력부(I/O unit), 구동부 및 컴퓨팅부 중 적어도 하나를 포함할 수 있다. 이로 제한되는 것은 아니지만, 무선 기기는 로봇(도 25, 100a), 차량(도 25, 100b-1, 100b-2), XR 기기(도 25, 100c), 휴대 기기(도 25, 100d), 가전(도 25, 100e), IoT 기기(도 25, 100f), 디지털 방송용 단말, 홀로그램 장치, 공공 안전 장치, MTC 장치, 의료 장치, 핀테크 장치(또는 금융 장치), 보안 장치, 기후/환경 장치, AI 서버/기기(도 25, 400), 기지국(도 25, 200), 네트워크 노드 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 무선 기기는 사용-예/서비스에 따라 이동 가능하거나 고정된 장소에서 사용될 수 있다.The additional element (140) may be configured in various ways depending on the type of the wireless device. For example, the additional element (140) may include at least one of a power unit/battery, an input/output unit (I/O unit), a driving unit, and a computing unit. Although not limited thereto, the wireless device may be implemented in the form of a robot (FIG. 25, 100a), a vehicle (FIG. 25, 100b-1, 100b-2), an XR device (FIG. 25, 100c), a portable device (FIG. 25, 100d), a home appliance (FIG. 25, 100e), an IoT device (FIG. 25, 100f), a digital broadcasting terminal, a hologram device, a public safety device, an MTC device, a medical device, a fintech device (or a financial device), a security device, a climate/environmental device, an AI server/device (FIG. 25, 400), a base station (FIG. 25, 200), a network node, etc. Wireless devices may be mobile or stationary, depending on the use/service.

도 27에서 무선 기기(100, 200) 내의 다양한 요소, 성분, 유닛/부, 및/또는 모듈은 전체가 유선 인터페이스를 통해 상호 연결되거나, 적어도 일부가 통신부(110)를 통해 무선으로 연결될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 무선 기기(100, 200) 내에서 제어부(120)와 통신부(110)는 유선으로 연결되며, 제어부(120)와 제1 유닛(예, 130, 140)은 통신부(110)를 통해 무선으로 연결될 수 있다. 또한, 무선 기기(100, 200) 내의 각 요소, 성분, 유닛/부, 및/또는 모듈은 하나 이상의 요소를 더 포함할 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 하나 이상의 프로세서 집합으로 구성될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 제어부(120)는 통신 제어 프로세서, 어플리케이션 프로세서(Application processor), ECU(Electronic Control Unit), 그래픽 처리 프로세서, 메모리 제어 프로세서 등의 집합으로 구성될 수 있다. 다른 예로, 메모리부(130)는 RAM(Random Access Memory), DRAM(Dynamic RAM), ROM(Read Only Memory), 플래시 메모리(flash memory), 휘발성 메모리(volatile memory), 비-휘발성 메모리(non-volatile memory) 및/또는 이들의 조합으로 구성될 수 있다.In FIG. 27, various elements, components, units/parts, and/or modules within the wireless device (100, 200) may be entirely interconnected via a wired interface, or at least some may be wirelessly connected via a communication unit (110). For example, within the wireless device (100, 200), the control unit (120) and the communication unit (110) may be wired, and the control unit (120) and the first unit (e.g., 130, 140) may be wirelessly connected via the communication unit (110). In addition, each element, component, unit/part, and/or module within the wireless device (100, 200) may further include one or more elements. For example, the control unit (120) may be composed of one or more processor sets. For example, the control unit (120) may be composed of a set of a communication control processor, an application processor, an electronic control unit (ECU), a graphic processing processor, a memory control processor, etc. As another example, the memory unit (130) may be composed of RAM (Random Access Memory), DRAM (Dynamic RAM), ROM (Read Only Memory), flash memory, volatile memory, non-volatile memory, and/or a combination thereof.

본 발명이 적용되는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량 예Examples of vehicles or autonomous vehicles to which the present invention is applied

도 28는 본 발명에 적용되는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량을 예시한다. 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량은 이동형 로봇, 차량, 기차, 유/무인 비행체(Aerial Vehicle, AV), 선박 등으로 구현될 수 있다.Fig. 28 illustrates a vehicle or autonomous vehicle applied to the present invention. The vehicle or autonomous vehicle may be implemented as a mobile robot, a car, a train, a manned/unmanned aerial vehicle (AV), a ship, etc.

도 28를 참조하면, 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)은 안테나부(108), 통신부(110), 제어부(120), 구동부(140a), 전원공급부(140b), 센서부(140c) 및 자율 주행부(140d)를 포함할 수 있다. 안테나부(108)는 통신부(110)의 일부로 구성될 수 있다. 블록 110/130/140a~140d는 각각 도 27의 블록 110/130/140에 대응한다.Referring to FIG. 28, a vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) may include an antenna unit (108), a communication unit (110), a control unit (120), a driving unit (140a), a power supply unit (140b), a sensor unit (140c), and an autonomous driving unit (140d). The antenna unit (108) may be configured as a part of the communication unit (110). Blocks 110/130/140a to 140d correspond to blocks 110/130/140 of FIG. 27, respectively.

통신부(110)는 다른 차량, 기지국(e.g. 기지국, 노변 기지국(Road Side unit) 등), 서버 등의 외부 기기들과 신호(예, 데이터, 제어 신호 등)를 송수신할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)의 요소들을 제어하여 다양한 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 ECU(Electronic Control Unit)를 포함할 수 있다. 구동부(140a)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)을 지상에서 주행하게 할 수 있다. 구동부(140a)는 엔진, 모터, 파워 트레인, 바퀴, 브레이크, 조향 장치 등을 포함할 수 있다. 전원공급부(140b)는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)에게 전원을 공급하며, 유/무선 충전 회로, 배터리 등을 포함할 수 있다. 센서부(140c)는 차량 상태, 주변 환경 정보, 사용자 정보 등을 얻을 수 있다. 센서부(140c)는 IMU(inertial measurement unit) 센서, 충돌 센서, 휠 센서(wheel sensor), 속도 센서, 경사 센서, 중량 감지 센서, 헤딩 센서(heading sensor), 포지션 모듈(position module), 차량 전진/후진 센서, 배터리 센서, 연료 센서, 타이어 센서, 스티어링 센서, 온도 센서, 습도 센서, 초음파 센서, 조도 센서, 페달 포지션 센서 등을 포함할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 주행중인 차선을 유지하는 기술, 어댑티브 크루즈 컨트롤과 같이 속도를 자동으로 조절하는 기술, 정해진 경로를 따라 자동으로 주행하는 기술, 목적지가 설정되면 자동으로 경로를 설정하여 주행하는 기술 등을 구현할 수 있다.The communication unit (110) can transmit and receive signals (e.g., data, control signals, etc.) with external devices such as other vehicles, base stations (e.g., base stations, road side units, etc.), servers, etc. The control unit (120) can control elements of the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) to perform various operations. The control unit (120) can include an ECU (Electronic Control Unit). The drive unit (140a) can drive the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) on the ground. The drive unit (140a) can include an engine, a motor, a power train, wheels, brakes, a steering device, etc. The power supply unit (140b) supplies power to the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) and can include a wired/wireless charging circuit, a battery, etc. The sensor unit (140c) can obtain vehicle status, surrounding environment information, user information, etc. The sensor unit (140c) may include an IMU (inertial measurement unit) sensor, a collision sensor, a wheel sensor, a speed sensor, an incline sensor, a weight detection sensor, a heading sensor, a position module, a vehicle forward/backward sensor, a battery sensor, a fuel sensor, a tire sensor, a steering sensor, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a light sensor, a pedal position sensor, etc. The autonomous driving unit (140d) may implement a technology for maintaining a driving lane, a technology for automatically controlling speed such as adaptive cruise control, a technology for automatically driving along a set path, a technology for automatically setting a path and driving when a destination is set, etc.

일 예로, 통신부(110)는 외부 서버로부터 지도 데이터, 교통 정보 데이터 등을 수신할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 획득된 데이터를 기반으로 자율 주행 경로와 드라이빙 플랜을 생성할 수 있다. 제어부(120)는 드라이빙 플랜에 따라 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량(100)이 자율 주행 경로를 따라 이동하도록 구동부(140a)를 제어할 수 있다(예, 속도/방향 조절). 자율 주행 도중에 통신부(110)는 외부 서버로부터 최신 교통 정보 데이터를 비/주기적으로 획득하며, 주변 차량으로부터 주변 교통 정보 데이터를 획득할 수 있다. 또한, 자율 주행 도중에 센서부(140c)는 차량 상태, 주변 환경 정보를 획득할 수 있다. 자율 주행부(140d)는 새로 획득된 데이터/정보에 기반하여 자율 주행 경로와 드라이빙 플랜을 갱신할 수 있다. 통신부(110)는 차량 위치, 자율 주행 경로, 드라이빙 플랜 등에 관한 정보를 외부 서버로 전달할 수 있다. 외부 서버는 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량들로부터 수집된 정보에 기반하여, AI 기술 등을 이용하여 교통 정보 데이터를 미리 예측할 수 있고, 예측된 교통 정보 데이터를 차량 또는 자율 주행 차량들에게 제공할 수 있다.For example, the communication unit (110) can receive map data, traffic information data, etc. from an external server. The autonomous driving unit (140d) can generate an autonomous driving route and a driving plan based on the acquired data. The control unit (120) can control the driving unit (140a) so that the vehicle or autonomous vehicle (100) moves along the autonomous driving route according to the driving plan (e.g., speed/direction control). During autonomous driving, the communication unit (110) can irregularly/periodically acquire the latest traffic information data from an external server and can acquire surrounding traffic information data from surrounding vehicles. In addition, the sensor unit (140c) can acquire vehicle status and surrounding environment information during autonomous driving. The autonomous driving unit (140d) can update the autonomous driving route and driving plan based on the newly acquired data/information. The communication unit (110) can transmit information on the vehicle location, autonomous driving route, driving plan, etc. to an external server. External servers can predict traffic information data in advance using AI technology, etc. based on information collected from vehicles or autonomous vehicles, and provide the predicted traffic information data to vehicles or autonomous vehicles.

여기서, 본 명세서의 무선 기기(XXX, YYY)에서 구현되는 무선 통신 기술은 LTE, NR 및 6G뿐만 아니라 저전력 통신을 위한 Narrowband Internet of Things를 포함할 수 있다. 이때, 예를 들어 NB-IoT 기술은 LPWAN(Low Power Wide Area Network) 기술의 일례일 수 있고, LTE Cat NB1 및/또는 LTE Cat NB2 등의 규격으로 구현될 수 있으며, 상술한 명칭에 한정되는 것은 아니다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, 본 명세서의 무선 기기(XXX, YYY)에서 구현되는 무선 통신 기술은 LTE-M 기술을 기반으로 통신을 수행할 수 있다. 이때, 일 예로, LTE-M 기술은 LPWAN 기술의 일례일 수 있고, eMTC(enhanced Machine Type Communication) 등의 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다. 예를 들어, LTE-M 기술은 1) LTE CAT 0, 2) LTE Cat M1, 3) LTE Cat M2, 4) LTE non-BL(non-Bandwidth Limited), 5) LTE-MTC, 6) LTE Machine Type Communication, 및/또는 7) LTE M 등의 다양한 규격 중 적어도 어느 하나로 구현될 수 있으며 상술한 명칭에 한정되는 것은 아니다. 추가적으로 또는 대체적으로, 본 명세서의 무선 기기(XXX, YYY)에서 구현되는 무선 통신 기술은 저전력 통신을 고려한 지그비(ZigBee), 블루투스(Bluetooth) 및 저전력 광역 통신망(Low Power Wide Area Network, LPWAN) 중 적어도 어느 하나를 포함할 수 있으며, 상술한 명칭에 한정되는 것은 아니다. 일 예로 ZigBee 기술은 IEEE 802.15.4 등의 다양한 규격을 기반으로 소형/저-파워 디지털 통신에 관련된 PAN(personal area networks)을 생성할 수 있으며, 다양한 명칭으로 불릴 수 있다.Here, the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification may include LTE, NR, and 6G, as well as Narrowband Internet of Things for low-power communication. At this time, for example, NB-IoT technology may be an example of LPWAN (Low Power Wide Area Network) technology, and may be implemented with standards such as LTE Cat NB1 and/or LTE Cat NB2, and is not limited to the above-described names. Additionally or alternatively, the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification may perform communication based on LTE-M technology. At this time, for example, LTE-M technology may be an example of LPWAN technology, and may be called by various names such as eMTC (enhanced Machine Type Communication). For example, the LTE-M technology can be implemented by at least one of various standards such as 1) LTE CAT 0, 2) LTE Cat M1, 3) LTE Cat M2, 4) LTE non-BL (non-Bandwidth Limited), 5) LTE-MTC, 6) LTE Machine Type Communication, and/or 7) LTE M, and is not limited to the above-described names. Additionally or alternatively, the wireless communication technology implemented in the wireless device (XXX, YYY) of the present specification can include at least one of ZigBee, Bluetooth, and Low Power Wide Area Network (LPWAN) considering low-power communication, and is not limited to the above-described names. For example, the ZigBee technology can create PAN (personal area networks) related to small/low-power digital communication based on various standards such as IEEE 802.15.4, and can be called by various names.

이상에서 설명된 실시예들은 본 발명의 구성요소들과 특징들이 소정 형태로 결합된 것들이다. 각 구성요소 또는 특징은 별도의 명시적 언급이 없는 한 선택적인 것으로 고려되어야 한다. 각 구성요소 또는 특징은 다른 구성요소나 특징과 결합되지 않은 형태로 실시될 수 있다. 또한, 일부 구성요소들 및/또는 특징들을 결합하여 본 발명의 실시예를 구성하는 것도 가능하다. 본 발명의 실시예들에서 설명되는 동작들의 순서는 변경될 수 있다. 어느 실시예의 일부 구성이나 특징은 다른 실시예에 포함될 수 있고, 또는 다른 실시예의 대응하는 구성 또는 특징과 교체될 수 있다. 특허청구범위에서 명시적인 인용 관계가 있지 않은 청구항들을 결합하여 실시예를 구성하거나 출원 후의 보정에 의해 새로운 청구항으로 포함시킬 수 있음은 자명하다.The embodiments described above are combinations of components and features of the present invention in a predetermined form. Each component or feature should be considered optional unless explicitly stated otherwise. Each component or feature may be implemented in a form that is not combined with other components or features. In addition, it is also possible to form an embodiment of the present invention by combining some components and/or features. The order of operations described in the embodiments of the present invention may be changed. Some components or features of one embodiment may be included in another embodiment, or may be replaced with corresponding components or features of another embodiment. It is obvious that claims that do not have an explicit citation relationship in the scope of the patent may be combined to form an embodiment or included as a new claim by post-application amendment.

본 문서에서 본 발명의 실시예들은 주로 단말과 기지국 간의 신호 송수신 관계를 중심으로 설명되었다. 이러한 송수신 관계는 단말과 릴레이 또는 기지국과 릴레이간의 신호 송수신에도 동일/유사하게 확장된다. 본 문서에서 기지국에 의해 수행된다고 설명된 특정 동작은 경우에 따라서는 그 상위 노드(upper node)에 의해 수행될 수 있다. 즉, 기지국을 포함하는 복수의 네트워크 노드들(network nodes)로 이루어지는 네트워크에서 단말과의 통신을 위해 수행되는 다양한 동작들은 기지국 또는 기지국 이외의 다른 네트워크 노드들에 의해 수행될 수 있음은 자명하다. 기지국은 고정국(fixed station), Node B, eNode B(eNB), 억세스 포인트(access point) 등의 용어에 의해 대체될 수 있다. 또한, 단말은 UE(User Equipment), MS(Mobile Station), MSS(Mobile Subscriber Station) 등의 용어로 대체될 수 있다.In this document, the embodiments of the present invention have been mainly described with a focus on the signal transmission/reception relationship between a terminal and a base station. This transmission/reception relationship is equally/similarly extended to signal transmission/reception between a terminal and a relay or a base station and a relay. A specific operation described as being performed by a base station in this document may, in some cases, be performed by its upper node. That is, it is obvious that various operations performed for communication with a terminal in a network composed of a plurality of network nodes including a base station may be performed by the base station or other network nodes other than the base station. The base station may be replaced with terms such as a fixed station, a Node B, an eNode B (eNB), an access point, etc. In addition, the terminal may be replaced with terms such as a UE (User Equipment), an MS (Mobile Station), an MSS (Mobile Subscriber Station), etc.

본 발명에 따른 실시예는 다양한 수단, 예를 들어, 하드웨어, 펌웨어(firmware), 소프트웨어 또는 그것들의 결합 등에 의해 구현될 수 있다. 하드웨어에 의한 구현의 경우, 본 발명의 일 실시예는 하나 또는 그 이상의 ASICs(application specific integrated circuits), DSPs(digital signal processors), DSPDs(digital signal processing devices), PLDs(programmable logic devices), FPGAs(field programmable gate arrays), 프로세서, 콘트롤러, 마이크로 콘트롤러, 마이크로 프로세서 등에 의해 구현될 수 있다.Embodiments according to the present invention can be implemented by various means, for example, hardware, firmware, software, or a combination thereof. In case of implementation by hardware, an embodiment of the present invention can be implemented by one or more ASICs (application specific integrated circuits), DSPs (digital signal processors), DSPDs (digital signal processing devices), PLDs (programmable logic devices), FPGAs (field programmable gate arrays), processors, controllers, microcontrollers, microprocessors, etc.

펌웨어나 소프트웨어에 의한 구현의 경우, 본 발명의 일 실시예는 이상에서 설명된 기능 또는 동작들을 수행하는 모듈, 절차, 함수 등의 형태로 구현될 수 있다. 소프트웨어 코드는 메모리 유닛에 저장되어 프로세서에 의해 구동될 수 있다. 상기 메모리 유닛은 상기 프로세서 내부 또는 외부에 위치하여, 이미 공지된 다양한 수단에 의해 상기 프로세서와 데이터를 주고받을 수 있다.In the case of implementation by firmware or software, one embodiment of the present invention may be implemented in the form of a module, procedure, function, etc. that performs the functions or operations described above. The software code may be stored in a memory unit and may be driven by a processor. The memory unit may be located inside or outside the processor and may exchange data with the processor by various means already known.

본 발명은 본 발명의 특징을 벗어나지 않는 범위에서 다른 특정한 형태로 구체화될 수 있음은 당업자에게 자명하다. 따라서, 상기의 상세한 설명은 모든 면에서 제한적으로 해석되어서는 아니되고 예시적인 것으로 고려되어야 한다. 본 발명의 범위는 첨부된 청구항의 합리적 해석에 의해 결정되어야 하고, 본 발명의 등가적 범위 내에서의 모든 변경은 본 발명의 범위에 포함된다.It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the present invention can be embodied in other specific forms without departing from the scope of the present invention. Therefore, the above detailed description should not be construed as limiting in all aspects, but should be considered as illustrative. The scope of the present invention should be determined by a reasonable interpretation of the appended claims, and all changes within the equivalent scope of the present invention are included in the scope of the present invention.

상술한 바와 같은 본 발명의 실시형태들은 다양한 이동통신 시스템에 적용될 수 있다.The embodiments of the present invention as described above can be applied to various mobile communication systems.

Claims (15)

무선 통신 시스템에서 단말이 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택하는 방법에 있어서,In a method for a terminal to select a candidate relay terminal in a wireless communication system, 릴레이 통신과 관련된 설정 정보를 수신하는 단계;A step for receiving setup information related to relay communication; 복수의 릴레이 단말들로부터 디스커버리 메시지들을 수신하는 단계; 및A step of receiving discovery messages from multiple relay terminals; and 상기 디스커버리 메시지들 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 후보 릴레이 단말을 제1 개수 이상 선택하는 단계를 포함하고,A step of selecting at least a first number of candidate relay terminals for the relay communication among the plurality of relay terminals based on the discovery messages and the setting information, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정되는, 방법.A method wherein the first number is determined based on the height of the terminal and the setting information. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 높이 범위 별로 상이하게 결정되는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the first number is determined differently for each height range based on the setting information. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 디스커버리 메시지는 비행 경로에 대한 정보를 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the discovery message includes information about the flight path. 제3항에 있어서,In the third paragraph, 상기 후보 릴레이 단말은 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 단말의 비행 경로와 소정의 오차 범위 내의 비행 경로를 갖는 릴레이 단말인 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the above candidate relay terminal is a relay terminal among the plurality of relay terminals having a flight path within a predetermined error range with respect to the flight path of the terminal. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 후보 릴레이 단말은 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 설정 정보에 의해 설정된 선택 허용 높이 범위 내에 위치하는 릴레이 단말인 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the above candidate relay terminal is a relay terminal located within a selection allowable height range set by the above setting information among the plurality of relay terminals. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 단말의 높이가 상기 설정 정보에 포함된 특정 높이 범위에 속하는 것에 기초하여 상기 후보 릴레이 단말의 선택과 관련된 동작의 수행하는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method characterized in that an operation related to selection of the candidate relay terminal is performed based on the height of the terminal falling within a specific height range included in the setting information. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들에 대한 정보를 기지국에 보고하는 단계;를 더 포함하는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that it further comprises a step of reporting information about candidate relay terminals of the first number or more to a base station. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 단말은 상기 선택된 후보 릴레이 단말에 기반하여 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 무선 링크를 제2 개수 이상 형성하는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the terminal forms a second or more number of wireless links for the relay communication based on the selected candidate relay terminal. 제8항에 있어서,In Article 8, 상기 제2 개수는 상기 설정 정보 및 상기 단말의 높이에 기초하여 결정되는 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the second number is determined based on the setting information and the height of the terminal. 제1항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 단말은 UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) 리모트 (Remote) 단말인 것을 특징으로 하는, 방법.A method, characterized in that the terminal is a UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) remote terminal. 제1항에 기재된 방법을 수행하기 위한 프로그램을 기록한 컴퓨터로 읽을 수 있는 기록 매체.A computer-readable recording medium having recorded thereon a program for performing the method described in claim 1. 무선 통신 시스템에서 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택하는 단말에 있어서,In a terminal for selecting a candidate relay terminal in a wireless communication system, RF(Radio Frequency) 송수신기; 및RF(Radio Frequency) transceiver; and 상기 RF 송수신기와 연결되는 프로세서를 포함하고,comprising a processor connected to the RF transceiver; 상기 프로세서는 상기 RF 송수신기를 제어하여 릴레이 통신과 관련된 설정 정보를 수신하고, 복수의 릴레이 단말들로부터 디스커버리 메시지들을 수신하며, 상기 디스커버리 메시지들 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 후보 릴레이 단말을 제1 개수 이상 선택하고,The processor controls the RF transceiver to receive configuration information related to relay communication, receives discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals, and selects a first or more number of candidate relay terminals for the relay communication from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the discovery messages and the configuration information. 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정되는, 단말.A terminal, wherein the first number is determined based on the height of the terminal and the setting information. 무선 통신 시스템에서 후보 릴레이 단말을 선택하는 단말을 제어하는 프로세싱 장치에 있어서,In a processing device for controlling a terminal for selecting a candidate relay terminal in a wireless communication system, 적어도 하나의 프로세서; 및at least one processor; and 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 연결되고 명령어들을 저장하는 적어도 하나의 메모리를 포함하되, 상기 명령어들은 상기 적어도 하나의 프로세서에 의해 실행되는 것을 기반으로 상기 단말로 하여금:At least one memory coupled to said at least one processor and storing instructions, said instructions being executed by said at least one processor, wherein said terminal causes: 릴레이 통신과 관련된 설정 정보를 수신하고, 복수의 릴레이 단말들로부터 디스커버리 메시지들을 수신하며, 상기 디스커버리 메시지들 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 상기 릴레이 통신을 위한 후보 릴레이 단말을 제1 개수 이상 선택하게 하며,Receives configuration information related to relay communication, receives discovery messages from a plurality of relay terminals, and selects at least a first number of candidate relay terminals for the relay communication from among the plurality of relay terminals based on the discovery messages and the configuration information. 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정되는, 프로세싱 장치.A processing device, wherein the first number is determined based on the height of the terminal and the setting information. 무선 통신 시스템에서 기지국이 단말로부터 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신하는 방법에 있어서,In a method for a base station to receive candidate relay information from a terminal in a wireless communication system, 상기 단말에게 릴레이 통신과 관련된 설정 정보를 전송하는 단계;A step of transmitting setup information related to relay communication to the above terminal; 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 선택된 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들에 대한 상기 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신하는 단계; 및A step of receiving candidate relay information for a first or more number of candidate relay terminals selected from among the plurality of relay terminals; and 상기 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들 중에서 릴레이 통신을 수행할 적어도 하나의 릴레이 단말을 선택하고, 상기 선택된 적어도 하나의 단말에 대한 정보를 상기 단말에게 전송하는 단계를 포함하고,A step of selecting at least one relay terminal to perform relay communication among the candidate relay terminals of the first number or more, and transmitting information about the at least one selected terminal to the terminal, 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정되는, 방법.A method wherein the first number is determined based on the height of the terminal and the setting information. 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말로부터 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신하는 기지국에 있어서,In a base station that receives candidate relay information from a terminal in a wireless communication system, RF(Radio Frequency) 송수신기; 및RF(Radio Frequency) transceiver; and 상기 RF 송수신기와 연결되는 프로세서를 포함하고,comprising a processor connected to the RF transceiver; 상기 프로세서는 상기 RF 송수신기를 제어하여 릴레이 통신과 관련된 설정 정보를 전송하고, 상기 복수의 릴레이 단말들 중에서 선택된 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들에 대한 상기 후보 릴레이 정보를 수신하며, 상기 제1 개수 이상의 후보 릴레이 단말들 중에서 릴레이 통신을 수행할 적어도 하나의 릴레이 단말을 선택하고, 상기 선택된 적어도 하나의 단말에 대한 정보를 상기 단말에게 전송하며,The processor controls the RF transceiver to transmit setting information related to relay communication, receives candidate relay information for a first or more number of candidate relay terminals selected from among the plurality of relay terminals, selects at least one relay terminal to perform relay communication from among the first or more number of candidate relay terminals, and transmits information about the at least one selected terminal to the terminal. 상기 제1 개수는 상기 단말의 높이 및 상기 설정 정보에 기초하여 결정되는, 기지국.A base station, wherein the first number is determined based on the height of the terminal and the setting information.
PCT/KR2024/007452 2023-07-10 2024-05-31 Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor Pending WO2025014091A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR10-2023-0089248 2023-07-10
KR20230089248 2023-07-10
KR20230089838 2023-07-11
KR10-2023-0089838 2023-07-11

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025014091A1 true WO2025014091A1 (en) 2025-01-16

Family

ID=94216066

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2024/007452 Pending WO2025014091A1 (en) 2023-07-10 2024-05-31 Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025014091A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20210124032A (en) * 2020-04-03 2021-10-14 한국전자통신연구원 Method for discovering and selecting relay user equipment in communication system
KR102411651B1 (en) * 2014-12-19 2022-06-21 삼성전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for providing relay selection in device-to-device communication system
WO2023014762A1 (en) * 2021-08-06 2023-02-09 Idac Holdings, Inc. Cellular connectivity and qos monitoring and prediction for uav communication
US20230082175A1 (en) * 2021-09-09 2023-03-16 Nokia Technologies Oy Method, apparatus and computer program product for management of sidelink based relaying
KR20230048516A (en) * 2020-07-29 2023-04-11 엘지전자 주식회사 Operation method related to relay UE selection in a wireless communication system

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102411651B1 (en) * 2014-12-19 2022-06-21 삼성전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for providing relay selection in device-to-device communication system
KR20210124032A (en) * 2020-04-03 2021-10-14 한국전자통신연구원 Method for discovering and selecting relay user equipment in communication system
KR20230048516A (en) * 2020-07-29 2023-04-11 엘지전자 주식회사 Operation method related to relay UE selection in a wireless communication system
WO2023014762A1 (en) * 2021-08-06 2023-02-09 Idac Holdings, Inc. Cellular connectivity and qos monitoring and prediction for uav communication
US20230082175A1 (en) * 2021-09-09 2023-03-16 Nokia Technologies Oy Method, apparatus and computer program product for management of sidelink based relaying

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021002736A1 (en) Method for transmitting data by means of terminal in wireless communication system supporting sidelink, and device therefor
WO2021034167A1 (en) Method by which terminal transmits/receives sidelink signal in wireless communication system for supporting sidelink, and apparatus therefor
WO2021034165A1 (en) Method by which terminal performs sidelink communication in wireless communication system for supporting sidelink, and apparatus therefor
WO2021150089A1 (en) Method by which v2x vehicle transmits virtual v2x message in wireless communication system supporting sidelink, and device therefor
WO2024191263A1 (en) Method by which terminal performs communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2024210524A1 (en) Method by which network transmits message in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor
WO2025014091A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
WO2024232692A1 (en) Method by which terminal communicates in wireless communication system and device therefor
WO2025150663A1 (en) Method and device for performing communication by terminal in wireless communication system
WO2025155093A1 (en) Method by which user equipment performs communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
WO2024196154A2 (en) Method by which user equipment performs communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2025009822A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2024205337A1 (en) Method by which terminal establishes communication in wireless communication system and device therefor
WO2025014268A1 (en) Operation method related to qos in multi-hop ue-to-ue relay and device therefor
WO2021193995A1 (en) Method for receiving signal in wireless communication system supporting sidelink, and device therefor
WO2025023709A1 (en) Method for configuring connection in consideration of pdb separation in multi-hop u2u operation and device therefor
WO2025058404A1 (en) Method for performing communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2025259065A1 (en) Method for performing communication by terminal in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor
WO2025018736A1 (en) Operation method related to emergency service in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
WO2025198336A1 (en) Method and device for performing relay communication in wireless communication system
WO2025033856A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system, and device therefor
WO2025173982A1 (en) Method for performing communication and device therefor in wireless communication system
WO2025014156A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication in wireless communication system and device therefor
WO2025009823A1 (en) Method for performing relay communication and device therefor in wireless communication system
WO2025063822A1 (en) Method for performing communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24839908

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1